Safety Manual Part B PDF

HS&E Procedures Manual
Title:
Cranes, Hoists and Rigging
Effective Date: May 20, 2009
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
1 of 50
HS&E Reference Number: B001
Issued: July 14, 2006
Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

Title:
REV No. AFFECTED PAGE(S)

1
5,12,17,18,22,23,24
Revision # 1
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
2 of 50
DESCRIPTION
May 20, 2009 Updates as per Alberta OH&S 2009
26,27,28,30,33,38,40

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
3 of 50
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................8
6.0
PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................... 12
7.0
APPENDICES ......................................................................................................... ..35
CRANE JOB SAFETY CHECKLIST..36

CRANE JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS.37
LIFT CALCULATION AND APPROVAL FORM..38
PERSONNEL LIFTING CHECK SHEET39
OPERATING NEAR ELECTRICAL POWER LINES40
CRANE PRE-USE CHECKLIST..42
HAND SIGNALS.45
CRANE PARTS..48

Title:
1.0
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
4 of 50
INTRODUCTION
Operations of cranes and the use of rigging presents many hazards. Ensuring
that equipment is designed and used properly and personnel are properly trained
is critical for ensuring the health and safety of workers, equipment and client
assets.
2.0
PURPOSE
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.0
SCOPE
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.0
Identify minimum crane operation requirements for hydraulic, conventional

and overhead cranes.
Identify minimum operator qualifications and competencies.
Establish requirements for hoisting, rigging use and inspections.
Classify lifts and lifting plans.
All company facilities, employees and subcontractors.

All cranes, side booms, picker trucks and rigging.
All crane basket work (personal hoist).
Other procedures that may apply to Cranes, Hoists and Rigging:
Lock Out/Tag Out
Worker Fall Protection
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Anti-two Block Device A device that, when activated, produces and

auditable warning alarm or disengages crane functions to prevent contact
with jib or main boom and the block.
4.2
Boom A member hinged to the rotating superstructure and used for

supporting the hoisting tackle.
4.3
Boom Angle The angle of the longitudinal axis of the base boom
sections above or below the horizontal.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
5 of 50
4.4
Boom Truck A hydraulically powered mechanical device or structure

that raises, lowers or moves a load suspended from the boom by a hook,
cable, or rope. Is equipped with a boom that is capable of moving in the
vertical plane, the horizontal plane, or both the vertical and horizontal
planes at the same time, and is mounted on a truck or other chassis to
provide mobility.
4.5
Brake A device used for retarding or stopping motion by means of

friction or power.
4.6
Non-Standard Lift When conditions are not optimal, lifts shall be

exercised with extreme caution and planning. Non-Standard lifts may
involve one or more of the following criteria:
All lifts greater than 50% but not exceeding 75% of Crane/Rigging
capacity.
Any item weighing 50 100 tons.
Two crane lift where the total load is less than 70% of either crane.
All lifts involving a personnel basket.
Operator not able to see the load (Blind Lift)
4.7
Competent Adequately qualified, suitable trained and with sufficient

experience to safely perform work without supervision or with only a
minimal degree of supervision.
4.8
Crane Equipment that is designed to lift loads, lower loads and move
loads horizontally when they are lifted. The following is a list of cranes
commonly used:
4.9
Rough Terrain Crane (RT)

Hydraulic Truck Crane
Conventional mobile Crane
Conventional Crawler Crane
Carry Deck Crane
All Terrain Hydraulic Crane
Boom Truck
Crane Log A bound book with numbered pages that is used for keeping
a record of the inspection, testing, and maintenance performed on each
crane.

Title:
4.10
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
6 of 50
Critical Lift A crane lift requiring detailed planning and additional safety
precautions to be implemented. Critical lifts may involve one or more of
the following criteria:
Any lift exceeding 75% capacity of Crane/Rigging

Any item weighing greater than 100 tons.
Any two crane lift where the total load exceeds 70% capacity of either
crane (including tailing cranes.)
Any lift over buildings or critical operating facilities; where the load is
close to overhead power lines; transferring a suspended load; and lifts
of major critical equipment.
Two crane pick and carry.
NOTE: Side Booms lifting together are not designate Critical Lifts.
4.11
Designated Signaler A person designated and competent to give

signals.
4.12
Direct Supervision Under the supervision of a competent worker who is

personally and visually supervising the other worker and able to
communicate readily and clearly with the worker.
4.13
Jib An extension to a boom that is attached to the boom tip to provide

additional boom length.
4.14
Load (Working) The external load, applied to the crane, including the
weight of the load-attaching equipment such as load blocks and all rigging.
4.15
Load Indicating Device A device that measures and indicates the

weight of the load being lifted and must only be used as a guide. All
weights must be determined prior to the lift.
4.16
Manufacturers Rated Capacity The maximum capacity, speed, load,

depth of operation or working pressure, as the case may be,
recommended by the specifications of the manufacturer of the equipment
for the operation of the equipment based on its intended design and use.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
7 of 50
4.17
Manufacturers Specifications The written specifications, instructions

or recommendations, if any, of the manufacturer of equipment or supplies,
that describes how the equipment or supplies are to be erected, installed,
assembled, started, operated, handled, stored, stopped, calibrated,
adjusted, maintained, repaired or dismantled, including a manufacturers
instruction, operating or maintenance manual or drawings for the
equipment.
4.18
Operate Includes using or handling the machinery or equipment by

starting it, moving it or operating any controls, or movement of hoist or
boom.
4.19
Outrigger Extendable or fixed metal arms, attached to the mounting

base, which rest on supports at the outer ends, for the purpose of
stabilizing the crane.
4.20
Overhead/Gantry Crane A crane and hoist that is mounted on a bridge

which can travel partially or completely over a large area. It can move in
multiple directions and is normally operated through a pendulum control
panel.
4.21
Power Controlled Lowering A system or device in the power train,

other than the load hoist brake, that can control the lowering rate of speed
of the load hoist mechanism.
4.22
Professional Engineer A professional Engineer under the Engineering,

Geological and Geophysical Professions Act.
4.23
Rigging Refers to both of the following:
4.24
The hardware and equipment used to safely attach a load to a lifting

device.
The process of safely attaching a load to a hook by means of
adequately rated and properly applied slings and related hardware.
Special Rigging Rigging equipment or systems that are not a normal

application.
These could be specifically designed for the
material/equipment being lifted or other unique rigging requirements.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
8 of 50
4.25
Tonne A unit of weight equal to 1,000 kilograms, or 2,204.6 pounds.
4.26
Trained A worker who holds a provincial crane operators ticket or an

intra-provincial crane operators ticket (Red Seal) or an Apprentice enrolled
in a recognized apprentice program meeting provincial regulations.
NOTE: Overhead crane operators will have specific training related to the
equipment being used or operated. This training will be documented.
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Project/Construction Managers
5.2
Ensure personnel authorized to operate cranes or rig are competent.

Ensure that site supervision is aware of their responsibilities and is in
compliance to this procedure.
Ensure the crane pre-use check list is completed prior to using the
crane on site.
Ensure certification and documentation for cranes, rigging equipment
and hardware is filed on site.
Ensure that suppliers of cranes uphold all contractual obligations in the
maintenance and repair of the cranes supplied.
Ensure that the crane and associated equipment is used in accordance
with the manufacturers requirements.
Ensure all mobile cranes constructed and utilized meet the design
specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for
Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, ANSI B30.5.
Ensure that a substantial and durable load-rating chart with clearly
legible letters and figures is provided with each piece of lifting
equipment.
Ensure load charts are identified with equipment and/or serial number.
Ensure field engineering studies are conducted when required.
Superintendent
On-site supervision has overall responsibility for crane use and the lift and
must plan all phases of operation. This includes coordination with the
Crane Operator who has the final say regarding the safe operation. Site
supervision is specifically responsible to:

Title:
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 50
Ensure the Operator, Signal Person and Rigger are competent and the
Signal Person is knowledgeable of the international hand signals.
Review certifications and documentation of cranes, rigging equipment
and hardware and properly file on site.
Audit Operators logbook for compliance.
Determine the correct load weight and lifting radius required and inform
the crane Operator.
Ensure that the Crane Operator fully understands the load chart and is
capable of determining the cranes net capacity for all operating
conditions.
Supervise the rigging crew.
Review the competency and knowledge of Operators when assigning
them to specific equipment.
Designate Riggers and Signal Person for the Crane Operator.
Ensure all involved personnel in the operation understand their jobs,
responsibilities and have the necessary equipment to perform their job
in a safe manner.
Assess Operator Apprentices competency prior to them operating any
mobile crane. Assistance from a competent journeyman Crane
Operator will be required.
Conduct FLHA, Lift Calculation & Approval Form, and Operating Near
Electrical Lines Form or Personnel Lifting Check Sheet as required.
Provide a well prepared working area for the crane before and after
arrival on site. This involves ensuring that:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Revision # 1
Section: B001
Access roads are prepared.

Operating locations are graded, level and compacted.
Room is available to erect/extend the boom, and out riggers.
Blocking is used to support the boom during assembly or
disassembly.
Blocking/matting is used under outriggers.
Operating locations are far enough away from power lines,
excavations or buried utilities.
Ropes or barricades are positioned to prevent access into
operating area.
Ensure workers who are assigned inspection responsibilities are
competent.

Title:
5.3
Page #
10 of 50
Audit compliance to this procedure to ensure rigging and crane

operations are carried out in a safe manner.
Human Resources Manager
5.5
Controlled Document
Corporate HS&E Manager
5.4
Revision # 1
Section: B001
Verify that the Crane Operator holds a certificate of qualification issued

by the appropriate regulatory authority before hiring.
Crane Operator
Certified and trained in the operation of the particular lifting device.

Ensure that any crane left unattended is secured with brakes and dogs
in the locked position. If this is not practical, then the boom shall be
lowered to 70 or lower from the horizontal and positioned with winds
coming from the rear of the crane.
Only take signals from a designated signaler who shall be identified
with a fluorescent orange wristlet or any worker for an emergency stop
signal.
Ensure the safety of the crane operation. If there is a reason to believe
that the lift might be dangerous or unsafe, the Operator must refuse
the lift until the hazard has been rectified and safe conditions assured.
Be totally familiar with the cranes operating manual and load chart.
The Operator must understand the correct meaning of all notes and be
capable of calculating the cranes net capacity under all possible
conditions.
Inspect and maintain the crane as prescribed by both the owner and
the manufacturer.
Inform the Superintendent of any maintenance required for the
machine. This shall be done in writing in an inspection report.
Check that the site is adequately prepared for the crane.
Review the planned lift with the site supervision and the crew. Also, do
the final check before attempting the lift.
Confirm the load weight and rigging weight. The Crane Operator is not
responsible for determining these weights, but he must know what they
are.
Ensure proper assembly, set up and rigging of the crane.
Follow manufacturers operating instructions in accordance with the
load chart and manufacturers specifications.
Maintain communication with Signal Person.

Title:
5.6
Controlled Document
Page #
11 of 50
Confirm load placement location.

Remain in the crane at all times when the load is in the air.
Move the crane.
Shut down and secure the machine when it is not operating.
Assess Operators Apprentice competency prior to them operating any
mobile crane, as directed by the responsible Superintendent.
Ensure that no persons are within the radius of rotation of any part of
the crane.
Upon changing shifts, the Operator shall notify the next Operator and
Superintendent of required maintenance or repairs.
Ensure that the crane is level, that it is operated in its most stable
position and in the area of highest capacity.
The Operator shall know the weight of the load and determine if it is
within the capacity of the machine. The Lift Calculation and
Approval Form (Appendix 3) must be used for each non-standard or
critical lift.
Check the rope and rope spooling on the drum to see whether it has
become slack, over wound or has less than 5 wraps remaining on the
drum when the line is fully played out.
Sound crane horn or other method to notify workers of lift in progress.
Authorize 3rd year Apprentice operator to take part in non-standard and
critical lifts, including operation of crane under supervision of a
Journeyman.
Apprentice Crane Operator
5.7
Revision # 1
Section: B001
Must work under the direct supervision of a journeyman Crane

Operator who is competent to operate the equipment and who is
authorized to operate the particular lifting device.
Rigger
Discuss lift requirements with Crane Operator and designate Signal

Person.
Assist in setting up the crane.
Ensure proper size and type chokers are used to lift the load.
Inspect and use shackles rated for lift.
Attach chokers securely to the load.
Apply proper sling softeners where required.
Visually check chokers for wear and replace if required.
Use tag lines on loads.
Relay signals to designated Signal Person when required.

Title:
5.8
Controlled Document
Page #
12 of 50
Ensure adequate blocking is ready to set loads on.

Ensure load is free from all obstructions before attempting lift.
Check position of chokers for binding when load is being moved.
If final alignment cannot be done freely, the Rigger will align by
mechanical means such as wedges, drift pins, jacks, come-a-longs or
chain-falls (back up slings may be required).
Ensure proper tools and equipment are available to secure load when
set into position.
Ensure area is clear of personnel. No personnel are permitted within
25 feet of the tracks of a crawler crane in movement.
Designate Signaler
6.0
Revision # 1
Section: B001
Discuss lift requirements with Crane Operator and Rigger.

Guide and direct the crane in and out of congested areas.
Flag off the area when the crane is in position.
Ensure boom does not strike any equipment or power lines.
Ensure crane can swing without making contact with any obstructions.
Ensure Crane Operator and Rigger understand the method of signaling
to be used (i.e. rigging whistles, radios).
Obtain radios and establish method of signals with Crane Operator
when visibility will be obstructed.
Watch headache ball and main block to prevent them from two
blocking.
Make Crane Operator aware of boom deflection on heavier lifts.
Wear armbands which identify that person as the Signal Person.
Ensure area is clear of personnel. No personnel are permitted within
25 feet of the tracks of a crawler crane in movement.
PROCEDURE
This procedure applies wherever work is performed at our maintenance,
fabrication or construction locations.
All mobile cranes, overhead cranes and material hoists shall be designed,
manufactured, installed, operated, tested, maintained and repaired in accordance
with the requirements of CSA Z150-98(R2004) Safety Code for Mobile Cranes,
CSA Z256-1987 Safety Code for Material Hoists, CSA B167-96 Safety Code for
Overhead Cranes and Hoists, and Workplace Health and Safety Regulations.

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
13 of 50
All rigging components shall be designed in accordance with ANSI B30.20 Below
the Hook Lifting Devices (slings, spreaders, lifting fixtures, shackles, multi-leg lift
assemblies, eyebolts, turnbuckles, swivel hoist rings, dynamometers, and
precision load positioners).
The equipment shall be either designed by a recognized manufacturer or
designed by a Professional Engineer registered with the Association of
Professional Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists (A.P.E.G.G.).
All cranes shall be operated in accordance with this standard.
Only cranes that have been pre-qualified and reviewed are permitted to perform
work on our work sites. The Crane Pre-use Check list must be completed prior
to using the crane on site (see Appendix 6). The Superintendent must ensure
that this document is completed prior to use.

Title:
6.1
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
14 of 50
Crane Operator Qualifications

Operators of mobile cranes shall hold a valid journeyman qualification
certificate for heavy equipment operators (Crane and Hoist Equipment) or
by other provincial jurisdiction with Red Seal approval.
Boom truck (or articulating cranes) requires a certified Boom Truck
Operators Certificate.
Apprentice operators must be registered with a recognized Apprenticeship
and Industry Training Board. Apprentice operators must work under the
direct supervision of an authorized competent journeyman Operator.
WARNING
3rd year Apprentice operators may be permitted to operate cranes
involved in non-standard and critical lifts only after the Journeyman
crane operator has deemed the Apprentice competent for the
specific lift, and crane being used, and with approval of the site
superintendent.
The Crane Operator must be able to perform and document in a crane
logbook daily pre-operational maintenance checks to ensure the
equipment can safely handle all loads.
Superintendents are responsible to ensure that logbooks are being
maintained and any mechanical issues identified that can interfere with the
safe operation of the crane are corrected on a timely basis.
The Operator must be qualified to use and be familiar with the hoisting
equipment to be operated, otherwise shall be given sufficient time and
instruction to adequately check out and test the equipment. The site
Superintendent shall review the competency and knowledge of Operators
when assigned to specific equipment.
6.2
Crane and Hoisting Operations General Reference

WARNING
Cranes operated near power lines must be operated in accordance
with Appendix 5.

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
15 of 50
WARNING
Hoisting shall be suspended when an electrical storm is imminent.
All cranes must be equipped with a load-measuring device such as a
Load Moment Indicator (LMI), weight load indicator or other suitable
means to measure the weight of the load lifted. The equipment must be
proven accurate prior to use on the project (see Appendix 6 for check list).
All cranes and boom trucks must be equipped with a functioning anti-two
block device to prevent accidental contact between the load block and
head sheaves, which can cause breakage of the wire rope and/or damage
to the boom.
All cranes must have either mechanical or computer actuated boom
angle indicator installed and in proper working order.
All cranes must have a load chart that can easily be read by the Operator
from his operating station. This chart must be permanently placed beside
the Operator and cannot be removed for any reason. Crane capacity
must be shown for loads on Outriggers, on rubber, and while traveling with
a load.
All cranes must have an operators manual specific to the crane readily
available for quick reference regarding the operation of the crane.
All cranes must have a daily pre-operation logbook for the Operator to
complete prior to any crane operation.
The Operator must know the total weight of the load being lifted including
the weight of all rigging as well as the operating radius for the lift (i.e. the
operating radius is the distance from the crane centre of rotation to the
centre of gravity of the load). The Operator must apply the information to
lift the load within the load capacity of the crane. All radius checks are to
be confirmed with a measuring tape or other legal measuring device.
WARNING
Load Moment Indicator (LMI), is only to be used as a guide.
Load weight must be determined by one of the following methods:
Certified scale weight during transportation.


Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
16 of 50
Calibrated Weight Load Indicator.

Calculated weight verified independently by two different sources.
Weight supplied from original vendor drawings. Superintendents are to
ensure all internal components; access platforms, insulation, piping,
etc. are calculated on the vendor drawing.
The following information must be known for all lifts:
Total weight of the item to be lifted,

Total weight of the rigging required for the lift,
Weight of the load block and hook or headache ball and hook plus the
weight of the load line,
Effective weight of auxiliary items attached to the crane but not in use
such as stowed jib, headache ball, rooster sheave, etc.,
Boom length,
Boom angle and maximum radius,
% of rated capacity while in operation,
Proximity to other structures or lines,
Ground conditions,
Level of crane or hoist, and
Wind velocity and temperature extremes.
WARNING
Crane Manufacturers Operators Manual must be referenced to
determine the wind speed restrictions that apply to each specific
crane.
All loads must be freely suspended and clear to lift, avoiding any possible
shock or impact load, as well as any obstructions or boom clearance
concerns. Loads shall not pass over personnel or over occupied buildings
or critical operating facilities.
Prior to lifting, the area affected by the lift will be walked to ensure the path
is clear of any non-essential personnel. Rigging whistles will be used to
warn all personnel in the area that a lift is taking place. Two or more
whistles may be required to ensure adequate warning to a larger area.
Operators shall only take signals from a designated signaler who shall be
identified with a fluorescent orange wrist gauntlet but will take a stop
signal from any worker.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
17 of 50
The Operator must remain in control of the load. The Operator must
ensure tag lines are in place and are manned to assist in controlling the
load. If tag lines are not practical, then a short line of suitable length shall
be coiled and attached to allow the worker to catch the load.
Hoist operations shall be suspended when the ambient temperature
reaches -40C except in case of an emergency. For temperatures below
-25C the manufacturers specification must be used for cranes/rigging.
Hoisting operations performed during hours of darkness or limited visibility
shall have adequate lighting and signaling arrangements.
The crane must be installed on a stable foundation when hoisting. The
ground under the crane must be compacted or proven stable to the crane
Operators satisfaction. Crane outriggers must be extended appropriately
and use pads of blocking underneath to spread the bearing loads. This
would also include crane installations placed over underground piping,
sewer lines, etc. The maximum applied ground bearing pressure between
the crane and the ground shall not exceed 238 kpa (5,000 psf). Should
this limit be exceeded, suitable crane support (i.e. wooden matting, fill,
steel plate, etc.) must be engineered by a professional engineer.
All lifts require pre-lift communication with all involved parties to discuss
the lift. Designate a Signal Person, Rigger and personnel to control tag
lines. Lifting procedure will be discussed as well as wind, weather
constraints, and adjacent hazards. All non-involved personnel must be
kept clear of the lifting area. Where required, Lift Calculation and
Approval Form must be performed.
The crew, in conjunction with the Superintendent, will conduct an FLHA for
each lift.
Prior to any lifts the swing area of cranes that present a pinch hazard must
be barricaded or flagged off to prevent unauthorized personnel from the
area.
When moving a crawler crane, ensure that all employees shall stay a
minimum of 25 feet away from the tracks in the event of a failure.
6.3
Blind Lifts
Radios must be used when the Operator does not have a clear view of
the Signal Person.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
18 of 50
Before starting the lift, the Superintendent must ensure that two fully
charged radios are available; one for the Operator and one for the
Signal Person. Spare, fully charged batteries should also be available.
A secure radio channel must be available for communication.
A radio check will be conducted before the start of the lift.
When the lift is in progress the Signal Person must remain in
continuous communication with the Operator and will remain in
constant communication until the lift is complete. If communication is
broken off, the Operator will assume the lift to be stopped (Dogged
until communication has been reestablished).
When hoisting, continuously inform Operator of how many yards, feet,
inches remain for completion. Same procedure applies for lowering.
When swinging load, instruct Operator to swing to the Operators left
or right.
Inform Operator roughly distance to be covered (degrees or feet).
DO NOT leave ball stranded out of sight if hook is unoccupied.
Be constantly aware of surrounding equipment, power sources and
other craft personnel working in the area, radio disruption, etc.
WARNING
Communication with the Crane Operator during the lift must go
through the Signal Person. Any interruption in radio communication
will cause the lift to be stopped.
The Superintendent in charge of the lift must ensure that the FLHA
addresses steps to eliminate any possibility of collisions between cranes,
lifting devices that are used, their loads or component parts.
6.4
Non-Standard and Critical Lifts

6.4.1 Non-Standard Lift
Each lift, regardless of size, must be planned to ensure safety.
When conditions are not optimal, lifts shall be exercised with
extreme caution and planning. All lifts that include any of the
following criteria are considered non-standard:
All lifts greater than 50% but not exceeding 75% of capacity.
Any item weighing 50 100 tons.
Two crane lift where the total load is less than 70% of either
crane.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
19 of 50
All lifts involving a personnel basket.

Operator not able to see the load (Blind Lift).
Non-Standard lifts require a crane job safety analysis, FLHA

and lift calculation and approval to be conducted to identify
and mitigate hazards.
6.4.2 Critical Lift
The following lifts of loads with a crane, gantry or jacking system,
are considered a critical lift as classified below:
6.4.2.1
Critical Lift
Any lift exceeding 75% capacity.

Any item weighing greater than 100 tons.
Any two crane lift where the total load exceeds 70%
capacity of either crane (side booms and tailing
cranes are not a two crane lift).
Any lift over buildings or critical operating facilities;
where the load is close to overhead power lines;
transferring a suspended load; and lifts of major
critical equipment.
All critical lifts require:
A FLHA.
A Crane Job Safety Checklist (CJS) consisting of
basic information shown in Appendix 1.
A Crane Job Safety Analysis consisting of basic
information shown in Appendix 2.
A Lift Calculation and Approval consisting of basic
information shown in Appendix 3.
An engineering rigging study consisting of a lift
drawing detailing as a minimum:
o Plan view showing crane lift radius, tail swing
radius, relevant site obstacles, orientation and
initial position of load, orientation and final position
of load, location of equipment transporter, initial
and final position of the crane if walking with a
load, details of location of superlift tray, etc.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
20 of 50
o Elevation view showing the boom clearance of the

load or rigging at minimum planned lift radius, the
elevation at final set position with anti-two block,
total rigging height, total load height and clearance
between the load and final set position shown.
o A complete rigging detail showing all rigging used
to make the lift complete with all sizes and
capacities of all rigging hardware.
o A chart detailing the crane/load/lift information,
with the type, capacity and configuration of the
crane detailed, boom length, amount of
counterweight used, weight of attachments, load
blocks, rigging load line, etc., complete details of
the weight of the load, and percentage of overall
capacity for the crane as shown.
o A detailed lift procedure outlining the lift sequence
as shown on the drawing.
o General notes regarding conditions during the lift
(i.e. wind speed, temperature, supervision, etc.).
o Note or chart detailing maximum Ground Bearing
pressure incurred and the situation when it occurs.
Engineered rigging studies shall be submitted to the
Project Manager for review two (2) weeks prior to
hoisting.
6.5
Tandem Lifts
Tandem lifts (lifting with more than one crane) shall be planned in detail.
The following precautions shall be observed:
When performing multiple crane lifts, each crane shall be derated a

minimum of (30%) unless an equalizing beam or other means are used
to guarantee the proper distribution between cranes. Multiple crane
lifts include tail cranes used in standard up-ending procedures.
When two or more cranes are being used, one competent person will
be responsible for directing the operation.
The competent person shall analyze the operation and instruct all
personnel in the proper positioning of the cranes, rigging the load, and
movement to be made.
The competent person shall ensure that the operators of the cranes
and the signalers are able to communicate effectively via visual or
audio means.

Title:
6.6
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
21 of 50
Ground conditions shall be properly considered, with special regard

given to any travel requirements.
A lift plan shall be developed to detail the operation and lift sequence.
No deviations will be permitted from the formal plan once operations
have started.
The lift will be stopped immediately when an
unanticipated circumstance becomes apparent and will not resume
until all required changes have been thoroughly reviewed, approved
and documented by the appropriate supervising personnel.
Pick and Carry

For any pick and carry operation only a conventional crawler and rough
terrain cranes can be used.
1.
Conventional Crawler Crane
2.
Rough Terrain (RT) Crane
Lifting with the jib is not permitted.

Any movement must be performed in the creep mode. Creep
is motion for crane travel not to travel more than 200 feet (60
meters) in any 30-minute period and to travel at the speed of
less than 1 mile per hour (1.6 km/hour).
For creep mode, the boom must be centered over front of
machine; swing lock engaged and load restrained from
swinging. Travel slowly, keeping the lifted load as close to the
ground as possible, and especially avoiding any abrupt steering,
accelerating or breaking.
The traveling procedures shall be in accordance with the crane
manufacturers recommendations.
The boom shall not be carried at such a high angle that it may
bounce back over the cab.
Negotiation of slopes by cranes traveling with loads shall not
be permitted.
Tires shall be inflated to the correct air pressure.

Rated lifting capacities are based on proper tire inflation,
capacity, and condition. Damaged tires are hazardous to safe
operation of the crane.
Rubber tire lifting charts must be used.
Lifting with the jib is not permitted.
When making a lift on rubber stationary, set parking brake.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
22 of 50
Any movement must be performed in creep mode. Creep is

motion for crane travel not to exceed 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
For creep mode, the house must be centered over the front of
the machine, the swing lock engaged and the load is restrained
from swinging. Travel slowly, keeping the lifted load as close to
the ground as possible, especially avoid any abrupt steering,
accelerating, or braking.
The traveling procedures shall be in accordance with the
crane manufacturers recommendations as per operators
manual.
WARNING
Site inspection must be performed prior to any pick and carry.
The crane operator, rigger and signalman must walk the route
of travel, ensuring all hazards are identified and cleared.
3.
Pick and Carrier is allowed with a Carry Deck Crane, when load is
placed on deck.

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Page #
Controlled Document
23 of 50
Non-Standard
Lift
Critical Lift
Engineered Rigging Study
Lift Calculation & Approval

Form
Operating Near Electrical
Lines
Personnel Lifting Check
Sheet
Description
FLHA
Criteria
Crane Job Safety Analysis
Table 1: Lifting Criteria Guideline
All lifts greater than 50% but not exceeding 75% of

capacity
Any item weighing 50 100 tons
Two crane lift where the total load is less than 70%
of either crane
All lifts involving a personnel basket
Operator not able to see the load (Blind Lift)
Any lift exceeding 75% capacity
Any item weighing greater than 100 tons
Any two crane lift where the total load exceeds 70%
capacity of either crane (side booms and tailing
cranes are not a two crane lift).
Any lift over buildings or critical operating facilities;

where the load is close to overhead power lines;
transferring a suspended load; and lifts of major
critical equipment
Two crane pick and carry
All lifts where ground conditions are questionable

No Lift
Wind speed exceeding 20 mph, 32 km/h, 9 m/s or

manufacturers specifications

Title:
6.7
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
24 of 50
RT and Conventional Crane Inspection and Maintenance

It is the responsibility of the crane owner or supplier of a crane to ensure
the crane is inspected daily, weekly and monthly or at intervals
recommended by the original equipment manufacturer. In the absence of
specific intervals, the crane must be inspected in accordance with the
requirements of CSA Z150-98(R2004) Safety Code for Mobile Cranes.
The crane owner or the party responsible for the operation of the crane
ensure that an up to date crane operation logbook is maintained and
readily available for review by the operator or any person requiring
maintenance information on the crane. The records typically should
include:
Operator daily inspections

Engineer certifications
Defects, deficiencies or other matters or incidents that may affect the
safe operation of the crane
Mechanical inspections
Record of repairs or modifications
Hours of service
Tests of safety devices
Preventative maintenance reports
Any other operational record prescribed by the manufacturer or OH&S
legislation.
All cranes must undergo a complete structural inspection and be certified

by a Professional Engineer registered with the Association of Professional
Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists (A.P.E.G.G.) annually. The
certificate shall verify that the structural integrity of all load related
components have been tested, and any repair performed is approved by
the certifying engineer. The certificate must itemize each component of
the equipment complete with all relevant component serial numbers (i.e.
boom, jib or mast section, load block and hook, or headache ball and hook
serial numbers) the certification shall include where applicable:
Visual and/or magnetic particle inspection of outriggers, crawler crane

track frames and pads, car body, crane carrier, steering knuckles, hook
roller assemblies, upper rotating frame, counter weight, live mast, back
hitch, gantry, bails, boom, mast or jib components, wire rope pendant
line sockets, superlift mast, superlift counter weight trays and wheeled
trays, load block and hook assemblies, headache ball and hook
assemblies, wedge sockets, boom pins and all sheaves

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
25 of 50
Visual inspection of all wire rope load lines, auxiliary lines, boom hoist
lines, pendant lines, superlift lines, etc.
Proof of CSA Z150-98(R2004) Inspections for a 5-year load block

teardown, and 10-year hydraulic crane boom disassembly inspections
as applicable to older cranes.
The crane shall be recertified every twelve months of crane operation.
A copy of the valid structural inspection certificate must be kept in the

operators cab at all times.
An inspection sticker for quick reference showing the expiry date of

the structural engineering certification to be affixed to the crane.
A conventional crane, once assembled on site, will be inspected.
Overhead Crane Inspection Procedure

A crane or overhead gantry shall be inspected by the employee trained to
use such equipment before each use and the focus for such an inspection
is as follows:
Inspect all functional operating mechanisms and ensure the controls

require constant manual pressure
Check for damage to or leaks from lines, tanks, valves, drain pumps,
and air or hydraulic systems.
Check the load hook for deformities or cracks.
Check all hoist chains for excessive wear, including end connectors.
Check all chains for kinks, twists and distorted links and stretches that
are beyond what is recommended by the manufacturer.
Inspect the rope for damage such as kinks, cracks, cutting, bending,
broken wires, unraveling, corroded or improperly connected end
connections.
Overhead Crane Operating Procedure
Operators must know the load capacity of the overhead crane. Loads
that exceed the limits of the crane will not be moved. The load rigging
requirements need special attention. Loads that cannot be safely
rigged will not be lifted. Before moving loads, the crane operator must

Title:
6.8
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
26 of 50
inspect the path of the crane travel for obstacles and people. The path
must be clear before starting any overhead crane movement.
Equipment shall be operated by a qualified, trained operator.
The operator, when operating the equipment, shall maintain full
attention on the task being performed (e.g. no use of headsets, music).
The operator shall ensure that hand signals used during the lift are
understood and followed by all involved.
No load in excess of the rated capacity shall be lifted, unless for test
purposes, and the test shall be an engineered lift.
If the overhead crane has been locked out or tagged out, the operator
shall not remove the lock or tag unless the lock or tag has been placed
there by the operator.
While the overhead crane is in operation, operators and other site
workers must be aware of the potential pinch and crush points and
stay clear of the moving machinery at all times.
Workers will never ride the load of an overhead crane.
When performing maintenance on overhead cranes, workers will use
lockout/tagout procedures to ensure there are no startups and
movements. To prevent activation of the crane, operators must lower
and secure loads when not in use and use appropriate parking and
shut down.
Safe Start-Up/Shutdown of Cranes in Cold Weather Climates

6.8.1 Hydraulic Cranes: Start-up
Complete pre-use inspection (walk around), check fluid levels

and unplug block heat cord, record inspection on pre-use
checklist and log book.
Start crane motor. Engage hydraulic P.T.O. only after engine is
running smoothly and warmed.
When crane and hydraulics are warming up, ensure area
around boom is clear of personnel then attempt to raise the load
block. Watch sheaves in block and boom head carefully to
ensure that the sheaves are turning and not frozen.
Telescope the boom in and watch the electrical spool mounted
on the side of the boom to ensure that the spool is not frozen.
Note: While completing these steps, have a competent person
observe the winch drum to ensure the cable does not spool
winch line from the drum faster than the block and ball will pull it
down.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
27 of 50
6.8.2 Hydraulic Cranes: Shutdown
Lift and retract all outriggers and outrigger beams.

Lift outrigger pads so they do not freeze to the ground.
Extend boom between 8 and 10 feet.
Ensure boom angle is at approximately a 60 boom angle.
Lower block and ball to approximately 7 feet from the ground.
6.8.3 Conventional Crawler Cranes: Start-up
Complete pre-use inspection (walk around), check fluid levels

and unplug block heat cord. Record inspection on pre-use
checklist and log book.
Start engine until idle smoothes out and then engage clutch to
hydraulic pumps slowly.
After engine and hydraulics reach sufficient temperature, slowly
raise block. Observe block carefully to ensure that sheaves are
turning and not frozen.
Slowly raise boom to a 70 boom angle, observe sheaves on
gantry and live mast to ensure they are not frozen. Have a
competent person observe the boom hoist drum to ensure that
excess winch line is not spooling out.
6.8.4 Conventional Crawler Cranes: Shutdown
6.9
Ensure the cranes tracks are on wood, crane mats, rig mats or
plywood to ensure that the tracks do not freeze to the ground.
Lower block and headache ball to approximately 7 feet from the
ground.
Shut down engine and disengage clutch to hydraulic pumps and
plug in. Bleed air tanks.
Personnel Hoisting
Personnel baskets (man baskets) shall only be used when other methods
of access would create greater hazard or other methods are not possible
due to structural design or site conditions. Alternate methods of access
shall be considered before using the personnel basket as an option. Any
lifting of people requires a Personnel Lifting Check Sheet (see
Appendix 4).

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
28 of 50
The crane must be de-rated to 50% of rated capacity including the total
weight of the man basket and load. Project Superintendent must ensure a
test lift is conducted prior to each use.
The test lift shall be done with the maximum rated load, evenly distributed
in the platform. The test will consist of the following sequence:
Suspended platform 1 metre off the ground to verify the integrity of the
work platform and the secondary support.
Suspended by primary support; lift the personnel platform 1 metre off
the ground to verify the integrity of the work platform and the primary
support.
Suspended by primary support, lift the personnel platform to all work
locations to verify the lift routes and that these work locations can be
reached by the crane using a maximum of 50% of the cranes capacity.
Personnel baskets used to hoist people must be engineered and approved

by a Professional Engineer registered with the Association of Professional
Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists (A.P.E.G.G.). The personnel
basket must be engineered in accordance with the requirements of CSA
Z150-98(R2004).
Personnel basket maximum rated capacity shall be permanently marked
on the platform. Total rated capacity includes; weight of the empty basket
plus allowable weight in people, material and tools it can carry.
The number of personnel working in the personnel basket shall not
exceed rated capacity and shall not be more people than the number
required for the work being performed.
The personnel basket hoist line and rigging must have a safety factor of
10:1. All eyes in wire rope slings shall be fabricated with thimbles.
Rigging components used for the hoisting of personnel shall not be used
for any other purpose. Shackles shall be an alloy anchor type shackle
with a bolt, nut and retaining pin or must have pins wired through the eye
to prevent movement.
Must have secondary means of support, referred to as a lifeline, capable
of withstanding the entire weight, with a load factor of 10:1, which is
attached to the crane above the headache ball or hook wedge socket.

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
29 of 50
The crane must be equipped with an anti-two block device and must have
automatic capabilities to disengage all crane functions whose movement
can cause two-blocking.
The crane hook must have a flip over position type hook latch.
Workers in personnel basket must wear a full body harness with a lanyard
attached to an approved anchor point within the man basket itself.
The crane operator must have visual contact or be in radio communication
with the signal person in the basket at all times.
A tag line must be used when using a personnel basket. If there is a
possibility that the tag line may become entangled, it is to be pulled into
the basket.
Raising or lowering of the personnel baskets must be done using a friction
drum. Hoist drums or winches must have a power-down feature for
controlled lowering capability; free fall is prohibited. The cranes braking
systems shall be fail-safe and shall be so equipped that an engine failure
will result in automatic engagement. Hoisting and lowering speed shall
not exceed 30 metres (100 ft) per minute.
Crane travel is prohibited while personnel are suspended in the personnel
basket.
No additional crane block is to be suspended above the basket.
6.10
Personnel Basket Inspection
A visual inspection of the personnel basket must be made prior to each

lift.
The personnel basket must be inspected and certified annually by a
Professional Engineer registered with the Association of Professional
Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists (A.P.E.G.G.).
The personnel basket must have a nameplate attached showing the
date of the last inspection.
The personnel basket must be constructed in accordance with the
requirements of CSA Z150-98(R2004).
An independent wire-rope auxiliary choker (5/8 minimum) will run
through a master link and attach by both eyes of the choker to a screw
pin shackle, which will be attached from the master link to above the

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
30 of 50
headache ball. This will prevent the personnel basket from falling if it
disengages from the hook.
Safety latch to be wired closed.
Illustration 6.10.1
Arrangement illustrating the safe
work practice for rigging a cranesuspended work platform (man
basket).

Title:
6.11
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
31 of 50
Rigging
For purposes of this procedure, rigging includes but is not limited to; wire
rope, nylon slings as well as chain falls, shackles, hooks, spreader bars
and other load bearing hoisting attachments.
All slings must be designed, maintained and used in accordance with
ANSI B30.9 Slings.
WARNING
The use of chain slings is strictly prohibited.
Any rigging component used in a towing operation will not be used
for any hoisting operation.
Rigging must be inspected thoroughly prior to each period of continuous
use during the shift to ensure that the rigging is functional and safe.
Defective rigging shall not be used.
All rigging components other than slings shall be designed in accordance
with ASME B30.20-2006, Below the Hook Lifting Devices. Wire rope,
alloy steel chain, synthetic fibre rope, metal mesh slings and synthetic
fibre slings manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 will meet the
requirements of ASMC Standard B30.9-2006, Safety Standard for
Cableways, Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Hooks, Jacks and Slings. The
equipment shall be either designed by a recognized manufacturer or
designed by a Professional Engineer registered with the Association of
Professional Engineers, Geologists and Geophysicists (A.P.E.G.G.). The
components shall come with an engineer-approved chart clearly showing
the lifting capacities of the equipment and the component will be identified
with a unique number corresponding to the chart. Working loads on
rigging shall not exceed the safe limits established by the manufacturer.
Any rigging fabricated by an employer such as spreader bars, links and
lifting beams must be designed and certified by a professional engineer.
All spreader bars, lifting beams, links and other rigging components,
designed and certified by a professional engineer and fabricated by an
employer shall be magnetic particle inspected prior to initial use on the
project.
All rigging shall be clearly labeled to show the Safe Working Load. The
safe working loads of rigging shall be based on a 5 to 1 safety factor.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
32 of 50
6.11.1 Slings
When slings are applied to sharp edge loads, the sharp edges must
be protected with softeners to prevent damage to the slings.
6.11.2 Shackles
Shackles shall be used with the pin to the eye of the sling or lifting
lug. Pins shall not be in contact with the running part of any sling.
Shackles shall have the pins secured if there is potential for them to
turn.
WARNING
Securing the pins is mandatory when shackles are used as a
component for hoisting personnel.
6.11.3 Hooks
All hooks shall have functioning safety latches. Hooks and other
rigging components shall be attached in a secure manner.
WARNING
Hooks and other lifting attachments on the buckets of front
end loaders and backhoes are prohibited from use unless
designed and certified by a professional engineer.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
33 of 50
6.11.4 Plate and Beam Clamps

Plate and beam clamps shall not be used for hoisting unless they
cannot be practically replaced with another acceptable rigging
component. If beam or plate clamps are used, they must:
be locking or designed so that slackening of the hoist cable

does not release the clamp,
have manufacturers or engineer specification on capacity, sizes
and methods of inspection,
receive approval for use on the project by the Superintendent.
6.11.4 Chain Falls

Chain falls shall:
Have the capacity identified.

Have all components, including the hook, rated in consideration
of the required safety factors of a sufficient capacity for the
hoist.
Not be used with the chain wrapped around the load for
hoisting.
Have load limiters, if so equipped, set at or below the safe
working load.
Shall not be left unsecured or unattended while under load.
Shall not be used as a stand-alone rigging attachment for
hoisting with cranes.
When used to balance loads with a crane, have a secondary
safety line used as a backup. The backup sling will be of
sufficient strength to accommodate the full capacity of the load
should the device fail.
6.11.5 Inspection
All rigging components shall be inspected quarterly, at a minimum,
and color-coded. Inspectors will be designated by the General
Foreman/Superintendent and must have appropriate qualifications.
The following is the criteria for the testing and inspection of rigging
prior to the initial use on the work site. The conditions for removal
from service will apply to all subsequent inspections.
Wire rope shall be removed from service if there is:

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
34 of 50
3 or more broken wires in one lay between end connectors.

More than one broken wire at an end connector.
Any evidence of exposure to extreme heat or electrical arcing.
Any damage or distortion due to corrosion, bulging, kinking, bird
caging or any other form of damage.
Synthetic fibre slings shall be removed from service if there is:
Evidence of exposure to heat (hard smooth sections).

Cuts or frays.
Any internal wear indicators visible.
Manufacturer tag or appropriate identification is missing.
Shackles shall be removed from service if there is:
No permanent indication of capacity from the manufacturer.

Any cracks detected through magnetic particle examination or
visual inspection.
Any distortion to its shape.
A failure of the pin to fully seat into the body.
Wear exceeding 10 percent of original dimension.
Hooks shall be removed from service if there is:
Any cracks detected through magnetic particle examination or

visual inspection.
Wear exceeding 10 percent of original dimension.
A bend or twist exceeding 10 degrees from the place of the
unbent hook.
Increase in throat opening exceeding 15 percent of original
dimension.
Missing or improperly functioning safety latch.
Plate and beam clamps shall be inspected and proof load tested
prior to initial use on the project, by a third party agency and be
certified to be in safe working order and of such a design that slack
in the hoist cable will not release the load.
Plate clamps shall be removed from service if there is:
Any failure or malfunction.


Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
35 of 50
Any evidence of cracks or damage or other defects.
Chain falls shall be inspected for internal wear and be proof load
tested to the limit as specified by the manufacturer.
7.0
APPENDICES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Crane Job Safety Checklist

Crane Job Safety Analysis
Lift Calculation and Approval Form
Personnel Lifting Check Sheet
Operating Near Electrical Power Lines
Crane Pre-use Checklist
Hand Signals
Crane Parts

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
36 of 50
APPENDIX 1- CRANE JOB SAFETY CHECKLIST

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS (JSA)
Crane Cert. Date:
Date:
Project/Job #:
Location:
Job Scope:
Issue
Discuss the following and develop specific control measures as required.

Yes
No
Control Measures
Are there any conflicting jobs in the vicinity

of the job at hand?
Has a line of communication been

established with neighboring jobs?
Are personnel required to work in the

vicinity of mobile equipment?
Are there power lines within the vicinity of

the crane or equipment requiring caution?
Is the crane set-up location on firm wellcompacted soil?
Can personnel be caught in or between

anything?
Can personnel slip, trip, or fall to the same

level or to the area below?
Is there a possibility of over exertion or

strain by lifting, pulling, pushing or twisting?
Have all locations that pertain to the job
been reviewed? (secondary locations,
dump sites, assembly points, permit area)
Is a dry run required to operate the crane
through the proposed lift to identify
obstructions?
Has the weight of the object to be lifted
been verified?
Has all lift parameters been confirmed such
as radius, boom length, boom angle, etc.
been confirmed?
Is there a designated signal person
assigned to the lift?
Crane Operator:
Control Measures and comments:

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
37 of 50
APPENDIX 2- CRANE JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

Crane Task Hazard Assessment (CTHA)
Date:
Job/Task Description:
Construction Area:
Project/Job #:
Craft Performing Job:
Company:
Supervisor(s) Involved:
Reviewed by
Name (print):
Signature:
Position:
Date:
SEQUENCE OF BASIC JOB

STEPS/TASKS
HAZARDS/POTENTIAL
HAZARDS
RECOMMENDED HAZARD CONTROLS OR

SAFE JOB PROCEDURE
NOTE: Please do not use the backside of the sheet. Use a separate sign up sheet.

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
38 of 50
APPENDIX 3- LIFT CALCULATION AND APPROVAL FORM

Job #:
Location:
Operators:
(Please Print)
Crane 1: Make, Model, Tonnage
Crane 2: Make, Model, Tonnage
Job Description:
Date:
Supervisor Responsible for Lift:
(Please Print)
CRANE 1
GROSS CAPACITY (value on load chart)
LOAD RADIUS (actual measured radius)
NET LOAD (actual weight of load)
DEDUCTIONS:
Rigging Weight
Spreader Bars etc.
Load Block Weight
Headache Ball Weight
Effective Jib Weight
Parts of Line
TOTAL DEDUCTIONS:
GROSS LOAD
(net load plus total deductions)
PERCENTAGE OF GROSS CAPACITY
(gross load divided by gross capacity x 100
CRITICAL LIFT?
MAXIMUM WORKING RADIUS
(on load chart)
BOOM ANGLE @ MAXIMUM RADIUS
NET CAPACITY
(Gross capacity minus total deductions)
PERMITTED AREA OF OPERATION
CRANE CONFIGURATION
LIFT PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED:

SPECIAL CONDITIONS OR COMMENTS:
Approvals
Print Name
CRANE 2
lbs.
feet
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
feet
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
YES/NO
Over Side?
Over Rear?
Over Front?
Main Boom
Jib Length
Jib Offset
Luffing Jib
Signature
YES/NO
feet
feet
degrees
degrees
lbs.
lbs.
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
Date
Superintendent
Crane Operator #1
Crane Operator #2
(if required)

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Page #
Controlled Document
39 of 50
APPENDIX 4- PERSONNEL LIFTING CHECK SHEET

Date:
Time:
Crane Type:
Radius:
Max Capacity:
Basket Weight:
Capacity:
Work Description:
PRE-LIFT CHECK LIST
Project/Job #:
Crane Size:
Number of persons hoisted:
Basket Certification Date:
YES
NO
Hoist cable condition

Test lift conducted
Ball and safety latch (mouse wired closed)
Fuel level checked
Personnel basket condition (approved for use at site)
Approved personnel basket hookup
Outrigger pads
Can all locations be reached (within 50% of canes rated load capacity)
Tag line (if not used, explain why)
A minimum of 5 wraps remains on hoist drum (boom angle of 80 degrees with
boom fully extended)
Crane set up as outlined in work practice
JOB SUPERINTENDENT
Check personnel safety equipment
Safety harness with shock absorbing lanyard for each employee
Employees competent giving hand signals
Check weather conditions (wind, lightening)
Tag line person designated
Work area flagged and tagged
Job discussed with employees crane operator
COMMENTS:
Site Superintendent Signature:
Crane Operator Signature:

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
40 of 50
APPENDIX 5 OPERATING NEAR ELECTRICAL POWER LINES

Any crane operating within the cranes limit of minimum safe distance (as specified in
Table 1 below) of any electrical line shall have a competent signaler at all times, within
view of the operator, to warn the operator when any part of the machine or load is
approaching the minimum safe distance from the power line.
Table 1
Minimum Safe Distance From Live Electrical Lines
(See Clauses 1, 2 and 3)
Voltage of Power Lines
0 50
Over 50 200
Over 200 250
Over 500 740
Over 750 1,000
Distance, m (ft)
3 (10)
4.6 (15)
7.6 (25)
10.7 (35)
13.7 (45)
1.
Except where the electrical distribution and transmission line have been deenergized and visibly grounded at the point of work, or where insulating barriers
not part of, or an attachment to, the crane have been erected to prevent physical
contact with the lines, cranes shall operate so that no part of the crane or load
enters into their minimum safe distance shown in Table 1.
2.
When operating, no part of any crane or its load shall be permitted to approach
closer to any power line than the distance specified in Table 1, unless the
electrical authority has been notified and the line de-energized or insulated.
3.
It shall be the responsibility of the Superintendent controlling the crane to:
Provide a qualified signaler.

Provide adequate advance notification to the electrical authority to allow for
insulation or isolation and grounding of the line(s).
Ensure that the electrical authorities are fully informed as to when the
operations are to begin, end and when any location changes are planned.
Ensure that when cranes must repeatedly travel beneath power lines, a route
is plainly marked and beacons or rider poles are erected on each side of the
crossing to ensure that the crane structure is lowered to a safe traveling
position.
Report every incident involving contact with live power lines to the electrical
authority and safety, so that inspections and repairs can be made to prevent
damaged live lines from falling at a later date.

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
41 of 50
Not use the crane until it has been completely inspected and recertified for
possible damage caused by electrical contact.
WARNING
In the event that a crane or load makes contact with energized power lines,
the operator shall, if feasible:
Remain inside the cab.

Instruct all other personnel to keep away from the machine, rope and
load.
Try, unaided and without anyone approaching the machine, to back off
the crane until it is well clear of the power line.
If the machine cannot be self propelled away or disentangled from the
line, remain inside the machine until the electrical authorities deenergize the circuit and confirm that conditions are safe.
4.
Caution shall be exercised when working near overhead lines having long spans,
since they tend to swing laterally in response to the wind and can present a
hazard.
5.
Cage type boom guards, insulating links and proximity warning devices have
limitations and their use doesnt alter the requirements of clauses 1 to 5.
6.
Tag line of non-conductive synthetic rope will be used when there is a danger of
contact with energized electrical equipment.

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
42 of 50
APPENDIX 6 CRANE PRE-USE CHECK LIST

Name of Owner:
Address:
Ref No.:
Date:
City:
Description
Test Expiry Date:
Project/Job #:
Province:
Postal Code:
Model No.:
Serial No.:
Location:
Acceptable
Reject
N/A
Equipment Type:
The following items must be audited, where applicable; if not

applicable, so indicate
1.00 General Inspections
Structural Engineering Certification (Expiry:
Annual Mechanical Inspection: (
CVIP Commercial Vehicle Inspection: (Expiry
10 Year Boom Certification CSA Z150-98 (Expiry
5 Year Hook Block CSA Z150-98 (Expiry
5 Year Auxiliary Ball CSA Z150-98 (Expiry
Mine Regulation Brake Inspection

Crane Log Book
Maintenance Record
Operators Manual
Service Manual
Durable rating chart visible to operator
2.00 Operator Cab
Operator controls marked or explanation of controls in operators
view
Fire extinguisher (ABC)
Lights
First aid kit and log
Emergency stop
Horn
Mirrors
Anemometer (Wind speed indicator)
Windows (safety glass)
Intercom system/radio communication
3.00 Boom, Auxiliary Boom
Proper safety decals
Boom angle indicator
Anti-two lock alarm
Boom stops
Boom hoist cut out
Wear pad condition
Wire rope guide plate or rollers
General boom alignment

Title:
Section: B001
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Acceptable
4.00 Carrier and Super Structure
Reject
Page #
43 of 50
N/A
Outrigger locks
Outrigger extension markings
Travel alarm/back-up alarm
Battery pad lock/disconnect
Engine spark arrestor installed
House/Swing lock
Tire type, condition and pressure
Swing brake operation
Park and emergency brake operation
Trailer hitch condition and operation
5.00 Wire Rope, Sheaves and Blocks
All dead ending of cables/wedge socket installed
All hook safety latches
Cable clamps, proper size, type spacing
Main hoist wire limit control
Drum turn indicators
6.00 Load Moment Limiter/Indicator (LML/LMI)
Hoisting limiter
Boom down limiter
Boom telescope limiter
Warning alarm (audible)
Override switch
Test Required: Proof load test for crane shall be based on manufacturers load ratings to be applied at
10% excess at maximum and minimum radius and at any intermediate radii deemed necessary at time of
certification.
Radius
Boom
Length
Boom
Angle
Counterweight
Rated
Capacity
Total
Load
Deviation
Pass/Fail

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
44 of 50
Remarks:
Date:
Signature of certified inspector
Print Name

Title:
Section: B001

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
45 of 50
APPENDIX 7 HAND SIGNALS
Boom Up or Trolley In
Boom Down or Trolley Out
Boom Up Slowly or
Trolley In Slowly
Boom Down Slowly or

Trolley Out Slowly
Boom Up, Load Down
Boom Down, Load Up
Load Up
Load Down
Load Up Slowly

Title:
Section: B001

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
46 of 50
Load Down Slowly
Everything Slowly
Extend Hydraulic Boom

Or Trolley Out
Travel Forward
Swing Load
Shorten Hydraulic Boom

or Trolley In
Stop
Turn Left
Turn Right

Title:
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Use Main Line
Use Whip Line
Open Clam
Dog Everything
Section: B001
Page #
47 of 50
Close Clam

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
48 of 50
APPENDIX 8 CRANE PARTS

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
49 of 50

Title:

Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B001
Page #
50 of 50

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
January 1, 2010
Revision # 6
Controlled Document
Section: B002
Page #
Safe Job Procedures
Issued: April 30, 2007
Controlled Document Reference

Number: B002
1 of 162

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
Revision # 6
January 1, 2010
DATE
Section: B002
Controlled Document
Page #
DESCRIPTION
82-98
Nov 23, 2007 Additional Safe Job Procedures
98-116
Jan 19, 2009 Additional Safe Job Procedures
117-129
June 4, 2009 Additional Safe Job Procedures
130 - 131
Jan 1, 2010
All
Feb 11, 2011 Review of Procedures
132-152
July 20, 2012 Addition of New Job Procedures
Additional Safe Job Procedures

Number: B002
2 of 162

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
January 1, 2010
Revision # 6
Controlled Document
Section: B002
Page #
3 of 162
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 5
2.0
PURPOSE .................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.0
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
4.0
DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................. 5
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES................................................................................................................................... 6
6.0
SAFE JOB PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................................... 6
6.1 SAFE LIFTING............................................................................................................................................... 7

6.2 UNLOADING MATERIAL / LAY DOWN........................................................................................................... 9
6.3 INSULATION ................................................................................................................................................12
6.4 FOAMGLASS PIPE COVERING ......................................................................................................................14
6.5 INSPECTION PORT INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................................17
6.6 UTILIDOR / PANEL.......................................................................................................................................19
6.7 SHEET METAL BRAKE .................................................................................................................................22
6.8 SHEET METAL ROLLER ...............................................................................................................................24
6.9 EASY EDGER ...............................................................................................................................................26
6.10 LOCKFORMER ...........................................................................................................................................28
6.11 COMBINATION MACHINE ..........................................................................................................................30
6.12 METAL SHEAR ..........................................................................................................................................32
6.13 PIN WELDING............................................................................................................................................34
6.14 MITRE SAW...............................................................................................................................................36
6.15 PORTABLE GRINDERS ...............................................................................................................................38
6.16 PORTABLE ELECTRIC DRILLS ....................................................................................................................41
6.17 VEHICLE REFUELING / JOB SITES ..............................................................................................................43
6.18 PORTABLE FUEL CONTAINERS ..................................................................................................................45
6.19 AERIAL WORK PLATFORM REFUELING .....................................................................................................48
6.20 USING NEGATIVE AIR UNITS ....................................................................................................................51
6.21 USING HEPA FILTERED VACUUMS ............................................................................................................53
6.22 SUSPENDED POWERED SCAFFOLDS ...........................................................................................................55
6.23 INSTALLATION OF METAL WALL CLADDING ............................................................................................65
6.24 INSTALLATION OF SLOPED METAL ROOF. .................................................................................................67
6.25 WORKING FROM A SCAFFOLD ..................................................................................................................69
6.26 WORKING FROM A ROLLING SCAFFOLD ...................................................................................................72
6.27 GAS POWERED CUT-OFF-SAW ..................................................................................................................76
6.28 JSM MACHINE ..........................................................................................................................................80
6.29 CLADDING TANKS ....................................................................................................................................83
6.30 MIG WELDING ..........................................................................................................................................88
6.31 HYDRAULIC PRESS BRAKE .......................................................................................................................91
6.32 HYDRAULIC IRON WORKER ......................................................................................................................93
6.33 SHEET METAL SLITTER .............................................................................................................................96
6.34 BAND CUTTER OPERATION .......................................................................................................................98
6.35 GILITENE-METAL CUTTER ......................................................................................................................100
6.36 PORTABLE GRINDERS WITH WIRE WHEEL .............................................................................................102
6.37 MAGNETIC BASE DRILL ..........................................................................................................................104
6.38 PORTABLE CUT-OFF SAW (CHOP-SAW) ..................................................................................................107

Number: B002

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
January 1, 2010
Revision # 6
Controlled Document
Section: B002
Page #
4 of 162
6.39 CIRCULAR SAWS .....................................................................................................................................109

6.40 SAWS-SABRE, JIG & RECIPROCATING .....................................................................................................112
6.41 POWDER ACTUATED TOOLS .....................................................................................................................115
6.42 FALL PROTECTION PLAN.........................................................................................................................119
6.43 AEROGEL INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................123
6.44 HOISTING BY MECHANICAL MEANS ........................................................................................................126
6.45 BENCH GRINDER .....................................................................................................................................128
6.46 INSTALLING INSULATION ON PINS............................................................................................................131
6.47 LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT- BUFFING & GRINDING ....................................................................................133
6.48 VERTICAL BAND SAW ..............................................................................................................................135
6.49 INSULATION & CLADDING ......................................................................................................................139
6.50 SCAFFOLD ERECTION-DISMANTLE...132
6.51 INDUSTRIAL SEWING MACHINE136
6.52 HYDRAULIC SHEAR..139
6.53 HYDRAULIC BREAK..141
6.54 WATERJET CUTTING TABLE..144
6.55 SRAIGHT KNIFE CLOTH CUTTING MACHINE...147
6.56 CNC TEXTILE CUTTING TABLE..149

Number: B002

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
January 1, 2010
Revision # 6
Controlled Document
Section: B002
Page #
5 of 162
INTRODUCTION
Safe job procedures shall be used to describe work steps and to identify,
analyze, understand and mitigate potential hazards associated with repetitive
or potentially hazardous work operations. Uncontrolled hazards can have
immediate and serious consequences to workers, equipment, facilities and
assets. With a proactive approach to understanding the tasks to be
performed, the hazards associated with each task and the elimination or
implementation of controls for the hazards, we will ensure work activities are
completed safely.
2.0
PURPOSE
To identify the steps of the job to be performed and ensure they are
conducted in a safe, sequential pattern.
To identify and communicate the hazards involved with each step of

the job
To identify appropriate means of eliminating and/or controlling all

identified hazards.
WARNING:
3.0
The implementation of a Safe Job Procedure does not eliminate

the need to conduct a Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA). A
FLHA must be conducted prior to each task.
A Safe job Procedure will not identify all hazards associated with
conducting a particular task.
SCOPE
4.0
All employees, customers and contractors.
DEFINITIONS

Number: B002

Safe Job Procedures
Title:
Effective Date:
January 1, 2010
Revision # 6
Controlled Document
Section: B002
Page #
6 of 162
4.1
5.0
Safe Job Procedure is a written, specific step-by-step description of

how to complete a job safely and efficiently from start to finish.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Management
5.2
Supervision
5.3
Participate in the development and review of safe job

procedures.
Present and review safe job procedures with the workers.
Workers
6.0

procedures.

procedures.
Review safe job procedures prior to conducting job.
Follow the safe job procedure and ensure hazard controls are
implemented.
SAFE JOB PROCEDURES

Safe job procedures are to be developed for all repetitive, hazardous,
potentially hazardous and critical tasks performed by this company. They
have and will be developed with participation from management, supervision
and the workers.
The safe job procedures will be available and easily accessible to the workers
at the job sites and the workers will review and understand the procedures
prior to performing the job.

Number: B002
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
6.1 Safe Lifting

Material:
Insulation
Boxes
Metal
Material
Personal Protective Equipment:

CSA approved work boots
CSA approved hard hat
CSA approved safety glasses
Gloves
PPE as per site requirements
Potential Hazards
Recommended Safe Job Procedure
Steps
1
Job Sequence
Complete FLHA at your work area

before commencing work.
Other trades in the area.
Clear path of travel.
Muscle pulls, strains, trips, slips.
If applicable obtain a safe work

permit before commencing work.
6.1 Safe Lifting,

Revision Date: February 2011
Developed By: Gary Jolicoeur
a) Check permit; make sure all applicable

areas are filled in.
b) Ensure permit is signed and dated by the
operator.
c) Make sure you understand the
requirements of the permit and sign
where required.
d) Ensure permit is signed off at the end of
the shift / day.
a) Inspect the work area for any potential
hazards (i.e. tripping, loose stones,
uneven ground).
b) Write plans to eliminate / control hazards
on FLHA and follow through with the plan
a) Ensure the path to your destination is
clear.
b) Make sure you have plenty of room to
safely lift the object properly.
c) Prop doors open or ask someone to hold
them.
d) Avoid slippery or uneven surfaces, find a
different route.
Page 7 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Size up the load.
Pinch points, strains, muscle pulls.

a)
b)
c)
Making the lift.
Slips, trips, strains, pinch points, muscle

pulls.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Carrying the load.
Slips, trips, pinch points, falls, strains.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Setting the load down.
Pinch points, muscle pulls, strains.
a)
b)
c)
d)
6.1 Safe Lifting,

Push the object lightly or lift a corner to

get a sense of its weight, if the weight is
not known. If its too heavy, break it
down into smaller loads, get help, or use
a hand truck, pushcart or forklift.
Make sure the contents wont shift.
Get help for awkward loads or those that
will block your vision.
Stand as close to the load as possible.
Face it squarely.
Bend at your knees, not at your waist.
Keep your back as straight as possible.
Lift slowly and steadily, using your legs,
not your back.
Avoid twisting as you lift. Keep your head
up.
Hold the load close to your body,
between your shoulders and waist.
Keep your back straight or slightly
arched.
Walk slowly and maintain firm footing.
Use your feet to change directions.
Avoid twisting at the waist.
Move as close as possible to where you
want the object to be.
Squat down to lower the object, using
your legs.
Avoid twisting and bending at the waist.
Keep your head up.
Let go only when the object is down and
hands and toes are clear.
Page 8 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Pallets
Tarps
Nippers
Pen & paper
6.2 Unloading Material / Lay down

Material:
Wire

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

before commencing work and
identify any potential hazards.
Establish lay down yard.
Slips, trips, falls, splinters, back strain.
Locate packing slip(s).

6.2 Unloading Material/Lay Down


operator.
where required.
d) Make sure permit is signed off at the end
of the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. uneven ground, holes,
loose gravel).
on FLHA and follow through with the
plan before commencing work.
a) Plan for easy accessibility and locating
of material.
b) Place pallets on ground to form platform
for material.
a) If packing slip(s) are not available, a
material receiving report must be
completed and sent in to the office.
Page 9 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Unload truck.
Slips, trips, falls, strains, pulls, twisted

ankles.
Sign for material.
Map out material pile.
Trips, falls, falling material.
Secure and protect material.
Tripping on wire or tarps.

Slipping on tarps.

a) Use proper lifting techniques, unload

material from truck, if possible use a forklift.
b) As each item is unloaded, it must be
counted and checked off on the packing
slip.
c) Stack material neatly on pallets, grouping
sizes together, no more than 2 high.
d) Leave all walkways between the stacks
clear, if using a forklift ensure sufficient
room is left for safe turning radius of forklift
and use a spotter.
e) Watch footing and head / shoulder
clearance when entering / exiting truck and
trailer.
a) Sign truck drivers bill.
b) Clearly print name and date on slip. Then
sign packing slip to acknowledge that all
goods have been received.
c) Make note of any breakage with the truck
driver and on packing slip.
d) Make clear notation of any shipment
discrepancies, these will be taken up with
the supplier, not the truck driver.
a) Make a map of the pile and material size
location for easy access later.
a)
Secure the material.
b)
Use tarps / plastic to protect the material
from weather conditions.
c)
Secure the tarps using wire, ensuring
there are no loose wire ends or
projections.
d)
Ensure there are no loose tarp ends
sticking out.
Page 10 of 162
Housekeeping.
Slips, trips, falls.
a)
b)

Housekeeping is to be maintained at all

times.
Discarded boxes, wrappings, wire,
material scrap is to be put into designated
bins.
Page 11 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Knife / saw
Nippers
Tape measure
Bander
Steps
1
Job Sequence
6.3 Insulation
Material:
Fiberglass
Mineral Wool
Calcium Silicate
Duct Wrap

CSA approved safety glasses/goggles
Gloves
Potential Hazards
If applicable get a safe work permit


Select the amount and type of

insulation to be installed as well as
a method of securing the insulation
to the work surface. (i.e. wiring,
banding, spraying, pasting, taping,
pin welding) according to the type
and shape of the surface, whether
or not the work surface is cold or
hot, inside or outside and what the
equipment is going to be used for.
Slips, trips, falls, muscle or back strains,

cuts to hands, sprains, debris in eyes.
6.3 Insulation

b) Make sure permit is signed and dated by
the operator.
c) Ensure you understand and sign the
permit where required.
of the shift / day.
hazards, uneven ground, holes, missing
planks, nails sticking up, hot piping,
equipment, tracers, tripping etc.
a) Ensure stable footing at all times.
b) Inspect path of travel, ensure free of
obstacles.
c) Ensure you are wearing appropriate
PPE.
d) Keep gloves on at all times.
e) Ensure proper body ergonomics.
f) Use proper lifting techniques.
g) Make sure housekeeping is maintained
at all times.
Page 12 of 162
Steps
4
5
6
7
Job Sequence
Take careful measurements, then
transfer measurements to the
insulation, make required cutout(s).
Ensure cutouts are neat and tight
fitting. Install and secure insulation
according to specifications. Inspect
insulation and ensure a proper fit.
Ensure all cracks have been filled
in.
Ensure wires or bands have been
installed and spaced according to
job specifications.
Use proper wire burning technique
for securing wire, if banding is
required, ensure bands are cut at
90 degree angles and properly
secured in wing seal.
Clean work area. Pick up all debris,
wire ends, band tails, scrap
insulation. Sweep or vacuum if
necessary.
Return unused insulation to material
pile, keep orderly, cover material.
6.3 Insulation
Potential Hazards
Cuts to hands, dust, floating debris.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Cuts, dust, floating debris.
a) Ensure all voids are filled in with

insulation.
Cuts to hands, wire pokes.
a) Burn wire according to trade practice.

b) If banding is used, use bander to tighten
bands.
Strains, cuts, dust.
a) Wear gloves and use proper lifting

techniques while disposing of all waste.
b) Wear respirator if dust hazard is present.
Slips, falls, trips, strains.
a) Ensure insulation is put back in proper

box.
b) Make sure boxes are off the ground and
tarps are used and secured.
Keep gloves on at all times.

Stagger seams if required.
Keep tools secure in tool pouch.
Ensure all knives are sheathed, when not
in use.
Page 13 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Saw
Knife
Tape measure
Trowel
Hacksaw blade
Rubber bands
6.4 Foamglass Pipe Covering

Material:
Foamglass
Insta-foam
Mastic
Glasfab
Glass fiberTape
Banding
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Gathering material.
Muscle strains, pulls, dust.

Gloves
Goggles
Potential Hazards



a) Check permit; ensure all applicable areas
are filled in.
operator.
c) Make sure you read and understand the
contents of the permit and sign where
required.
the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. tripping, overhangs, uneven
ground).
obstacles.
c) Make sure you are wearing proper PPE
(i.e. goggles, dust mask).
d) Use proper lifting techniques.
Page 14 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Installing foamglass.
Slips, trips, falls, dust, muscle pulls, strains.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Glasfab.
Mastic in cuts, strains, pulls, slips, trips,

falls.
a) Select proper mastic (i.e. spray grade or

trowel grade).
b) Read labels on mastic to identify
application, service temperatures, health
hazards and methods of clean-up.
c) Ensure mastic is at room temperature.
d) Use drop sheets when applying mastic.
e) Apply thin layer of mastic to insulation
using trowel or brush (as per
specifications).
f) Cut and work glasfab into mastic avoiding
wrinkles ensure all edges are laying
down.
g) Apply another thin layer of mastic over
the glasfab.
h) After mastic is dry apply finish as per
specifications.


Take careful measurements.
Ensure cutout(s) are neat and tight fitting.
Keep tools secured at all times.
Install according to job and trade
specifications.
e) Stagger seams at all times.
f) Ensure there are NO voids in the
foamglass.
g) When securing in place overlap tape
approx 4 inches.
h) Where foamglass runs through pipe
supports use proper guide blocks.
i) Recess foamglass for welds.
Page 15 of 162
Steps
6
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Housekeeping
Slips, trips, falls, muscle strains, pulls, dust.


a) Housekeeping is to be maintained at all
times.
b) Pick up all excess materials and put in
appropriate bins.
c) Clean all overspray and dropped mastic
before it dries.
d) Mastics that are dry are much harder to
clean.
e) Use proper procedures if cleaning with
any type of solvents, and review MSDS.
f) Use vacuum where possible.
g) Return unused foamglass to material pile
and retarp.
Page 16 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Sheet metal tools
Hole saw
Drill
Caulking gun
6.5 Inspection Port Installation

Material:
Inspection Port
Screws
Caulking
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Assemble material.
Slips, trips, falls, muscle or back strain.
Identify port locations.
Cuts to hands, slips, trips, falls.

Gloves
Potential Hazards



operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
overhead obstructions).
a) Plan your route.
b) Move material into work area, arrange it
neatly.
c) Avoid creating tripping hazards.
d) Use proper lifting / hoisting practices.
a) Ensure all locations can be accessed
safely.
b) Read scaffold tags where applicable.
c) Be aware of your surroundings for any
potential hazards.
Page 17 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Cut hole(s).
Cuts to hands, cutting through electric

tracing.
Secure port in place.
Cuts to hand, pinch points.

a)
b)
c)
a)
b)
c)
Caulking.
Cuts to fingers.
a)
b)
Housekeeping.
Strains, cuts.
c)
a)
b)

Using metal tools, cut hole in cladding.

Cut hole in insulation with knife or saw.
Clean out void and install the port.
Insert port.
Fasten port with screws at the pre-drilled
locations on the port.
If port is to be installed at a later time,
cover cut out with duct tape, to stop
moisture from getting in.
Apply caulking around the port with a
caulking gun.
Smooth caulking using a GLOVED
finger.
Ensure caulking is consistent and neat.
Ensure all waste is disposed of and put
in proper bins.
Housekeeping is to be maintained at all
times.
Page 18 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Sheet metal tools
Skill saw
Saws-all
Angle grinder
Die grinder
Drills
Nibblers
Mitre saw
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.6 Utilidor / Panel

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Panels
Sheeting

Goggles
Face shield
Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards
Where applicable obtain a safe

work permit before commencing
work.

Other trades in the same area.

are filled in.
operator.
c) Make sure you read and understand
permit contents and sign where required.
d) Be sure to sign the permit off at the end
of the shift / day.
tripping, obstructions).
Page 19 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Choose an area with enough room

to accommodate 20 ft channels and
panels.
Slips, trips, falls, strains.
Measure material.
Cuts, muscle and back strains / pulls.
Cutting panels and channels.
Cuts, flying debris, dust, fumes, splinters.
Assembly.
Cuts, strains, metal shavings, ergonomics.


a) Inspect all powered cutting tools and
ensure proper colored inspection tape is
on tool prior to use.
b) Inspect all electrical cords and ground
prongs.
c) Ensure channel is secure and at the right
working height.
a) Mark the cut lines.
b) Outside corners are usually joined on a
45 degree angle, therefore
measurements are taken at the point.
a) A mitre saw should be used to cut
channel.
b) Use a skill saw with cutting disc or sawsall to cut panels.
c) Ensure all blades / discs are rated for the
tools and materials you will be using.
d) Do not use any blade or disc that is
defective in any way.
e) Do not allow the material to smoke,
depending on the contents of the panel,
the smoke may be harmful (i.e.
urethane).
f) Ensure all cords are clear of moving
blades.
g) Remove any burrs that were left on the
metal after cutting.
a) Slide panel into channel using minimal
force.
b) Ensure panel is not spread apart.
c) Ensure channel is not bent.
d) Use a rubber hammer or a regular
hammer and a piece of lumber for any
adjustments.
e) Avoid denting the material.
Page 20 of 162
Steps
7
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Securing panels.
Cuts, pulls, strains.
Housekeeping.
Cut, strains, pulls, dust.


a) Ensure panel is safely in channel.
b) Use screws or rivets on pre-measured
intervals to secure channel to the panel.
a) Ensure all corners / connections are lined
up and remove any remaining burrs.
b) Ensure all required cut-outs are in place
and flashed properly.
c) Ensure proper fit.
d) Apply caulking around seams, cutouts
etc. as required using a caulking gun.
e) Smooth caulking using a GLOVED finger
f) Ensure caulking is consistent and neat
times.
b) All tools and cords are to be picked up
and properly stored.
Page 21 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Sheet Metal Brake
6.7 Sheet Metal Brake

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Secure brake.
Pinch points, cuts.
When moving a brake.
Slips, trips, falls, muscle strains.

permit.


operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the brake.
a) Ensure brake is properly secured in
place before use, engage outriggers if
applicable.
b) Inspect brake before use, ensure there
are no missing parts. (i.e. teeth etc)
a) Use lifting device where possible, or
sufficient manpower.
b) Use proper lifting techniques, forklift, or
put in a vehicle to transport around site.
c) Ensure path of travel is clear of
obstacles.
Page 22 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
If more than one person is required

to operate the brake.
Pinch points, cuts to hands, fingers.
When forming material.
Pinch points, cuts.
Housekeeping.
Strains, pulls, cuts, dust.

a) Ensure good communication.

b) One worker will be in charge of the task
and to give the all clear for raising and
lowering the brake forming handles.
c) Never let the forming handle drop.
a) Ensure forming handle is locked when
forming metal.
b) Keep hands, fingers, etc clear of teeth
c) Where applicable keep your body clear
of the counter weight.
d) When forming is complete always ensure
brake is locked and no material is left in
it.
e) Use the gauge of metal the brake is
designed for only.
a) Housekeeping must be maintained
around the brake at all times.
b) Scrap is to be put in the designated
containers.
Page 23 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Metal Roller
6.8 Sheet Metal Roller

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Other trades in the area
Secure roller.
Pinch points, cuts.
When moving a roller.


a) Check permit, make sure all applicable

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the roller.
a) Ensure roller is properly secured in place
before use, engage outriggers if
applicable.
a) Use proper lifting device (i.e. forklift)
where possible, or sufficient manpower.
b) Use proper lifting techniques.
obstacles.
d) Use a vehicle or another safe means to
transport a roller around the site.
Page 24 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
When rolling metal.
Housekeeping.
Cuts, dust, loose debris.

a) Wear gloves at all times.

b) Keep hands away from rollers when
adjusting for thickness and rolling.
c) Use proper gauge of metal for the roller.
d) Ensure rollers are locked before rolling
and when not in use.
a) Housekeeping around the roller must be
maintained at all times.
b) Discarded metal is to be put in
designated containers.
Page 25 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Easy Edger
6.9 Easy Edger

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Other trades in your area.
Secure easy edger.
Pinch points.

6.9 Easy Edger


operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
a) Identify and eliminate / control any
potential hazards prior to using the easy
edger.
a) Ensure easy edger is properly secured in
place before use, allowing adequate
room to work.
Page 26 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Position metal and feed through the

machine.
Pinch points, cuts to hands, fingers, wrists.
Housekeeping.
Slips, trips, strains.
6.9 Easy Edger

a) Ensure cut edges of metal are smooth

and free of burrs.
b) When metal is in position, turn the crank
slow and at a steady pace to ensure
smooth work.
c) When passing metal through the easy
edger, make sure it rides up on the
groove in the lower wheel.
d) Keep your fingers at a safe distance so
they dont get caught in the wheels.
e) Keep a firm grip on the metal at all times.
f) When finished with the easy edger,
ensure the crank handle is pointing down
times.
Page 27 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Lockformer
6.10 Lockformer
Material:
Aluminum
Stainless steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

When moving a lockformer,
Secure lockformer.
Pinch points, cuts.

6.10 Lockformer

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
a) Identify and eliminate / control any
potential hazards prior to using the
lockformer.
a) Use proper lifting device (i.e. forklift)
where possible, or sufficient manpower.
b) Use proper lifting techniques.
obstacles.
d) Use a vehicle or another safe means to
transport lockformer around the site.
a) Ensure lockformer is properly secured in
Page 28 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Turn lockformer on and feed metal

through.
Pinch points, cuts to hands, fingers,

snagged clothing.
When opening the lockformed edge

use the proper wheeled tool.
When hammering over a

lockformed edge use a sheet metal
hammer and hearing protection.
Housekeeping.
6.10 Lockformer
Cuts, dust, loose debris, metal slivers.
place before use.

a) Wear gloves at all times.
b) Keep hands away from moving parts.
c) Do not wear loose clothing that may get
caught in the machine.
d) Use proper gauge of metal for the
lockformer.
e) Allow enough room around the machine
for the metal to pass through.
f) Ensure metal edges are neatly cut and
free of burrs.
g) As metal passes through the lockformer
ensure metal is in contact with the guide
at all times.
h) If metal gets jammed turn off and unplug
the lockformer before loosening
adjustment screws to free metal.
i) Turn machine off after every pass, never
leave the machine running and / or
unattended.
a) Housekeeping around the roller must be
maintained at all times.
b) Discarded metal is to be put in
designated containers.
c) Ensure machine is cleaned daily.
Page 29 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Combination Machine
6.11 Combination Machine

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Secure the combination machine.
Pinch point, muscle strains, pulls, cuts.



operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the combination
machine.
on FLHA, and follow through with the
a) Ensure combination machine is properly
secured in place before use.
b) Allow adequate room to work.
Page 30 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Beading and Crimping.
Housekeeping.
Slips, trips, strains, dust.

a) Ensure the proper wheels are secured on

the machine for the task you are doing.
b) Use only the proper gauge of metal the
machine was designed for.
c) Ensure cut edges of metal are smooth
and free of burrs.
d) When metal is in position, turn the crank
slow and at a steady pace.
e) Make sure the wheels are adjusted to the
right torque.
f) Keep your fingers at a safe distance so
they dont get caught in the wheels.
g) Keep a firm grip on the metal at all times.
times.
Page 31 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Shear
Tape measure
Scriber
Steps
Job Sequence
Where applicable obtain a safe

work permit before commencing
work.

6.12 Metal Shear

6.12 Metal Shear

Material:
Aluminum
Stainless Steel

Gloves
Potential Hazards

are filled in.
operator.
c) Make sure you read and understand
permit contents and sign where required.
d) Be sure to sign the permit off at the end
of the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. damaged equipment etc)
prior to using the shear.
Page 32 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Using the shear.
Cuts, muscle strains, pulls, slips, trips, pinch

points.
Housekeeping.
Slips trips, cuts, pinch points, slivers, dust.
6.12 Metal Shear

a) Put metal on rollers, if a roll of metal is

being used 2 people are required to lift
the roll in place.
b) Use only the thickness / gauge of metal
the shear was designed for.
c) Ensure all guards and covers are in
place.
d) Lay your piece of material on the table
and mark the metal using a scriber where
you want to make the cut, using the 90
degree edge on the table.
e) Always keep your hands clear of the
movable knife bed.
f) Do not use excessive force when cutting.
If so, the piece is either too big or thick,
or the equipment needs to be adjusted.
g) Never reach behind the shear or allow
someone else to while it is in operation.
h) Only retrieve the cut metal once the knife
handle is returned to the up position or
your foot is off the pedal. In the case of a
power shear, turn the hydraulics off
before retrieving your piece.
a) Clean the debris off the shear with a
brush, not your bare hands.
b) Housekeeping is to be maintained at all
times.
c) Ensure all waste is disposed of and put
in the proper bins.
Page 33 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Pin welder
Cables
Power Source
Nippers
6.13 Pin Welding

Material:
Pins
Clips

Face shield, goggles
Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Place pin welder box in a safe area.
Falls, trips, muscle pulls, strains.

6.13 Pin Welding


are filled in.
operator.
c) Make sure you read and understand the
contents of the permit and sign where
required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the pin welder.
a) Place welder box on even surface.
b) Uncoil all cables, and lay as straight as
possible.
c) Do not lay cables in water.
Page 34 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Set up welder and gun.
Electrical shock, electrical burns, strains,

pinch points.
Firing.
Electrical shock, electrical burns, puncture

wounds.
Bending pins.
Puncture wounds.
Housekeeping.
Slips, trips, falls, muscle pulls, strains,

puncture wounds.
6.13 Pin Welding

a) Read and understand manufacturers

manual.
b) Inspect the welder for any damage prior
to each use (i.e. frayed cords, missing
ground plugs)
c) Ensure proper color coded tape is
present
d) Make sure power switch is in the off
position and voltage control knob is
turned down.
e) Attach ground cables.
f) Ensure correct chuck is inserted for the
particular gauge of pins to be welded.
g) Adjust leg to correspond with length of
pin allowing enough distance for plunge.
h) Remove paint, rust, excessive dirt etc.
from surface.
i) Connect to correct power source.
a) Place pin in gun until seated firmly
against pin stopper.
b) Ensure proper plotting of pins on the
surface.
c) Set welder on appropriate setting.
d) Press pin against weld surface and fire.
e) Test weld by grasping pin and bending
back and forth. If the weld doesnt hold
increase power and try again.
a) If insulation is not to be applied
immediately, isolate pins to protect others
from potential hazards
times.
b) When welding is complete, unplug the
welder, coil the cables and return to
storage area.
c) Ensure all debris (i.e. cut pins, clips) are
picked up and put in the proper bins
Page 35 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Mitre Saw
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.14 Mitre Saw

Material:
Aluminum
Wood
Tubing
Channels

Gloves, goggles, faceshield
Hearing Protection
Potential Hazards

6.14 Mitre Saw


operator.
c) Make sure you understand the contents
of the permit, then sign where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the mitre saw.
Page 36 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Secure saw.
Pinch point, strains, pulls, cuts.
Cutting.
Cuts to hands, strains, pulls.
Jammed material.
Cuts to hands, wrists, arms.
Housekeeping.
Cuts, strains, dust.
6.14 Mitre Saw


a) Inspect the saw for any damage prior to
each use (i.e. cracked casing, frayed
cords, missing ground prong)
b) Ensure proper colored inspection tape in
on tool prior to use
c) Never carry the tool by the cord.
d) Place saw so others will stay out from
behind it.
e) Place saw on firm level surface.
f) Allow plenty of room for handling and
supporting the work piece.
g) Bolt or clamp the saw to its support.
h) Ensure saw and table are level and the
saw does not rock.
a) Read and understand manufacturer
manual.
b) Ensure there are no loose parts.
c) Ensure you are using proper blade.
d) Ensure blade is Undamaged and
properly aligned.
e) Ensure rotation arrow on blade matches
the direction arrow on saw.
f) Properly support material being cut.
g) Never cut more than one piece at a time.
h) Do not cut small pieces in a mitre saw.
i) Feed the saw into workpiece fast enough
without trapping or binding material.
a) Before freeing jammed material, release
switch and unplug the saw. Wait for all
moving parts to stop.
time.
b) Ensure all parts of the saw are cleaned,
use a vacuum if necessary.
c) Ensure saw is properly stored after use.
Page 37 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Grinder
Power supply
Disks
6.15 Portable Grinders

Material:
Metal

CSA approved safety glasses,
Goggles, Face shield, Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.



operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the grinder.
a) Set up protective barriers.
b) Ensure there is no flammable material
around the grinding area.
Page 38 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Inspect grinder.
Cuts, slips, trips, falls.
Grinding.
Electrical burns, cuts, slips, trips, flying

debris, dust.

a) Inspect cords and plugs for cracked

casing, frayed cords, missing ground
prong etc. Ensure proper colored
inspection tape is present prior to use.
b) Inspect the grinder for any damage prior
to each use
c) Do not use defective wheels (i.e. cracks).
d) Ensure the correct size of grinder is used
for the job.
e) Use the correct type of disc for the job.
f) Ensure guard and handles are secure.
g) Ensure maximum speed rpms is marked
on the wheel.
h) Make sure there is no damage to the
machines outer body.
a) Do not use grinder in the rain.
b) Allow grinder to run up to operating
speed before applying to the job.
c) Apply the grinder with minimum pressure
to avoid kick back.
d) Ensure the disk doesnt hit other object
while grinding.
e) Keep disc at the proper angle to the
work.
f) Ensure work piece is secured.
g) Do not use the grinder between the legs.
h) Do not put the grinder down until the disc
stops rotating.
i) Always disconnect the power before
changing disks.
j) Never use a cut off wheel for grinding or
a grinding disc for cutting.
k) Ensure cords are away from moving
discs.
Page 39 of 162
Steps
6
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Housekeeping.
Cuts, strains, pulls, dust.

a) Housekeeping must be maintained at all

times.
b) When grinding is complete return grinder
to the proper storage area.
c) Ensure all debris is picked up and put in
the appropriate containers.
Page 40 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Drill
Drill Bit
Power source
6.16 Portable Electric Drills

Material:
Metal
Wood
Plastic

Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.



operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the drill.
a) Ensure there are no flammable
substances, gases or vapors in the area.
Page 41 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Inspect Drill.
Cuts, pokes.
Drilling.
Electrical shocks, cuts, flying debris, dust,

pinch points.
Housekeeping.
Cuts, strains, muscle pulls, dust.

a) Inspect cords and plugs. Ensure proper

color coded tape is present.
b) Inspect the drill for any damage prior to
each use (i.e. cracked casing, frayed
cords, missing ground prong).
c) Ensure drill air vents are clear.
d) Make sure to use sharp bits at all times.
e) Follow manufacturers instruction when
selecting and using a bit or attachment
f) Do not use a bent drill bit.
g) Tighten the chuck securely and remove
chuck key before starting drill.
h) Ensure all cords are clear of the cutting
area.
a) Secure material.
b) Have both hands on the drill.
c) Ensure bit is properly seated in chuck.
d) Drill a small pilot hole before drilling large
holes.
e) Slow the rate of speed just before
breaking through the surface.
f) Disconnect the power supply before
changing or adjusting the drill bit or other
attachments.
g) Do not exceed the manufacturers
recommended maximum drilling
capacities.
h) Do not use drill in wet conditions.
times.
b) When you are finished with the drill return
it to the proper storage area.
c) Never carry a drill by the cord.
d) Ensure all excess debris is picked up and
put in the appropriate containers.
Page 42 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Fuel Supply
Grounding Wire
Bonding Wire
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.17 Vehicle Refueling / Job Sites

Material:
Gasoline
Diesel

Gloves
Potential Hazards

permit refueling.

Other trades in the area, other vehicles in

the area, ignition sources, fire hazards,
fumes.

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. Ignition sources, fumes,
spills etc.).
Page 43 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Refueling.
Sparks, fire, fumes, wrong fuel in machine

slipping, tripping, soil, water contamination,
ignition sources.
Spillage.
Fire, contamination of cloths, skin, soil,

water, fumes.
Housekeeping.
Slips, trips, fall, fumes, spills.

a) Ensure the engine and the auxiliary

power of the vehicle is turned off.
b) Refuel in a well ventilated area only.
c) Turn off cell phones, radios, pagers etc.
d) When fueling, DO NOT smoke.
e) Ensure all grounding cables and/or
bonding cables are attached before
fueling.
f) Be sure to use the correct type of fuel
and grade of fuel in the vehicle.
g) Always ground the fuel nozzle against
the filler neck to avoid sparks.
h) Stand upwind of the nozzle while
refueling.
i) Use only the refueling latch provided on
the fuel dispenser nozzle. Never jam the
refueling latch on the nozzle open.
j) Do not leave the vehicle unattended
while fueling.
k) Replace nozzle to fuel source when
finished
l) Secure gas cap (s)
a) If a spill occurs, clean it up immediately.
b) If clothing becomes contaminated with
fuel, avoid any activity where a spark
may be created and remove
contaminated clothing at the earliest
possible time.
times, before, during and after refueling.
b) Clean up and spilled fuel, oil, etc .and put
in appropriate storage bins, cans.
c) Ensure any rags used to clean up a spill
are put into appropriate containers NOT
the general garbage can.
Page 44 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Approved Container
Fuel source
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.18 Portable Fuel Containers

Material:
Gasoline
Diesel

Gloves
Potential Hazards

permit before refueling.


fumes.
a) Check permit, make sure all applicable

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. ignition sources, fumes,
spills etc.).
Page 45 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Filling a portable gas container.
Static electricity, fire hazard, fumes, ignition

sources, spills, contamination.

a) NEVER store fuel in glass or any other

unapproved containers.
b) Only containers approved to CSA
Standard B376-M1980(R1998), Portable
containers for gasoline and other
Petroleum Fuels., NFPA Standard 30,
Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Code, 2003 edition., or ULC Standard
C30-1995, Containers Safety may be
used to store portable quantities of
flammable liquids.
c) If using metal containers make sure they
are properly grounded to prevent static
discharge.
d) Gas expands as it warms. When filling a
portable container, remember to leave an
air space of about 5% in case the gas
expands.
e) Do not fill any container while its inside a
vehicle, a vehicles trunk, pick-up bed or
any surface other than the ground.
f) When filling a portable container
manually control the nozzle valve
throughout the filling process.
g) Never leave the container unattended
while refueling and never use a device to
hold the discharge lever in the open
position.
h) Place cap tightly on the container after
filling do not use containers that do not
seal properly.
Page 46 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Spillage.
Contamination, fire hazard.
Transporting.
Spills.
Housekeeping.

a) If clothing becomes contaminated with

may be created.
b) Contaminated clothing must be removed
at the earliest possible time.
c) If a spill occurs, clean it up immediately.
d) If the fuel spills on the container, make
sure it has evaporated before you place
the container in the vehicle.
a) When transporting fuel in a portable
container a short distance, make sure it
is secure against tipping and sliding.
Never leave it in direct sunlight.
b) Clean up and spilled fuel, oil, etc. and put
in appropriate storage bins, cans.
Page 47 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Fuel Supply
Grounding Wire
Bonding Wire
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.19 Aerial Work Platform Refueling

Material:
Gasoline
Diesel

Gloves
Potential Hazards

permit before refueling.


fumes.

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. ignition sources, fumes,
spills etc.).
Page 48 of 162
Refueling.
Sparks, fire, fumes, wrong fuel in machine

slips, trips, soil, water contamination,
ignition sources.
Spillage.
Fire, contamination of cloths, skin, soil,

water, fumes.
Housekeeping.

a) Ensure aerial platform is lowered to the

stowed position and all power is turned
off before fueling (i.e. engine, auxiliary
etc.).
b) Refuel in a well ventilated area only.
c) Turn off cell phones, radios, pagers etc.
d) Use extra caution when fueling a hot
engine.
e) When fueling, DO NOT smoke.
f) Ensure all grounding cables and/or
bonding cables are attached before
fueling.
g) Be sure to use the correct type of fuel
and grade of fuel in the machine.
h) Always ground the fuel nozzle against
the filler neck to avoid sparks.
i) Stand upwind of the nozzle while
refueling.
j) Use only the refueling latch provided on
the fuel dispenser nozzle. Never jam the
refueling latch on the nozzle open.
k) Do not leave the machine unattended
while fueling.
a) If a spill occurs, clean it up immediately.
b) If clothing becomes contaminated with
may be created and remove
contaminated clothing at the earliest
possible time.
b) Clean up and spilled fuel, oil, hydraulic
fluid etc. and put in appropriate storage
bins or cans.
Page 49 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence

Potential Hazards
Page 50 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Negative Air Units
Extension Cords
6.20 Using Negative Air Units

Material:
Pre and Secondary filters
Polyethylene
Duct tape
Rags and Water

face HEPA filter equipped respirator
Gloves
Other PPE as required
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Ensure negative air unit has HEPA

secondary and pre filters in place.
Unit used without all three stages of

filtration increases potential for fibre
migration to areas outside the contained
work area.



operator.
where required.
of the shift / day.
loose gravel).
a) Visual inspection of three stage system.
Page 51 of 162
Steps
4
5
6
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Ensure negative air unit has been

D.O.P. tested for HEPA filter
integrity. Valid stickers directly on
the unit and test report filed within
site specific procedure for the
asbestos removal will provide this
verification.
Ensure power source negative air
equipment is using has ground fault
interrupter circuits.
Once project commences and unit
is in use regular daily inspections
are required. Using the daily
inspection checklist ensure all
visual inspections and filter change
outs are undertaken.
Upon completion of asbestos
abatement project ensure pre and
secondary filters are discarded.
Ensure inside of cabinet adjacent
main HEPA filter is wet wiped and
clean. Replace secondary and pre
filters with new filters not exposed
to asbestos fibre in preparation for
transport of equipment off site.
HEPA filters that do not pass a D.O.P. test

are considered inadequate and should be
replaced.
a) Outside testing agencies provide on site

D.O.P. test services. Test is required at
beginning of project, each time a unit is
moved in significant fashion and every 6
months if not moved following initial
testing.
Most asbestos abatement projects utilize a

lot of water which increases electric shock
hazards.
Filter failure can affect fibre levels both
inside and outside the work area which will
potentially result in worker exposure to
asbestos fibre.
a) Pre job check list for all asbestos projects

requires double check that all equipment
is on ground fault protected circuits.
a) Follow negative air equipment daily
inspection checklist and ensure regular
change of pre and secondary filters. This
will ensure main HEPA filter does not fail.
Transport of units without secondary and

pre filters in place may result in fibre fallout
from main HEPA filter which is generally not
discarded at project completion.
a) Once secondary and pre filters are

replaced with new the outside cowling of
the unit shall be covered and sealed with
clean polyethylene. This will ensure safe
transport to the storage areas or to other
projects.

Page 52 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
HEPA Filtered Vacuum
Extension Cords
6.21 Using Hepa Filtered Vacuums

Material:
Vacuum Bags
Polyethylene
Duct tape
Rags and Water

face HEPA filter equipped respirator
Gloves
Other PPE as required
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Ensure HEPA vacuum has HEPA

filter and filter protector cover in
place.
Vacuum used without HEPA filter will

exhaust asbestos fibre while operating.
Filter protector cover will ensure optimum
life of HEPA filter which if it fails will also
result in exhaust of asbestos fibre during
operation.



operator.
where required.
of the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. uneven ground, holes, loose
gravel).
a) Visual inspection of HEPA filter and
protective cover.
Page 53 of 162
Steps
4
5
6
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Ensure vacuum unit has been

D.O.P. tested for HEPA filter
integrity. Valid stickers directly on
the unit and test report filed within
site specific procedure for the
asbestos removal will provide this
verification.
Ensure power source of HEPA
vacuum is using has ground fault
interrupter circuits.
Once project commences and unit
is in use regular daily inspections
are required. Using the daily
inspection checklist ensures all
visual inspections and vacuum bag
replacements are undertaken.
HEPA filters that do not pass a D.O.P. test

are considered inadequate and should be
replaced.
a) Outside testing agencies provide on site

D.O.P. test services. Test is required at
beginning of project, and every 6 months
following initial testing.
Most asbestos abatement projects utilize a

lot of water which increases electric shock
hazards.
Filter failure can affect fibre levels both
inside and outside the work area which will
potentially result in worker exposure to
asbestos fibre. Failure to replace vacuum
bags will affect operation of vacuum as well
as placing undue stress upon the HEPA
filter.
Transport of units without replacement
vacuum bag in place may result in fibre
fallout from HEPA filter which is generally
not discarded at project completion.
a) Pre job check list for all asbestos projects

requires double check that all equipment
is on ground fault protected circuits.
a) Follow equipment daily inspection
checklist and ensure regular change of
vacuum bags and visual inspections of
HEPA filter. This will ensure vacuum
maintains efficiency and that HEPA filter
does not fail.
Upon completion of asbestos

abatement project ensure vacuum
bag is discarded as asbestos waste
and that inside of vacuum canister
is clean of all loose dust and wet
wiped. Replace vacuum bag after
cleaning in preparation for transport
and or storage.

a) Once unit is cleaned and new vacuum

bag has been installed the vacuum hose
ends shall be covered with polyethylene
or duct tape. This will ensure safe
transport to the storage areas or to other
projects.
Page 54 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
6.22 Suspended Powered Scaffolds

Material:
Ropes , Rope grabs, Cables
Electric motors, Swing stage,
Softeners

Gloves, Fall Protection System
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

General guidelines

Miss communication
Unidentified hazards
Muscle strains
Slips, trips & falls
Weather condition
Damaged equipment
Miss use of equipment
Equipment failure

Revision Date: March 2007
Developed By: Rick Normand & Wes Obrigewitch

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Post these safety guidelines in a
conspicuous place and be sure that all
persons who erect, use, locate, or
dismantle suspended scaffold systems
are fully aware of them and also use
them in the 100% Safe Meetings.
b) Follow all equipment manufacturers
recommendations as well as provincial,
Page 55 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Electrocution
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

local and federal codes and regulations,

relating to suspended scaffolding.
Survey the jobsite. A survey shall be
made of the jobsite by a competent
person for hazards such as exposed
electrical wires, obstructions that could
overload or tip the suspended scaffold
when it is raised or lowered, unguarded
roof edges or openings, inadequate or
missing tiebacks. Those conditions
should be corrected before installing or
using suspended powered scaffold
systems.
Inspect all equipment before use. Never
use any equipment that is damaged or
defective in any way. Mark it or tag it as
damaged or defective equipment and
remove it from the jobsite.
Erect and dismantle suspended powered
scaffold equipment in accordance with
design and/or manufacturers
recommendations.
Do not erect, dismantle, or alter
suspended powered scaffold system
unless under the supervision of a
competent person.
Do not misuse suspended powered
scaffold equipment. Never overload
platforms or hoists.
Erected suspended powered scaffolds
should be continuously inspected by the
user to ensure that they are maintained
in a safe condition. Report any unsafe
condition to your supervisor.
Never take chances! If in doubt
regarding the safety or use of suspended
Page 56 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
Rigging guidelines.
Pinch points
Muscle strains
Heavy manual lifting,
Fall
Falling objects,
Heavy manual lifting, and rope
Equipment failure
Structural failure.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

scaffolds, consult your scaffold supplier.

Never use suspended scaffold
equipment for purposes or in ways for
which it was not intended.
Care should be taken when operating
and storing equipment during windy
conditions.
Suspended powered scaffold system will
be installed and used in accordance with
manufacturers recommended
procedures. Do not alter components in
the field.
Suspended powered platforms must
never be operated near live power lines
unless proper precautions are taken.
Always utilize fall arrest systems when
working on suspended scaffolds.
Do not work on or install suspended
powered scaffold if your physical
condition is such that you feel dizzy or
unsteady in any way.
Do not work on suspended powered
scaffolds when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.
Utilize fall protection equipment when
rigging on exposed roofs or floors.
Roof hooks, parapet clamps, outrigger
beams or other supporting devices must
be capable of supporting the hoist
machine with a factor of safety of 4.
Verify that the building or structure will
support the suspended loads with a
safety factor of 4.
All overhead rigging must be secured
from movement in any direction.
Counterweights used with outrigger
Page 57 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

beams must be of a non-flowable
material and must be secured to the
beam to prevent accidental
displacement.
f) Outrigger beams that do not use
counterweights must be installed and
secured on the roof structure with
devices specifically designed for that
purpose. Direct connections shall be
evaluated by a competent person.
g) Tie back all transportable rigging
devices. Tiebacks shall be equivalent in
strength to suspension ropes.
h) Install tiebacks at right angles to the
face of the building and secure, without
slack to a structurally sound portion of
the structure, capable of supporting the
hoisting machine rated load with a
safety factor of 4. In the event tiebacks
cannot be installed at right angle, two
tiebacks at opposing angles must be
used to prevent movement.
i) Rig and use hoisting machines directly
under their suspension points.

Page 58 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Wire rope and hardware guidelines.
Hand injuries, pinch points

Muscle Strains
Equipment failure
Equipment damage.
Power supply guidelines
Electrocution
Fire
Equipment damage
Equipment failure

a) Use only wire rope and attachments as

specified by the hoisting machine
manufacturer.
b) Ensure that the wire rope is long enough
to reach the lowest possible landing.
c) Clean and lubricate wire rope in
accordance with the wire rope
manufacturers instructions.
d) Handle wire rope with care.
e) Coil and uncoil wire rope in accordance
with the clamp manufacturers
instructions.
f) Tighten wire rope clamps in accordance
with the clamp manufacturers
instructions.
g) Do not use wire rope that is kinked,
birdcage, corroded, undersized, or
damaged in any way. Do not expose
wire rope to fire, undue heat, corrosive
atmosphere, electricity, chemicals, or
damaged by tool handling.
h) Use thimbles and shackles at all wire
rope suspension terminations.
i) Use J-Type clamps or sedge fittings. Do
not use U-bolts, Retighten J-clamps
under load and retighten daily.
j) Wire ropes used with traction hoists
must have prepared ends. Follow
manufacturers recommendations.
a) Ground all electrical power sources and
power cord connections and protect
them with circuit breakers.
b) Use power cords of the proper wire sizes
that are long enough for the job.
c) Power cord connections must be
restrained to prevent their separation.
Page 59 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

d)
e)
f)
Fall protection equipment guidelines
Falls
Overloading of anchor points
Failure of fall protection equipment
Damage to fall protection
equipment
Excessive free fall distance
Swing falls
Equipment incompatibilities
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)

Use strain relief devices to attach power

cords to the suspended scaffold to
prevent them from falling.
Protect power cords from sharp edges.
Use GFI with power tools.
Each person on a suspended powered
scaffold must be attached to a separate
fall arrest system.
Each lifeline must be fastened to a
separate anchor point capable of holding
a minimum of 5000 lbs.
Do not wrap lifelines around structural
members unless lifelines are protected
and a suitable anchorage connection is
used.
Protect lifelines at sharp corners to
prevent chafing.
Rig fall arrest systems to prevent free fall
in excess of six feet.
Suspend lifelines freely without contact
with structural members or building
facade.
Use lifelines of size and construction that
are compatible with the rope grab used.
Ensure a properly attached rope grab is
installed on each lifeline. Install in
accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
Keep fall arrest device positioned above
your head level.
Use only full body harnesses of proper
size and that are properly fitted.
Consult the HS&E procedure on Worker
Fall Protection. Inspect the fall
protection system prior to each use.
Page 60 of 162
Steps
8
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
During Use
Pinch points
Falls
Equipment failure
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)

Use all equipment and all devices in

accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
Do not overload, modify, or substitute
equipment.
Before commencing work operations
preload wire rope and equipment with
the maximum working load then tighten
wire rope rigging clamps and recheck
rigging to manufacturers
recommendations.
Inspect all rigging equipment and
suspended power scaffold systems
daily.
Inspect wire rope during each ascent or
descent for damage.
Use care to prevent damage to
equipment by corrosive or other
damaging substances.
Clean and service equipment regularly.
Always maintain at least (4) four wraps
of wire rope on drum type hoists.
Do not join platforms unless the
installation was designed for that
purpose.
Only move suspended scaffolds
horizontally when not occupied.
When rigging for another lower position,
ensure sufficient wire rope is available
before moving the suspended scaffold
system horizontally.
When welding from suspended powered
scaffolds:
1) Ensure platform is grounded to
structure.
.
Page 61 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

2) Insulate wire rope above and
below the platform.
3) Insulate wire rope at suspension
point and ensure wire rope does
not contact structure along its
entire length.
4) Prevent the bitter end from
touching the ground.

Page 62 of 162
Suspended Powered Scaffold Pre Operational Check List

Page 1 of 2
Date:
The use of this check list requires proper training. Ensure you are familiar with the Safe Job Procedure, the equipment
manufacturers recommendations and the provincial and federal codes and regulations relating to suspended powered
work platforms
HOIST COMPONENTS
SUPPORT SYSTEMS
The manufacturers operating instructions
The tie-back rope is properly tied off.
have been read and understood.
The outrigger is of proper design and correctly
Hoists are in proper operating condition.
assembled.
The wire rope has been inspected, reeved
The number of counter weights are correct for
and is attached properly.
the overhang load.
The length of steel wire rope is long enough
All beams, clamps and hooks are correctly
to reach the ground and is attached correctly
tied back.
to the roof support.
Sockets and davits are correctly secured.
After load is applied, all fittings have been
The tie-back rope is properly tied off.
checked for tightness.
SUSPENSION UNIT
The electrical cable or air line connections
All parts (rails, rungs, deck, bumper rollers,
have inspected and are safe. Strain relief has
welds, connection, toe boards/guard rails,
been provided.
stanchions) of the stage/cage/chair have been
The power supplied is enough to operate the
checked to make sure that they are safe and
hoist properly.
will not break or come loose.
The hoist is correctly attached to the stirrup.
The stirrups or connections and their parts
have been checked and are safe.
The capacity plate showing the maximum load
will not be exceeded.
The stage stirrups are in line with the roof
supports.
The appropriate scaffold tag is at the entrance
6.22 Suspended Powered Scaffold Pre Operation Check List Revision Date: March 2007
Page 63 of
162
Developed By: Fred Colley
Form Reference Number B002-6.22-1
Suspended Powered Scaffold Pre Operational Check List

Page 2 of 2
FALL ARREST SYSTEM
Note: No person shall enter a suspended powered
scaffold unless utilizing an approved fall protection
system
Each person to use the suspended powered
scaffold has their own independent fall arrest
system
Each life line has been totally checked for
safe use and is correctly attached at an
independent, safe anchor point at roof level.
Roof edge protection has been provided for
the life line.
Each rope grab has been checked for correct
operation and installation.
Each full body harness has been thoroughly
checked to make sure that all components are
safe and identified with the current color
identifying the inspection period.
Each lanyard has been thoroughly checked
for safe condition. All parts are sound and
correctly attached to the rope grab. The D
ring is in the center of the back.
The full body harness is the proper size and
fits correctly and is snug to the body
ADDITIONAL CHECKS
The equipment must be kept clear of
electrical power and obstacles.
The equipment must not be used in bad
weather.
The total rigging must be checked each time
you use or move it.
The equipment is not overloaded.
Immediately report any improper operation to
your supervisor
REMEMBER: IF IN DOUBT, ASK

ALWAYS HOOK-UP YOUR SAFETY EQUIPMENT
BEFORE YOU GET ON THE SUSPENDED
POWERED SCAFFOLD
Inspector: _________________________________________________________________
6.22 Suspended Powered Scaffold Pre Operation Check List Revision Date: March 2007
162
Form Reference Number B002-6.22-1
Page 64 of
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Power tools (i.e.
grinders, drills, screw
guns)
Electrical cords
Gas saws
Hand tools (i.e. snips,
hammers, clamps)
Steps
1
Job Sequence

6.23 Installation of Metal Wall Cladding

Material:
Insulation

Metal
Material

Gloves
Fall protection systems
Potential Hazards


162

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
Page 65 of
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Move material and equipment into

work area.
Muscle strains, trips, slips.

Mobile equipment
(i.e. trucks, forklifts, cranes)
Installation of Metal Wall Cladding
Pinch points, muscle strains, awkward body

positions, cuts and scrapes, aerial work
platform, other trades, electrical hazards
(i.e. power cords, power tools), fall
potentials, falling objects potentials, glue is
flammable, dust particles from insulation.

162

clear.
safely lift the material properly.
c) If material is too heavy, get help.
d) Spotters for mobile equipment to make
sure there is a clear path of travel.
e) Flag and tag work area or use spotters
to unload material.
f) Inspect all equipment before using.
g) Make sure there is firm and level ground
for equipment before using.
a) Flag and tag work area.
b) When working off scaffolding or aerial
work platforms, fall protection will be
applied as required.
c) Qualified personnel to install hoisting
system. (i.e. rope and pulley)
d) Install flashings and caulking where
needed.
e) Bring liner sheet to building, fasten sheet
clamp to liner and hoist into position.
f) Clamp liner sheet top and bottom and
fasten by using power tools.
g) Continue this method for remainder of
building.
h) Install Z-bar on sub girt to secure liner
sheets.
i) Install glue on liner sheet by using brush.
j) Install insulation.
k) Hoist exterior wall into place and fasten
to sub girt.
l) Install the flashing that is needed.
m) Clean up work area and continue
process until all walls are complete.
Page 66 of
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Power tools (i.e.
grinders,
drills, screw guns)
Power cords
Hand tools (i.e. snips,
hammers, clamps)
6.24 Installation of Sloped Metal Roof.

Material:
Insulation

Metal
Material

Gloves, Fall protection system
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Potential Hazards


operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
6.24 Installation of Sloped Metal Roof

Revision Date: January 2007

uneven ground).
Page 67 of 162
Steps
3
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Move material and equipment into

work area.
Muscle strains, trips, slips.

Mobile equipment (i.e. trucks, forklifts,
cranes).
Installation of metal sloped roof.
Pinch points, muscle strains, cuts and

scrapes, aerial work platforms, other trades,
electrical hazards (i.e. power cords, power
tools), fall potential, falling objects
potentials, dust particles from insulation .
6.24 Installation of Sloped Metal Roof

Revision Date: January 2007

clear.
safely lift the object properly.
c) If material is too heavy, get help.
d) Spotters for mobile equipment to make
sure there is a clear path of travel.
e) Flag and tag work area or use spotters
to unload material.
f) Inspect all equipment before using.
g) Make sure there is a firm level ground
before using mobile equipment.
a) Make sure to use the proper Fall
Protection and engineered anchor points
(i.e. horizontal life line) before
proceeding with work activity.
b) Access roof by aerial work platform,
scaffold or properly tied off ladder.
c) Workers will be 100% tied off to the
engineered fall protection system.
d) Flag and tag work area for material to be
hoisted to the roof by a crane and use
qualified riggers and operators.
e) Flag and tag area to overhead work area
to prevent unauthorized personnel from
entering.
f) Open material and start to install roof
system.
g) All material will to be secured from all
elements. (wind)
h) Clean the work area and continue the
process until the roof is completed.
Page 68 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Flagging
6.25 Working From A Scaffold

Material:

Gloves
Personal Fall Protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Scaffold erection, inspection and

tagging.
Unauthorized construction leading

to scaffold failure.
Unauthorized use of a scaffold,
leading to personal injury.


Developed By: Dean Forest

operator.
where required.
of the shift / day.
loose gravel).
b) Write plans to eliminate / control
hazards on FLHA and follow through
with the plan before commencing work.
a) The use and erection of scaffolds shall
comply with governmental requirements.
b) All scaffolds will be erected, inspected
and tagged by a competent person and
the inspection and tagging will be
updated at a minimum of every 21 days.
c) Prior to using the scaffold, read and
obey the scaffold tag that is at the point
of entry.
Page 69 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
d)
Loading the scaffold
Dropped items
Falls
Overloading of a scaffold
a)
b)
c)
Ascending and descending
Falls
Dropped items
Blocking access in the case of an
emergency
a)
b)
Fall Protection
Falls
a)
b)
c)

Green safe for use

Yellow caution, potential or
unusual hazard
Red unsafe for use
A worker will not use a scaffold if it has:
a red tag,
a green or yellow tag that has
expired, or
no tag at all
Materials and tools will not be carried up
or down the ladders. They will be raised
or lowered by crane or rope & gin wheel.
Scaffolds will not be loaded with more
than 367 kilograms / square metre (75
lbs. / square foot) unless the scaffold is
designed by an engineer for that
purpose.
Rigging shall never be done from
scaffold hand rails or braces.
When moving up or down the ladder the
workers will maintain three point contact
with the ladder and maintain their center
of gravity over the ladder rungs.
Workers will not perform work from the
scaffold ladder.
Fall protection will be used when:
Working on a scaffold deck
above 1.8 metres (6 feet) that is not
fully enclosed by a hand rail and mid
rail
A worker is required to break the
plain of the hand rails
Workers will maintain their feet on the
scaffold deck and will not stand on the
toeboards, mid rails or hand rail.
Ladders shall not be used to extend the
height of a scaffold by placing them on
Page 70 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

the working deck of the scaffold.
Dropped items
Clean up

a) Maintain a neat and tidy work area with

all tools and materials contained and
secured with in the rails and toeboards.
b) Do not drop or throw tools, equipment or
materials from the scaffold.
c) When work is to take place under or near
scaffolds or there is a high risk of falling
work items, mesh or screen material [25
mm (1 in) square opening, maximum}
shall be installed to cover the opening
from the toeboard to the mid rail.
d) To prevent other workers from entering
the area below the scaffold, erect
barricade flagging with tags and/or signs
to indicate the hazard.
a) Remove and/or tidy and secure all tools
and materials at the end of the shift and
end of task.
Page 71 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Flagging
6.26 Working From A Rolling Scaffold

Material:

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Scaffold erection, inspection and

tagging.
Unauthorized construction leading

to scaffold failure.
Unauthorized use of a scaffold,
leading to personal injury.


Revision Date: March, 2007

operator.
where required.
of the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. uneven ground, holes, loose
gravel).
a) The use and erection of scaffolds shall
comply with governmental requirements.
b) All scaffolds will be erected, inspected
and tagged by a competent person and
the inspection and tagging will be
updated at a minimum of every 21 days.
c) Prior to using the scaffold, read and
obey the scaffold tag that is at the point
of entry.
Green safe for use
Page 72 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
d)
Toppling of scaffold
Unplanned movement of scaffold
a)
b)
c)
d)
Loading the scaffold
Falls
Toppling of scaffold
Dropped items
Falls
Overloading of a scaffold
a)
a)
b)

Yellow caution, potential or

unusual hazard
Red unsafe for use
A worker will not use a scaffold if it has:
a red tag,
a green or yellow tag that has
expired, or
no tag at all
The height of a rolling scaffold will not be
more than 3 times its smallest base
dimension.
If outriggers are used to attain the 3 to 1
ratio, the outriggers will be firmly
attached to ensure the stability of the
scaffold.
The scaffold will be equipped with locking
wheels or there will be blocks for the
wheels.
The wheel locks or blocks will be used
when a worker is on the scaffold.
A worker will not remain on a rolling
scaffold while it is being moved unless:
the height of the work platform is
not more than twice the smallest
base dimension, and
the surface it travels on is firm,
level and free of hazards that may
cause it to topple.
Materials and tools will not be carried up
or down the ladders. They will be raised
or lowered by rope & gin wheel.
Scaffolds will not be loaded with more
than 367 kilograms / square metre (75
lbs. / square foot) unless the scaffold is
designed by an engineer for that
purpose.
Page 73 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

c)
Ascending and descending
Falls
Dropped items
Blocking access in the case of an
emergency
a)
b)
Fall Protection
Falls
a)
b)
c)
Dropped items
a)
b)
c)
d)

Rigging shall never be done from

scaffold hand rails or braces.
When moving up or down the ladder the
workers will maintain three point contact
with the ladder and maintain their center
of gravity over the ladder rungs.
Workers will not perform work from the
scaffold ladder.
Fall protection will be used when:
Working on a scaffold deck above
1.8 metres (6 feet) that is not fully
enclosed by a hand rail and mid rail
A worker is required to break the
plain of the hand rails
Workers will maintain their feet on the
scaffold deck and will not stand on the
toeboards, mid rails or hand rail.
Ladders shall not be used to extend the
height of a scaffold by placing them on
the working deck of the scaffold.
Maintain a neat and tidy work area with
all tools and materials contained and
secured with in the rails and toeboards.
Do not drop or throw tools, equipment or
materials from the scaffold.
When work is to take place under or
near scaffolds or there is a high risk of
falling work items, mesh or screen
material [25 mm (1 in) square opening,
maximum} shall be installed to cover the
opening from the toeboard to the mid
rail.
To prevent other workers from entering
the area below the scaffold, erect
barricade flagging with tags and/or signs
to indicate the hazard.
Page 74 of 162
Steps
10
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Clean up

a) Remove and/or tidy and secure all tools

and materials.
Page 75 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Cut-Off-Saw
Fire Extinguisher
6.27 Gas Powered Cut-Off-Saw

Material:

CSA approved safety goggles
Full Face Shield, Hearing Protection
Leather gloves, Respirator
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Pre Use
Not being familiar or trained in the

use of the tool.


Revision Date: April, 2007

b) Ensure permit is signed and dated by
the operator.
where required.
d) Make sure permit is signed off at the
end of the shift / day.
loose gravel).
a) Read the instruction manual before
using for the first time.
b) If the machine is not being used, it must
be shut off and laid down.
c) Never cut asbestos.
Page 76 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Personal Protection
Personal injury
Transporting the tool.
Personal injury.
Spilled fuel
Fire
Damage to the saw or cutting wheel.
Refueling
Fire
Explosion
Selection of cutting wheel
Using an incorrect cutting wheel.

Using a damaged cutting wheel
Wheel failure due to damage or
overspeed.

Potential Hazards
a) The operator must be in good physical

health and mental condition.
b) Never wear loose fitting garments.
c) Long hair must be tied back.
d) In addition to standard PPE, Wear a full
face shield and goggles to protect
against flying objects.
e) Wear sturdy leather gloves
f) Wear personal hearing protection.
g) When dust, fumes, vapors or smoke are
expected, wear respiratory protection.
a) Always switch off the engine.
b) Carry by the handle with the cutting
wheel at the rear and muffler away from
your body.
c) When transporting in a vehicle, secure
the machine so it cant tip over and spill
fuel or suffer damage. Do not transport
with the cutting wheel fitted.
a) Keep fuel away from sources of ignition.
b) Switch off engine before refueling.
c) Wait for engine to cool.
d) Refuel in a well ventilated area.
e) Clean up any spills immediately.
f) Look for leaks. Do not start the engine if
there is any sign of leaking fuel.
a) Cutting wheel must be approved for free
hand cutting.
b) Do not use other cutting wheels or
attachments.
c) Select the appropriate wheel for the
material being cut.
d) The permissible speed of the cutting
wheel must be equal to or greater than
the nominal spindle speed.
e) Never use a chipped, cracked or warped
cutting wheel or one with a damaged
Page 77 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

spindle hole.
Note the use-by date on composite
cutting wheels.
g) Cutting wheels must always be
prevented from knocking against the
ground or other objects
a) Check that the cut-off-saw is in good
working order.
b) Move at least 3 Metres from where the
machine was refueled.
c) Ensure unnecessary persons are out of
the work area.
d) Clear the work area - look out for
obstacles and other holes or pitfalls.
e) Start the engine on flat, level ground.
Do not drop-start.
f)
Always hold the machine firmly with
both hands: right hand on the rear
handle, even if you are left-handed.
g) The wheel guard must be set correctly
so that particles of material are guided
away from the user and machine.
h) Do not use while standing on a ladder,
in an unsteady position or overhead.
i)
Only use in a well ventilated area.
j)
Never touch a rotating cutting wheel
with your fingers or any other part of the
body.
k) Work calmly and methodically. Take
breaks if required.
l)
Do not cut with the upper quarter of the
cutting wheel.
m) The cutting wheel must be guided
straight in the cut, without wedging.
Never exert lateral pressure on the
cutting wheel.
n) It must not be used for lateral grinding
f)
Operating the cut-off-saw

Damaged equipment.
Fire or explosion
Injury to other workers.
Injury to operator.
Slip, trip, falls.
Carbon monoxide poisoning.
Cuts and burns.
Muscle strains
Kickback of saw
Damage to cutting wheel
Page 78 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

or scrubbing.
Do not stand in line with the cutting
wheel.
p) Never leave the machine unattended
with the engine running
q) Before putting the machine on the
ground, switch off the engine and wait
until the cutting wheel has come to a
complete stop.
a) A fire extinguisher must be in close
proximity.
b) Remove fuel supply and combustibles
from the work area.
c) Wear clothing that is fire resistant.
o)
Fire Prevention

Fire
Burns
Page 79 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
JSM Machine
6.28 JSM Machine

Material:
Coil
Fuel

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Spot Machine
Level Machine
Obstructions
Blind spots
Uneven Ground
Soft Ground
Pinch Points
Set up runoff stands and tables
Taking off de-coiler and loading cols

onto it.
Pinch Points
Cuts and scrapes
Heavy, awkward lift
Pinch points

6.28 JSM Machine


the operator.
where required.
loose gravel).
a) Use spotters
a)
b)
c)
a)
a)
b)
Block wheels.
Use blocks under stands when ground
is soft.
Keep hands clear of jacks.
Keep hands clear of base of de- coiler
when moving.
Get help to lower de-coiler.
Keep hands clear of coil and plate on
Page 80 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Line up lifting notches in de-coiler.
Loading coil and de-coiler onto

machine with a crane or fork lift.
Shifting load.
Pinch points.
Sharp edges.
Check fuel and oil in machine. Fuel

if necessary.
Spills
Fire
Start and warm up machine.
10
Putting Material into machine to roll

panels.
11
Rolling panels
Cuts
Burns
Cuts
Sharp edges
Pinch Points
Heavy lifts
Sharp edges
Slips and Trips
12
Stacking panels
13
Jam ups or problems
Slips and Trips

Sharp edges
Windy conditions
Sharp edges
Pinch points
14
Workplace clean up.
Cuts
15
Demobilization of JSM
Pinch points
Cuts and scrapes
Heavy lifts
Equipment damage.
6.28 JSM Machine

c)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
a)
b)
c)
d)
a)
a)
b)
a)
b)
c)
d)
a)
b)
c)
a)
b)
a)
de-coiler.
Ensure back plate is bolted on secure.
Use approved sling to lift.
Designated signal person.
Use softeners if required.
Keep hands clear of rollers and
bearings.
Bolt roller keepers in place.
Do not overfill fuel tank.
Clean up any spills
Keep fire extinguisher near machine.
Check for leaks
Keep hands and body parts away from
moving parts.
Wear Gloves
Put Material into guides and push into
first rolls.
Use enough people to move panels.
Watch where you walk.
Wear your gloves
Wait until material clears machine.
Be careful when stepping over bundle.
Wear your gloves and glasses.
Tie bundles together when finished.
Shut machine off when clearing jam ups
or when ever you have to work on any
moving equipment.
Remove ignition key
Wear your gloves
a) Unload any unused coil.

b) Slide de-coiler back into center of
machine and bolt into place.
c) Pack up run out table and stands.
d) Leave material between rollers when
hauling machine to and from work
Page 81 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

places.
6.28 JSM Machine

Page 82 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Swing stage
AWP
JSM Machine
Drills, Screw guns
Grinder, Seamer
6.29 Cladding Tanks

Material:
Insulation
Cladding
Metal coils

Gloves, Face shield, Fall protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Unload Insulation
Slip, trips
Awkward lifts
Dusty conditions

6.29 Cladding Tanks

a)
Check permit; make sure all applicable

the operator.
where required.
loose gravel).
a) Be aware of footing
b) Proper lifting techniques
c) Wear appropriate PPE
d) Dust Mask if required
e) Do not stack higher than you can reach
without over exertion.
Page 83 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Unload cladding with fork lift.
Pinch points
Blind spots
Heavy lifts
a)
b)
c)
d)
Keep hands clear of loads.

Use a spotter
Qualified operator
Designated signaler with proper signals.
Setting up swing stage
Pinch points
Awkward lifts
Heavy lifts
Slips & trips
Cuts or pinch points on cords.
Cords getting caught.
Tripping
a)
Burrs on cables
Pinched cables
Review Safe Job Procedure 6.22

Suspended Powered Scaffolds.
100% tie off when setting up on tank
roof
Keep cords to one end of the swing
stage neatly on the ground.
Have enough cord to prevent stretching.
Keep cords away from work area.
Check cords daily.
Check cables
Make sure cables are coiled up at each
end to keep clear of people and
equipment in the area.
Do daily inspection of swing stages and
all rigging.
Use care when cutting insulation. Wear
gloves.
Use a dust mask or respirator as
required.
Do not exceed weight restriction of
swing stage scaffold.
Keep garbage in bags and dispose in
correct bins.
If windy, secure insulation supply to the
swing stage.
100% tie off required on swing stage.
Flag and tag the work area at ground
level as required.
Use a forklift to move bundles and use a
spotter.
Wear gloves
Be aware of where you are drilling.
Hooking up Power
Hooking up motors and cables
Potential Hazards
b)
a)
b)
c)
d)
a)
b)
c)
Installing insulation
Wiring insulation to tank
Cuts
Dusty conditions
Congestion on swing stage
Garbage
Windy conditions
Falls
Others in area
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Hauling sheets and preparing
6.29 Cladding Tanks

Heavy lifts
Awkward lifts
Cuts
Punctures
a)
b)
c)
Page 84 of 162
Steps
10
Job Sequence
Using a grinder to cut sheets
Potential Hazards
Flying debris
Sharp edges
Garbage
Lifting
11
Installing metal cladding and

flashing.
Sharp edges
Awkward lifts
12
Using drills and screw guns
Sharp bits
Cuts in cords
13
Using Aerial Work Platforms (AWP)
Congestion
Stairways
Pinch points
Other workers in area
14
15
Hoisting materials to the roof with a

crane.
Installing insulation on roof.
6.29 Cladding Tanks

Pinch points
Swinging loads
Falls
Slips & trips
Others in area
Congestion
Cuts
Dusty conditions
Garbage
Windy conditions
Falls
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
a)
b)
a)
b)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
a)
b)
c)
d)
Wear safety glasses and a face shield

when grinding.
Ensure the grinder is equipped with a
zip disk, guard and side handle.
Wear gloves
Keep work area free of debris.
Get help when lifting
Tie down material when not in use.
Wear appropriate PPE.
Get help with lifts.
Be aware of hand placement when
using drills.
Check cords and tools daily.
Review HS&E Procedure B040 Aerial
Work Platforms.
Utilize qualified people trained and
certified in the use of AWP.
Conduct daily AWP inspections.
Keep hands clear when moving
platform.
Use spotters as required.
Flag and tag ground area as required.
Flag and tag area when hoisting
100% tie off on roof.
Keep hands clear of loads, use tag
lines.
Use designated signal person.
Use appropriate slings and rigging for
task.
Do not overload areas of the roof.
Be aware of your surroundings.
Use care when cutting insulation, wear
gloves.
Use dust mask as required
100% tie off
Keep garbage in bags for disposal.
Page 85 of 162
Steps
16
Job Sequence
Rolling roof panels utilizing the JSM
machine.
6.29 Cladding Tanks

Potential Hazards
e)
If windy, secure materials.
a)
Review Safe Job Procedure 6.28 JSM

Machine.
Page 86 of 162
Steps
17
Job Sequence
Installing roof panels and flashing
Sharp edges
Heavy lifts
Slips and Trips
Falls
a)
b)
c)
d)
18
Workplace clean up
Cuts
Dust
Falls
e)
a)
b)
c)
d)
6.29 Cladding Tanks

Potential Hazards
Wear appropriate PPE

100% tie off
Use enough people to move materials.
Keep materials tied down when not in
use.
Keep work areas clean
Wear your gloves.
Wear dust mask if required.
100% tie off when at elevation.
Dispose of garbage in appropriate bins
or containers.
Page 87 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Mig welder
Power Source
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
6.30 Mig Welding

Material:
Metal

Leather welding gloves
Welding shield c/w proper shade lens
Respirator
Burn resistant clothing
Potential Hazards
If applicable obtain a safe work and

or hot work permit before
commencing work.
Other trades in area.

Flammables.
Proper PPE.

operator.
requirements of the permit and sign where
required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the mig welder.
a) Set up protective barriers
b) Ensure there are no flammable materials
around welding area.
c) Upper body leathers required for overhead
welding.
d) Lower body leathers required for welding in
a sitting position.
6.30 Mig Welding

Revision Date: June, 2007
Developed By: Sheldon Schroeder, Dale Knutson, Aaron Willette & Marlon Freistadt
Page 88 of 162
Steps
4
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Inspect mig welder.
Trips
Fumes
Electrical

a) Inspect cords and plugs for cracks or
frayed ends.
b) Check mig welder for loose or missing
parts.
c) Inspect gauges and hoses for cracks, and
tightened properly to tank. If you smell gas
close valve immediately.
d) Be sure you are plugged into proper power
source.
e) Check amperage and wire speed, make
sure setting is right for the welding process
you are doing.
f) Run cables and hoses in a way that
tripping hazards are eliminated.
g) Clamp ground securely to work.
6.30 Mig Welding

Page 89 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Mig welding
Potential Hazards
Burns
Electrical
Fumes
Noise
Housekeeping
Trips
Slips
Burns
Fire

a) Do not use mig welder in wet or damp
locations.
b) Ensure proper ventilation, if proper
ventilation can not be acquired, a respirator
must be worn.
c) Check to make sure welding shield is
turned on to prevent arc flash.
d) Exposed skin must be covered by
appropriate burn resistant clothing.
e) Position yourself in a way that is
comfortable for type of work being
performed.
f) Be aware of hot surfaces, even after
welding process is finished. Allow material
to cool before handling.
g) Turn off mig welder before changing rolls
or wire spool.
h) When removing cone or tip, eliminate burn
hazard by wearing gloves.
i) At shift end turn off gas, purge the line until
gauges read zero and remove gauges.
j) Store gauges where they will not be
damaged.
k) Be sure to put cap on tank to protect valve.
a) Keep watch on welding area for one half
hour after welding is finished to ensure no
fires ignite.
b) Housekeeping must be maintained at all
times.
c) When finished with mig welder wrap up
cables neatly, without kinking and return
mig welder to the appropriate storage area.
d) Ensure all debris is cleaned up and put in
appropriate containers.
6.30 Mig Welding

Page 90 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Hydraulic Press
Power source
6.31 Hydraulic Press Brake

Material:
Metal

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
Lack of training
Ergonomic hazard
Inspect Press Brake.
Trips
Electrical
Equipment damage
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points
If applicable obtain a safe permit


Developed By: Sheldon Schroeder

operator.
required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the press brake.
a) ALL workers using press brake for the first
time must be given the proper training and
closely supervised.
b) If working with heavy sheets set up the
proper tables, stands or rollers to carry
material weight.
frayed ends.
b) Run electrical cords in a way that will
eliminate tripping hazards.
c) Be sure you are plugged into proper power
source.
d) Check hydraulic oil levels.
Page 91 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Operating Press Brake.
Electrical
Sharp edges
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points
Housekeeping
Trips
Slips

Developed By: Sheldon Schroeder
e) Do not leave tools or miscellaneous debris

on or around equipment. It could get
caught in machine and cause damage or
injury.
f) Set up proper lighting so you can see
exactly what you are doing. It will also
reduce eye strain.
a) Do not use press brake in wet or damp
locations.
b) When working with partner, proper
communication is key.
c) Position yourself in a way that is
comfortable and you are in control of
material.
d) Position pedal in away that you do not
have to stretch for and or could lose
balance.
e) Wear gloves at all times.
f) Check material edges; be sure they are
straight and free of fish hooks.
g) Keep hands away from moving parts.
h) Check capacity rating of press brake, do
not exceed.
i) If press brake is to be left unattended for
any amount of time, turn it off.
a) Properly stack material being formed.
Maintain adequate space for walkways.
times.
Page 92 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
55 ton ironworker
Power Source
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
6.32 Hydraulic Iron Worker

Material:
Metal

Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards

Lack of training.
Proper PPE.
Ergonomic hazard

Developed By: Sheldon Schroeder, Dale Knutson, Aaron Willette

operator.
required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the ironworker.
a) ALL workers using ironworker for the first
time or have not operated equipment for
long period of time must be given the
proper training.
b) Do maintenance checks, hydraulic oil
levels are up, all moving parts are properly
greased.
c) Communicate with fellow workers, making
them aware of the noise hazard; give them
time to put on the proper hearing
protection.
Page 93 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Inspect 55 ton Ironworker
Potential Hazards
Trips
Electrical
Equipment damage
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points

d) If working with heavy or awkward material

set up the proper tables, stands or rollers
to carry material weight.
a) Do not assume ironworker is set up
properly for your task, if you need
instruction talk to your supervisor.
b) Any maintenance you are not qualified for
should be done by a person with
specialized training.
c) Inspect ironworker for loose bolts, screws,
nuts, guides and gauges. Tighten if
necessary.
d) It is vital to tighten and realign punches and
dies before use.
e) Make sure all depth and height allowances
are checked daily.
f) Check that all pinch point safe guards are
in place and secured properly.
g) Clean off all beds and tables on ironworker.
Do not leave tools or miscellaneous debris
injury.
h) Inspect cords and plugs for cracks or
frayed ends.
i) Be sure you are plugged into proper power
source.
j) Position foot pedals in a way that will
k) Set up proper lighting so you can see
reduce eye strain.
l) Test emergency stop buttons.
Page 94 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Operating 55 ton ironworker
Potential Hazards
Electrical
Noise
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points
Housekeeping
Trips
Slips

a) Do not use ironworker in wet or damp

locations.
b) Position yourself in a way that is
performed.(punching, shearing, or
notching)
c) Even with guards in place always be aware
of possible pinch points.
d) Position foot pedals in away that you dont
have to stretch for or lose balance to
operate.
e) Position material and clamp it with the
appropriate hold down.
f) When changing punches and dies turn off
main power to the ironworker.
g) The ironworker should be shut down if left
unattended for any period of time.
a) All cut ends or punched out material should
be disposed of in the proper containers.
This should be done continually during the
shift.
times.
c) When finished with the ironworker turn off
main power, and wrap up pedals so there
is a clean path around equipment.
Page 95 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Slitter
Tables
Power source
6.33 Sheet Metal Slitter

Material:
Light gauge metal

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
Lack of training
Ergonomic hazard
Inspect slitter.
Trips
Electrical



operator.
required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the slitter.
a) Workers using slitter for the first time must
be given the proper training.
b) Be sure slitter is properly fastened to
bench, or rolling stand.
c) If slitter needs to be moved, ask for help
from fellow workers. Use proper lifting
technique when lifting and moving slitter.
d) If working with heavy or awkward material
set up the proper tables, stands or rollers
to carry material weight.
frayed ends.
b) Run electrical cords in a way that will
Page 96 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Equipment damage
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points
Operating Slitter
Electrical
Sharp edges
Ergonomic hazard
Pinch points
Snagging hazard
Housekeeping
Trips
Slips


source.
d) Do not leave tools or miscellaneous debris
injury.
e) Set up proper lighting so you can see
reduce eye strain.
a) Do not use slitter in wet or damp locations.
b) Position yourself in a way that is
comfortable and you are in control of
material.
c) Wear gloves at all times.
d) Check material edges, be sure they are
straight and free of fish hooks.
e) Keep hands away from moving parts.
f) Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry that
can get caught in moving parts.
g) Check capacity rating of slitter do not
exceed.
h) Keep benches clear of any debris that
material being cut could snag on or push
off table.
i) If metal gets jammed in slitter turn off
power immediately. Disconnect power
from source and proceed with loosening
material from machine.
j) If slitter is to be left unattended for any
amount of time, turn it off.
a) All left over cut ends should be disposed of
in the proper containers. This should be
done continually during the shift.
times.
Page 97 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Band Cutting Machine
6.34 Band Cutter Operation

Material:
Banding Material

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Start of Shift
Physical and visual inspection

of machine.
Plug in air hose
Slips and trips

Electrical
Ergonomics
Cuts and scrapes while checking nuts
and moving parts for tightness
Loading Band Cutter
Slips and trips

Lifting outer wheel and banding roll
Sharp edges
Ergonomics


Developed By: Jim Ringuette
Revision Date: September, 2007

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Inspect electrical cord and air hose for
cracks or other damage.
b) Inspect machine for damage.
c) Wear gloves
d) Make sure the machine is properly
plugged into the electrical and air lines.
a) Position yourself in a safe and
comfortable way.
b) Use proper lifting techniques (lift with
legs)
Page 98 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Snagging
Electrical
c)
d)
e)
f)
Cutting Bands
Setting Machine to cut.
Removing bands from tray and

moving them to the table.
Electrical
Ergonomics
Lifting
Sharp edges
Slips and trips
Pinch points
Snagging
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
6
7
End of Shift
Unplug air hose.
Ensure machine is turned off.

Servicing of Equipment

Developed By: Jim Ringuette
Slips and trips

Ergonomics
Electrical
Unplanned operation or movement of
equipment.
a)
b)
a)
Wear gloves
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry
that could get caught.
Never slide hand/fingers along the edge
of the banding.
Always control the rotation of the
banding roll when loading.
Position yourself in a comfortable
position.
Use proper lifting techniques (lift with
legs)
Keep hands away from moving parts.
Keep hands out of the way as bands exit
the machine.
Wear gloves.
Be aware of other workers when moving
bands from the tray to the table.
Proceed with caution when threading
banding into machine.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry.
Wait until the machine makes and
audible click before removing bands
from tray.
Clean up.
Position items and ready equipment for
the start of the next shift.
Unplug air hose and electrical cable.
Page 99 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Gilitene
6.35 Gilitene-Metal Cutter

Material:
Metal Cladding

Gloves
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Handling Metal
Slip/trips
Cuts
Heavy lifts
Load metal into cradle of

equipment.
Cut straps off the roll of metal
Cuts
Foreign bodies in eyes
Square Metal against guide of
Cuts


Developed By: Stan Lockett

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Keep area free of debris.
b) Wear appropriate gloves when handling
metal.
a) Get help as required.
a) Hold metal in place with free hand when
cutting bands.
b) Wear gloves.
c) Wear safety glasses.
a) Wear gloves
Page 100 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
equipment.
Feed desired amount of metal
through gilitene opening
Pinch-points
Cuts
Hold metal in place with one hand

and pull gilitene cutting blade down
with slight pressure against bottom
blade.
If more cuts are required, follow
steps 6 to 8.
House keeping
Cuts
Pinch-points
Parts of body in line of fire.
a)
b)
Slip/trips
Cuts & punchers
a)
9
10

b)
c)
b)

Developed By: Stan Lockett
Wear gloves
Do not allow metal to slide through your
hand.
Keep hands clear of blades
When cut is complete, DO NOT release
handle. Raise the handle until it comes
in contact with its stopper.
Clean up work area during and following

task.
Dispose of scrap in appropriate
receptacle.
Page 101 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Grinder
6.36 Portable Grinders With Wire Wheel

Material:
Metal

Standard PPE (Hard Hat, Steel Toed
Boots, Safety Glasses)
Face Shield, Hearing Protection
Welding gloves, leather leg protection
Welding sleeves for arm protection
Potential Hazards
Power supply
Wire Wheel
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
Inspect grinder.

6.36 Portable Grinder With Wire Wheel

September, 2007
Developed By: Marlon Freistadt

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards prior to using the grinder.
around the grinding area.
c) Be sure to don proper PPE before
starting.
Revision Date:
Page 102 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Grinding.

debris, dust.
Housekeeping.
6.36 Portable Grinder With Wire Wheel

September, 2007
b) Inspect the grinder for any damage prior

to each use
c) Do not use defective wire wheels (i.e.
loose wires or excessive wear).
d) Ensure the correct size of grinder is used
for the job.
e) Use the correct type of wheel for the job.
f) Ensure guard and handles are secure.
g) Ensure maximum speed rpms is marked
on the wheel.
h) Make sure there is no damage to the
a) Do not use grinder in the rain.
b) Allow grinder to run up to operating
speed before applying to the job.
c) Apply the grinder with minimum pressure
to avoid kick back.
d) Ensure the wheel doesnt hit other object
while grinding.
e) Keep wheel at the proper angle to the
work. When possible, direct debris away
from body.
f) Ensure work piece is secured.
g) Do not use the grinder between the legs.
h) Do not put the grinder down until the
wheel stops rotating.
i) Always disconnect the power before
changing wheels.
j) Ensure cords are away from moving
discs.
a)
Housekeeping must be maintained at all
times.
b)
When grinding is complete return
grinder to the proper storage area.
c)
Ensure all debris is picked up and put in
Revision Date:
Page 103 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Mag Drill
Power Source
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
6.37 Magnetic Base Drill

Material:
Steel

Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards


Lack of training.
Lack of Proper PPE.
Eye strain.
Revision Date: October, 2007

operator.
required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the mag drill.
a) Familiarize yourself with tool operation.
b) Tag cord at power source to insure no one
unplugs it while in operation.
c) Check that power switch is off before
plugging in.
d) Barricade area to prevent others from
entering work area.
e) Wear proper eye protection when drilling
overhead.
f) Wear proper hearing protection.
g) Set up proper lighting so you can see
Page 104 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Inspect Mag drill
Trips
Electrical
Equipment damage
Operating Mag drill
Electrical
Ergonomic hazard
Dropping hazard
Pinch points
Sharp objects
Hot surfaces
Housekeeping
Trips
Slips
Falling debris

Potential Hazards
exactly what you are doing.

a) Run extension cords in a way that will
b) Inspect cords and plugs for cracks or
frayed ends.
source.
d) Maintain labels and name plates.
e) Ensure tool is color coded for the
appropriate quarterly inspection.
a) Do not use mag drill in wet or damp
locations.
b) Do not attach mag drill to steel less than
3/8 thick.
c) Clean the surface before attaching the drill
stand to surface.
d) Unplug drill when installing/removing
cutter.
e) Position yourself in a way that is
performed.(overhead, vertical)
f) Always use safety strap when drilling
overhead or on vertical surfaces.
g) Always keep hands, rags, loose clothing
away from moving parts and chips.
h) Never use cutting fluid when drilling
overhead, this could allow fluid to enter
motor or switch enclosure.
i) Do not hold work piece in your hand, use
proper clamps.
j) Do not use excessive force or magnet
could break free.
k) Make sure you have a firm grip on drill
before turning off the magnet.
a) Keep work area clean and well lit.
b) When working on grating lay down fire
blanket or plywood to eliminate chips or
Page 105 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

shavings falling on other workers.

Page 106 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Chop Saw
Power Supply
Cut-off Wheels
6.38 Portable Cut-Off Saw (Chop-Saw)

Material:
Metal (Ferrous Only)

Hearing Protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before use.
Inspect chop-saw

6.38 Portable Cut-Off Saw (Chop Saw)

Page 107 of 162
Developed By: Fred Galley

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards Prior to using the chop-saw.
around the cutting area.
b) Inspect the chop-saw for any damage
Revision Date: July 2008
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Grinding.

debris, dust.
Housekeeping.
6.38 Portable Cut-Off Saw (Chop Saw)

Page 108 of 162

prior to each use
c) Do not use defective cutting wheels (i.e.
cracks or chips).
d) Ensure guard and handles are secure.
e) Ensure maximum speed rpms is marked
on the wheel.
f) Make sure there is no damage to the
a) Do not use chop-saw in the rain.
b) Ensure work piece is secured in the vise.
c) Allow chop-saw to run up to operating
speed before applying wheel to metal.
d) Apply the wheel to metal with minimum
pressure to avoid jamming or binding.
e) Ensure the wheel doesnt hit other object
while cutting. (clean work area)
f) Always disconnect the power before
changing wheels.
g) Never use a cut-off wheel for grinding.
h) Ensure cords are away from moving
wheel.
a) Housekeeping must be maintained at all
times.
b) When cutting is complete return chopsaw to the proper storage area.
c) Ensure all debris is picked up and put in
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Circular Saw
6.39 Circular Saws

Material:
Wood, light metal, insulation etc.

Face shield, Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before you start cutting.
Personal injury.

Tool failure.
Cut cords/electrocution
Slip/trips.
6.39 Circular Saw

Revision Date: August 2008

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Wear safety glasses and if cutting metal
a face shield also.
b) Use appropriate hearing protection.
c) Wear an approved respirator or dust
mask when exposed to harmful or
nuisance dusts.
d) Keep cords clear of cutting area.
e) Check the retracting lower blade guard to
Page 109 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

f)
g)
h)
i)
Operation of the saw
Personal injury.
a)
Retracting lower blade guard may jam in the

open position.
b)
Operation of saw when not intended.
c)
Kick back of saw.
d)
Tool failure.
e)
Blade damage or failure.
f)
Stock moving when not expected.

g)
h)
i)
6.39 Circular Saw

make certain it works freely.

Ensure that the blade that you have
selected is sharp enough to do the job.
Check the saw for proper blade rotation.
Set the depth of the blade, while the saw
is unplugged, and lock it at a depth so
that the lowest tooth does not extend
more than 1/8 beneath the material.
Circular saws are designed for right-hand
operation; left-handed operation will
demand more care to operate safely.
Check the retracting lower blade guard
frequently to make certain it works freely.
Check that the retracting lower blade
guard has returned to its starting position
before laying down the saw.
Keep upper and retracting lower blade
guard clean and free of sawdust.
Disconnect power supply before
adjusting or changing the blade.
Allow the saw to reach full power before
starting to cut.
Use two hands to operate saws one on
the trigger switch and the other on a front
knob handle.
Keep motor free from accumulation of
dust and chips
Select the correct blade for stock being
cut and allow it to cut steadily. Do not
force it.
Secure stock being cut to avoid
movement.
Page 110 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
What you should avoid when using

a circular saw.
Personal injury
Kick back of saw.

Jamming of saw.
Projectiles such as saw teeth, nails, screws
etc.
Loss of balance and falling into line of fire.
Housekeeping
Slips and trips.
a) Do not hold or force the retracting lower

guard in the open position.
b) Do not place hand under the shoe or
guard of the saw.
c) Do not over tighten the blade-locking nut.
d) Do not twist the saw to change, cut or
check alignment.
e) Do not use a saw that vibrates or
appears unsafe in any way.
f) Do not force the saw during cutting.
g) Do not cut materials without first
checking for obstructions or other objects
such as nails and screws.
h) Do not carry the saw with a finger on the
trigger switch.
i) Do not overreach. Keep proper footing
and balance.
j) Do not rip stock without using a wedge or
guide clamped or nailed to the stock.
a)
b)
Clean up excess material and debris.

Roll up extension cords.
Fire
6.39 Circular Saw

Page 111 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Saw
Blades
6.40 Saws-Sabre, Jig & Reciprocating

Material:
Wood, metal, insulation etc.

Face Shield,Gloves
Hearing protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Before you start cutting.
Personal injury.

Tool failure.
Broken blades.
Cut cords/electrocution


operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Wear safety glasses and if cutting metal
a face shield also.
b) Disconnect power supply before
changing or adjusting blades.
c) Use lubricants when cutting metals.
d) Keep cords clear of cutting area.
e) Position the saw beside the material
before cutting and avoid entering the cut
Page 112 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Slip/trips
f)
Operation of the saw
Personal injury.
a)
b)

c)
Kick back of saw.
Tool failure.
d)
Blade damage or failure.
e)
Stock moving when not expected.

f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)

with a moving blade.

Make sure guards, if present, are
installed and are working properly.
Hold reciprocating saw with both hands.
Remember sabre saws cut on the up
stroke.
Secure and support stock as close as
possible to the cutting line to avoid
vibration.
Keep the base or shoe of the saw in firm
contact with the stock being cut.
Select the correct blade for the material
being cut and allow it to cut steadily. Do
not force it. Clean and sharp blades
operate best.
Set the blade to go no further than 1/8 to
inch. Deeper than the material being
cut.
Do not start cutting until the saw reaches
its full power.
Do not force a saw along or around a
curve. Allow the machine to turn with
ease.
Do not insert a blade into or withdraw a
blade from a cut or lead hole while the
blade is moving.
Do not put down a saw until the motor
has stopped.
Do not reach under or around the stock
being cut.
Maintain control of the saw always.
Avoid cutting above shoulder height.
Page 113 of 162
Steps
5
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
How to start an external cut.
Personal injury
Kick back of saw

Broken blades
How to start an inside cut.
Personal injury
a) Place the front of the shoe on the stock.

b) Make sure that the blade is not in contact
with the material or the saw will stall
when the motor starts.
c) Hold the saw firmly down against the
material and switch the saw on.
d) Feed the blade slowly into the stock
maintaining an even forward pressure.
a)
Kick back of saw
Housekeeping
Broken blades
b)
Slips and trips.
a)
b)
Drill a lead hole slightly larger than the

saw blade. With the saw switched off,
insert the blade in the hole until the shoe
rests firmly on the stock.
Do not let the blade touch the stock until
the saw has been switched on.
Clean up excess material and debris.
Roll up extension cords.
Fire

Page 114 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Powder Actuated
Tool
6.41 Powder Actuated Tools

Material:
Projectiles (fasteners, nails,
studs, etc.)
Cartridges

Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Review general safety precautions

and manufacturers specifications.
Unauthorized use.

CSA approved safety glasses and
face shield
Hearing Protection
Gloves

Injury to self or others.

Falls from elevation.


operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground).
a) Allow only trained, competent and
authorized persons to use the tool.
b) Handle with the same respect and safety
precautions as a gun.
c) Wear safety glasses, face shield and
Page 115 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Unplanned discharge of tool.
Care and service of tool.
Unauthorized use.
Tool failure.
Using the powder actuated tool.
Ricochets.
Tool failure.
Explosion and/or fire.
Personal injury.
Use of the projectiles.
Damage to tool, projectile or base material.

Projectile shot beyond intended location.

hard hat.
d) Wear hearing protection.
e) Brace yourself at all times when working
on ladders or scaffolds to maintain good
balance.
f) Keep tools pointed in a safe direction.
Never point tool at anyone.
g) Load tool just before use. Do not carry
loaded tools from job to job.
h) Do not leave loaded tool unattended.
i) Do not allow bystanders near the work.
a) Clean and maintain tool according to the
manufacturers instructions.
b) Check tool before use to ensure that it is
in good working order.
c) Tag defective tool Out of service and
remove from service until properly
repaired.
d) Store tool and cartridges in a locked
container when they are not in use.
e) Ensure the tool is unloaded before
storing it.
a) Use the tool at right angles to the work
surface.
b) Check the chamber to see that the barrel
is clean and free from any obstruction,
before using the tool.
c) Do not use the tool where flammable or
explosive vapours, dust or similar
substances are present.
d) Do not place your hand over the front
(muzzle) end of a loaded tool.
e) Warn other workers around you prior to
firing the tool.
a) Use only the projectiles (fasteners, nails,
studs, etc.) recommended by the tool
manufacturer.
Page 116 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

b)
Projectile shot before intended.

Break down of base material creating
shrapnel.
c)
d)
Use of the charge cartridges.
Tool failure.
a)
Uncontrolled projectiles due to oversize

charge.
b)
Respiratory difficulties due to burnt powder.

c)
Miss-fires.
d)
Electrocution
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Housekeeping

Unauthorized use of equipment.
a)
Ensure that the base material has no

holes or openings and is of sufficient
consistency to prevent a projectile from
passing right through.
Do not load a tool until immediately
before use.
Do not force a projectile into a working
surface that is harder than the projectile
being used.
Use only cartridges recommended by
the tool manufacturer.
Check that the colour of the cartridge is
appropriate for work being done.
Charge cartridges are colour coded to
show their strength.
Conduct a first trial by using the weakest
or lowest strength charge cartridge.
Provide adequate ventilation in confined
spaces where tool is used.
Hold the tool in the fixing position for no
less than 5-15 seconds when a tool
misfires. Keep the tool pointed in a
direction that will not cause injury to you
or others and unload a cartridge with
extreme caution.
Use caution when using tools near live
electrical circuits. Make sure that the
nails (etc.) do not enter live circuits
buried or hidden in the base material.
Keep cartridges in a lock up when not in
use.
Do not discard unfired cartridges
carelessly.
Do not carry cartridges loose or in a
pocket. Carry them in the
manufacturers package.
Return the tool and charges to a safe
Page 117 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

storage place when not in use.
b) Clean up all debris.

Page 118 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Steps
1
6.42 Fall Protection Plan
Tools:
Life line & rope grabs
Self retracting life lines
Double shock absorbing lanyards
Full body harness
Anchor slings
Horizontal life lines
Job Sequence
Material:
Potential Hazards

Hearing Protection
Gloves
100% Fall Protection will be maintained at all times.

All persons utilizing personal fall protection systems will possess current and valid fall protection training.
Operation of AWP
a) Operator will possess a current and valid
Fall from elevation
AWP operators ticket.
Ejection from platform
b) All persons in the platform will wear a full
body harness and a double shock
absorbing lanyard or a self retracting
lanyard.
c) Upon entering the platform and prior to
operation each worker will attach his/her
fall protection system to the
manufactures designated anchor point.
d) For further detail, refer to B040 Aerial
Work Platforms.
Access and egress to or from a
a) To exit an AWP to access a structure the
Fall from elevation
structure via an AWP
worker will first attach his/her personal
fall protection system to an anchor point
on the structure or connected to the
structure. They will then detach their fall
protection system from the AWP anchor
point.
b) To access an AWP from a structure the
worker will first attach his/her personal

Revision Date: December 2008
Page 119 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Working on a slopped roof.
Potential Hazards
Fall from elevation
a)
b)
c)
d)
Working on a flat roof.
Fall from elevation
a)
b)
c)

fall protection system to the AWP anchor

point. They will then detach their fall
protection system from structure.
A horizontal life line system or alternative
anchor points will be installed at the peak
of the roof.
Each worker will utilize an individual life
line and rope grab combination or self
retracting life line attached to the
horizontal life line or alternative anchor
points.
Life line and rope grab combinations will
be adjusted to prevent the worker from
proceeding beyond the leading edges or
open holes/accesses.
When access to the gable ends is
required the worker will utilize a self
retracting life line or life line/rope grab
combination. If using the life line/rope
grab combination it will be attached to
the horizontal life line one back from the
end.
Preference is to have guard rails
mounted on the perimeter of the roof.
If guard rails are not in place a control
zone may be established 2 meters (6
feet) from the perimeter of the roof. A
raised warning line or other equally
effective means such as barricades will
be placed 2 meters from the edge to
provide a visual and physical reminder of
the presence of the hazard.
If a raise barrier is in place, 2 meters
from the unguarded edge, fall protection
will be required within the 2 meter
perimeter and no fall protection will be
required inside the barrier.
Page 120 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

d)
e)
Working from a swing stage or

spider
a)
b)
Working from a man basket.
Fall from elevation.
a)
b)
Working from a scaffold.
Fall from elevation

Scaffold failure.
Anchor point failure
a)
b)
c)
d)
Elevated Work Rescue Plan

8
Unable to perform rescue
a)
If no raise barrier is in place, fall

protection is required when working
within 4 meters (13 feet) of the
unguarded edge.
For further detail, refer to B005-Worker
Fall Protection.
Workers will utilize a fall arrest system
such as a vertical lifeline and rope grab
combination or a self retracting lifeline.
The fall arrest system will be attached to
an anchor point which is independent of
the anchor points utilized to suspend the
swing stage or spider.
A secondary man basket support will be
attached between the suspended man
basket and the hoist line above the hook
assembly.
Each worker in the basket will wear a full
body harness and lanyard attached to
the man basket.
The scaffolding used must have a yellow
or green tag indicating that it is
structurally sound for use and built to
accepted specifications.
When a workers torso breaks the plane
of the handrail (or a workers arms are
over the handrail exerting force to lift) fall
protection is required.
Fall protection anchor points will be
assessed and approved by the
supervisor of the crew.
If the only available anchor point is the
scaffold the anchor point will be less
than 24 inches from a tied in node point
on a ledger and blocked with a clamp at
a maximum of 24 inches.
Prior to executing work at elevation the
Page 121 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

Delay in performing rescue
Elevated Work Rescue Plan, form

number B005-1 will be completed.
Page 122 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Metal Tools
Bander
Utility Knife with
retractable blade
Tape Measure
Nippers
6.43 Aerogel Installation

Material:
Aerogel 3350,6350,10350 or XT
Banding
Wire

CSA approved work boots / Hard Hat
Respirator with P100 Filters
CSA approved spoggles / goggles
Fiberglass Tape
Wing Seals
Disposable Coveralls FR if required

Gloves Leather, Latex
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Assemble material set up work

station
Pinch points, slips, trips, falls, pulled

muscles, back strains



operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
uneven ground, snow, ice)
a) Use pallet jack or forklift when unloading
and transporting rolls.
b) Use proper lifting practices.
c) Plan for ease of housekeeping.
d) Store in clean dry protected environment,
if storing outside place on pallets and
cover with waterproof tarp.
Page 123 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Manufacture bands and clips
Cuts to hands
Fabricate insulation pieces
Cuts to hand, dusty conditions
Installing Insulation
Cuts, wire pokes, pinch points, dust
Clean up
Strains, cuts, trips, dust

e) Cutting area for material should be set up

in a covered area with tables or plywood.
a) Ensure gloves are worn at all times
b) Take measurements for appropriate
band lengths, cut at 90 degree angle.
c) Install wing seals.
a) Respirator, spoggles/goggles, gloves and
disposable coveralls are to be worn at all
times.
b) Take measurements and cut insulation to
appropriate size(s) with utility knife,
ensure proper overlap as per
specifications.
a) Secure insulation in place using wire,
banding or tape at appropriate spacing
as specified.
b) Align the material and ensure a snug fit.
c) When double layering ensure all joints
are staggered to eliminate heat transfer /
hot spots.
d) Use utility knife or metal masters to
make cutouts, ensure voids are minimal.
e) If insulation is to be cladded, use proper
trade procedures and follow metal
specifications.
f) Respirator, gloves, spoggles / goggles
and disposable coverall to be worn at all
times.
a) Respirator, gloves, spoggles / goggles
and disposable coveralls are to be worn
at all times.
b) Use proper lifting techniques while
disposing of waste.
c) Place all waste in sealed bags to reduce
dust.
d) Segregate all materials as per site
requirements.
Page 124 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

e)

Use proper receptacles for waste
Page 125 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
BEAM CLAMP
SHACKLES, SLINGS
TURFER, CHAIN
FALLS
COME ALONGS
BEAM CLAMP
SHACKLES, SLINGS
6.44 Hoisting By Mechanical Means

Material:
Hearing Protection
Gloves
Steps
1
Job Sequence
If applicable obtain a safe
work permit before
commencing work.

Other Trades
Move equipment and tools into the

work area before commencing work
Traffic and other workers in the

area.
Set up for lift.
Falls, strains, pulls, mobile

equipment.


Potential Hazards
Revision Date: January, 2009
a) Check permit to make sure all applicable

operator.
where required.
the shift/day.
uneven ground).
on the FLHA and follow through with the
a) Ensure clear pathway to work area.
b) Spotter for mobile equipment.
c) Flag and tag work areas.
a) Inspect all rigging, slings and lifting
equipment.
Page 126 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

b)
c)
d)
Hoist load.
Load drops, shifts or swings.
a)
b)
Secure load
Load drops.
a)
Housekeeping.
Slips and trips
a)
b)

Place upper anchor center over load.

Do not overreach to attach the rigging.
Use tag lines to control the loads.
Ensure weather conditions are favorable
for hoisting.
Attach tag lines, use smooth even
strokes when cranking lifting devices.
Take breaks if needed and never stand
under the load.
Be sure load is secured before removing
lifting devices.
Housekeeping must be maintained at all
times.
Ensure all debris is picked up and put in
Page 127 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Bench Grinder
Vise Grips
Wheel Dresser
Steps
1
Job Sequence
work permit before
commencing work.

3
6.45 Bench Grinder
6.45 Bench Grinder

Material:
Grinding Wheels

CSA approved safety glasses and
face shield
Hearing Protection
Gloves
RPE may be required (consult MSDS)
Potential Hazards
Other Trades
Fire
Slip/trips
a) Check permit to make sure all applicable

operator.
where required.
the shift/day.
uneven ground).
on the FLHA and follow through with the
c) Ensure other workers are not in the path
of the sparks.
a) Keep the floor and work area clean.
b) Store flammables a safe distance away
Page 128 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Preparation
Potential Hazards
Poor visibility
Entanglement of hair, clothing or
jewelry in the equipment.
Dislodgement of grinder from bench
or pedestal.
Material or fingers being pulled
between the wheel and tool rest.
Failure/explosion of the grinding
wheel.
Unexpected or unplanned starting
of the grinder.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Starting grinder
Grinding
Dressing of grinding wheel
Failure/explosion of the grinding

wheel.
Kick back of material from the
grinding wheel.
Material drawn between the wheel
and tool rest.
Premature wear and failure of the
grinding wheel.
Explosion of the wheel.
Heat, causing burns.
Flying debris.
a)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
a)
b)
6.45 Bench Grinder

from the grinder.

Ensure the work area has adequate
lighting that doesnt create glare or
shadows.
Remove jewelry and tie back long hair.
No loose clothing.
Ensure grinder is mounted securely.
Set tool rest at the appropriate angle and
1/8 inch from the wheel.
Maintain tongue guard within inch of
wheel.
Inspect wheel for damage before starting
the grinder.
Grinder must be turned off and
unplugged prior to making
adjustments.
Stand to one side until grinder reaches
operating speed.
Bring work into contact with grinding
wheel slowly without bumping.
Apply gradual pressure, use only the
pressure required to complete a job.
Move the work back and forth across the
face of the wheel.
Do not grind on the side of the wheel.
Do not attempt to grind small pieces
without the aid of holding tools.(i.e. visegrips)
Be aware of heat buildup.
Never grind aluminum on a stone.
Replace worn wheels if you cannot dress
them (only dress a wheel if you have
been trained in doing so).
Hold wheel dresser firmly against the
tool rest and move from side to side of
the stone.
Page 129 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

c)
Changing a grinding wheel
Mechanical failure of the wheel.

Over speed failure of the wheel.
a)
b)
c)
Clean Up
6.45 Bench Grinder

Metal slivers in hands.
d)
e)
f)
a)
With the grinder stopped and unplugged,

adjust the tool rest for a clearance of no
more than 1/8 inch.
Turn off and unplug grinder
Ensure appropriate grinding wheel for the
material being ground.
Ensure grinder speed does not exceed
the operating speed marked on the
wheel.
Inspect the wheel for damages or cracks.
Mount wheel and do not over tighten.
Adjust tool rest and tongue guard.
Clean the area of debris after use with a
brush. (not bare hands)
Page 130 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Steps
1
Tools:
Knife
Tape measure
Nippers
Job Sequence
work permit before
commencing work.
6.46 Installing Insulation on Pins

Material:
Insulation Board
Pins
Washers

Gloves
Potential Hazards

a)
b)
c)
d)

Other Trades
a)
b)
Hoist materials to location.
Straighten Pins out for use on

insulation
Other trades in area

Falling materials
Back strains
Pinch points.
Sharp points,
Tripping/Falling
Cuts
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
a)

Developed By: Bill Bishop, Patrick Campion, Al Odland, Fred Colley
Check permit to make sure all applicable

Ensure permit is signed and dated by
operator.
Make sure you understand the requirements
of the permit and sign where required.
Ensure permit is signed off at the end of the
shift/day.
Inspect the work area for any potential
hazards (i.e. tripping, loose stones, uneven
ground).
Write plans to eliminate / control hazards on
the FLHA and follow through with the plan
Communicate your work plan with other
workers in the area.
Flag and tag hoisting area.
Inspect man lifts or equipment if using to
hoist materials.
Use proper lifting techniques.
Watch placement of hands.
Field fit insulation to surface by trimming
insulation with a knife to actual size required
prior to straightening out pins.
Page 131 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Install insulation on pins
Sharp points
Dust
Pinch points
Puncher wounds
Respiratory disorders
Clean up
Slip/trips
Disbursement of debris
Back strains

b) Ensure proper gloves are worn for all cutting
activities and that all cuts are made away
from the body.
c) If pins are to be installed and left for any
length of time before insulation is applied,
consideration should be given to blunting the
tip of the pin.
d) Straighten pins as required for insulation
application.
e) Watch foot placement when walking on top of
the work area.
a) Check pattern of pins to determine
placement of hands.
b) Gently push insulation onto pins.
c) Secure insulation with washers on pins and
bend the pins over when complete.
nd
d) Where a 2 layer of insulation is required,
straighten pins as required and repeat above
procedure.
e) Leather palmed or puncture resistant gloves
must be worn when installing insulation.
f) Wear appropriate respiratory protective
equipment if in an enclosed area or
excessive dust is being generated.
a) Discard pins that have come loose by
disposing of them in the approved garbage
receptacles.
b) Put insulation cutoffs and garbage into
proper garbage containers.
c) Use proper lifting techniques. Do not
overload garbage bags.
d) Flag and tag hoisting area. Remove flagging
when clean up is complete
e) Watch hand placement and avoid line of fire.

Developed By: Bill Bishop, Patrick Campion, Al Odland, Fred Colley
Page 132 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
6.47 Lead Paint Abatement- Buffing & Grinding
Required:
Tools:
Hepa Vacuum
Shrouded grinder
Material:
6 mil reinforced poly
Yellow caution tape
Utility Knife with

retractable blade
Lead Abatement signs

6 mill garbage bags

CSA approved work boots / Hard Hat
Respirators with Hepa Filters-half or
full face
Safety glasses / goggles / face shield
Plastic spay bottles

Rags for wiping
Disposable Coveralls complete with

hoods & booties FR if required
Gloves Leather, if required Latex
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence

Set up work area
Pinch points,
Slips, trips, falls
Pulled muscles
Back strains

6.47 Lead Paint Abatement-Buffing & Grinding

Developed By: Wes Obrigewitch

operator.
where required.
the shift / day.
hazards (i.e. tripping, uneven ground,
head bangers, tight work areas)
a) Establish control zone by using yellow
ribbon and lead abatement caution signs.
b) Use 6 mil reinforced poly for drop sheets
below work area to contain dust.
Page 133 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Removing the lead paint
Muscle strains
Pinch points
Slips, trips, falls
Foreign bodies to eyes
Lead related illness
Clean-up and waste disposal
Muscle strains,
Foreign bodies to eyes
Environmental contamination
6.47 Lead Paint Abatement-Buffing & Grinding

Developed By: Wes Obrigewitch
c) Set up wash station to clean lead dust

contamination from workers.
a) Don two disposable coveralls with hoods
& booties.
b) Wear a half mask respirator with Hepa
filters in combination with safety glasses
and full face shield or a full face
respirator with Hepa filters.
c) Attach Hepa vacuum to the shrouded
grinder.
d) Grinding/buff area until lead paint is
removed.
e) Use damp rags to remove lead dust
residue.
f) Third party company to test for lead
residue and/or air quality.
a) Continue utilizing disposable coveralls
and respiratory protection until all
potential lead contaminates are
contained.
b) Use proper lifting techniques. ( e.g. keep
back strait, bend at knees, lift with legs)
c) Dispose of waste in properly marked
receptacle bins.
d) Dispose of contaminated waste in proper
receptacles, and follow site policy and
procedures that govern such work.
e) Use water spray bottle and paper towel
to remove any lead residue or dust from
respirator or face.
f) Take down Control zone when
completed
Page 134 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Vertical Band Saw
Clamps
Vacuum
6.48 Vertical Band Saw

Material:
Fibreglass Insulation
Calsil Insulation
Mineral Wool Insulation

Leather work gloves
Face Shield
Respirator (Dust mask or half mask)
Tyvek Coveralls
Hearing Protection
Potential Hazards
Steps
1
Job Sequence
Working in unauthorized areas.

Missing potential hazards that may

cause injuries.
Before use.

Personal Injury.
Electrical shock/moving parts

Developed By: Bill Love, Marlon Freistadt
Revision Date: May 2009

operator.
where required.
shift/day.
hazards prior to using the saw.
a) Set up protective barriers if required
b) Face shield and respiratory protection to
protect from dusty conditions.
c) Tyvek coveralls to protect against flying
insulation.
d) Hearing protection while using saw.
Page 135 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

e) Make sure saw is unplugged while doing
checks.
Open blade guide boxes (top and

bottom)
Pinch points
Check for and clean out any excess

debris from pulleys that guide the
saw blade.
Close doors on blade guide boxes

(top and bottom)
Excess debris in pulleys could cause

blade to run off pulley.
Cutting hands or fingers on exposed
blade.
Pinch points
Back Strain
Set height of guide covering blade.
Too much blade exposed while cutting

insulation.
Back Strain
Pinch points
Plug saw into power source.
Electrical shock
Turn saw on and off to test

switches.
Blade not shutting off when stop button

is pushed.
Accidental contact with blade.
10
Set mitre locator.
Pinch points
11
Set depth guide and secure with

clamps.
Back Strain

a) Watch for stored energy in doors while

opening.
b) Keep fingers clear of doors clamps while
unlatching.
a) Clean all debris out of compartment area.
b) Where gloves while cleaning out blade
guide box and use a stick to clean out
area around blade.
a) Take care in clamping the doors on guide
boxes, fingers could get pinched in
clamps.
b) Be sure to have proper body positioning
while pushing on doors to clamp them.
a) Put a piece of the insulation to be cut
under guide and lower it to have the
smallest gap while still allowing the
insulation to move while cutting.
b) Proper body positioning while moving
guard to reduce strain on back.
c) Have a firm grip in guide before
loosening to eliminate guide falling.
a) Always wear glove and make sure all
cords are in good working condition
before plugging into power source.
a) Turn machine on and off using switches
or using dead man switch if available.
b) Be sure to leave saw in off position until
ready to cut insulation.
a) Keep hand and fingers out of line of fire
while adjusting locator back and forth.
a) Position body so that you will not strain
your back while tightening clamps to hold
down guide.
Page 136 of 162
Steps
12
Job Sequence
Position table to fit material next to
blade.
Potential Hazards
Pinch points from rollers under table.
Back strain while moving table.
Hitting objects/people with sliding table.
13
Start vacuum (if one is hooked up

for ventilation purposes)
Dust
Pinch points
14
Start saw using the on switch.
Material in blade area.

Debris in air from start up.
15
Put material in place against guides

and slide table to cut material.
Cutting hands
Debris in eyes, face and lungs.
Catching loose clothing in saw blade.
16
Remove cut piece from the table.
Cut hands
Jammed pieces of materials in blade
area.
Material catching blade
17
Re-adjust depth guide if needed.
Cutting hands
Back Strain
18
Turn off and unplug saw and

vacuum when finished.
Electrical shock

a) Keep hands and fingers from under

table.
b) Be aware of possible back strain if table
sticks.
c) Be sure to test table to make sure it
moves freely.
d) Make sure there is proper clearance for
the table to slide the distance during the
cutting of the material.
a) Make sure the vacuum is hooked to
bottom of saw.
b) Wear mask and gloves for this task to
prevent against cuts and dust.
a) Be sure blade is clear before starting.
b) Be sure to wear all PPE during start up
as well as during cutting process.
a) Keep hands clear of blade area and use
push stick for smaller pieces of material.
b) Always wear PPE during cutting process.
c) Be sure any loose clothing is removed,
tied back or under coveralls before doing
any cutting.
a) Keep table slid in the position where the
cut piece is on the back side to the blade.
b) Grab cut piece of material and remove
from table before sliding table to position
for next cut.
c) Pull back excess material before sliding
table back for next cut.
a) Turn off saw before doing any adjusting
of depth guide.
b) Use proper body positioning to remove
and reapply clamps.
a) Be sure to grab cord at the end to
remove from power source. NEVER pull
on a cord to unplug the end from the
wall.
Page 137 of 162
Steps
19
Job Sequence
Housekeeping
Potential Hazards
Cuts, Strains, Dust

a) Keep PPE on during cleaning of saw.

b) Use brush or stick to remove debris from
around blades.
c) Open top and bottom guide blade boxes
and clean out dust and debris.
d) Clean up excess material from table top
of saw and floor around saw.
e) Ensure all parts of the saw are cleaned,
use a vacuum if necessary.
Page 138 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Knife / saw
Nippers
Tape measure
Band Tightner
Caulking Gun
Cordless Drill
Steps
1
Job Sequence
6.49 Insulation & Cladding

Material:
Fiberglass
Mineral Wool
Caulking
Wire
Screws
Stainless steel banding
Aluminum cladding

CSA approved safety
glasses/fectoggles
Cut Resistant Gloves
PPE as per site requirements: Fall
protections as needed and required
Half Face Respirator
Potential Hazards
If applicable get a safe work permit


Access Scaffold
Slipping and tripping hazards
Confined Space
Congested Work area
Access Deck Grating
Open holes, loose grating

Developed By: Teresa Lebeuf & Ron MacDonald
Revision Date: Jan. 2010

the operator.
permit where required.
of the shift / day.
hazards, uneven ground, holes, missing
planks, nails sticking up, hot piping,
equipment, tracers, tripping etc.
a) Read inspecting tags, Proper foot
placement
a) Sign on Confined Space entry log
b) Awareness of surroundings
c) Awareness of other workers in area
a) Inspect grating for open holes and
unsecured grating
Page 139 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Select the amount and type of

insulation to be installed as well as
a method of securing the insulation
to the work surface. (i.e. wiring,
banding, spraying, pasting, taping,
pin welding) according to the type
and shape of the surface, whether
or not the work surface is cold or
hot, inside or outside and what the
equipment is going to be used for.
Take careful measurements, then
transfer measurements to the
insulation, make required cutout(s).
Ensure cutouts are neat and tight
fitting. Install and secure insulation
according to specifications. Inspect
insulation and ensure a proper fit.
Ensure all cracks have been filled
in.
Ensure wires or bands have been
installed and spaced according to
job specifications.
Use proper wire burning technique
for securing wire, if banding is
required, ensure bands are cut at
90 degree angles and properly
secured in wing seal.
Clean work area. Pick up all debris,
wire ends, band tails, scrap
insulation. Sweep or vacuum if
necessary.
8
9
10
11
Potential Hazards
Slips, trips, falls,

Muscle or back strains,
Cuts to hands,
Sprains,
Debris in eyes.
Cuts to hands,
Dust,
Floating debris.

obstacles.
c) Ensure you are wearing appropriate
PPE.
d) Keep gloves on at all times.
e) Ensure proper body ergonomics.
f) Use proper lifting techniques.
g) Make sure housekeeping is maintained
at all times.
a) Keep gloves on at all times.
b) Stagger seams if required.
c) Keep tools secure in tool pouch.
d) Ensure all knives are sheathed, when not
in use.
Cuts, dust, floating debris.
a) Ensure all voids are filled in with

insulation.
Cuts to hands, wire pokes.
a) Burn wire according to trade practice.

b) If banding is used, use bander to tighten
bands.
Strains, cuts, dust.
a) Wear gloves and use proper lifting

techniques while disposing of all waste.
b) Wear respirator if dust hazard is present.

Developed By: Teresa Lebeuf & Ron MacDonald
Revision Date: Jan. 2010
Page 140 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Hammer, level
Tape measure
Pliers, handsaw
Bolt cutters, rope
Canvass bucket
Power saw
Steps
1
Job Sequence
Complete FLHA at your work are

before commencing work
6.50 Scaffold Erection/Dismantle

Material:
Scaffold components
Plywood
Nails
Wire
Tarps

Hearing Protection
Gloves
PPE as per site requirements: Fall
protection as needed and required
Respiratory protective equipment as
required
Potential Hazards
If applicable, get a safe work permit

before commencing work

Developed By: Barry Tymchuk
Other trades in the area

Personal injury
a) Check the permit; make sure all

appropriate areas are filled in
the operator
permit where requested.
d) Verify that the hazard controls are in
place before commencing work
e) Make sure permit is signed off at the end
of the shift/day
hazards ( i.e. tripping, congestion, foot
traffic routes, overhead power lines,
ground conditions, damaged material,
hot equipment, fall potential for workers
and material, pinch points, nails sticking
out
b) Determine type and size of light duty
scaffold to be constructed. (Any intended
Page 141 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

c)
d)
e)
Engineering
Failure or damage to scaffold components

putting people, equipment and property at
risk
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)

use that may exceed the standard duty

ratings must be engineered.)
Factor weather conditions into your safe
work plan. (Wind speed and direction,
temperature, precipitation, etc.)
Write plans to eliminate / control hazards
Identify PPE specific to the job and make
sure it is available and used
Determine if intended and potential use
is within the light duty specification for
loading
If there is a reasonable potential to
exceed this rating engineering of the
scaffold must be done prior to
construction commencing.
Determine the load and access
requirements
Determine dimensions and type of
scaffold to be constructed. Make a
detailed sketch with dimensions
Obtain specifications and prints for
support surfaces and/or structures
Forward all relevant information and
drawings to the engineer followed by a
discussion on use, location, clearances,
constructability and other unique
requirements.
Review and supply stamped prints with
the foreman and crew
The scaffold must be built to the exact
specifications
The scaffold must be inspected
according to the prints and specification
and tagged accordingly.
Any change in use exceeding engineered
Page 142 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

limits or modifications to the scaffold
must not be undertaken prior to
engineered revisions to the design.
Material Handling and Storage
Slips, trips, falls, strains, slivers, pinching

and crushing of body parts.
Scaffold
Erection/Modification/Dismantle
Falling material, falls, strains, slivers,

punctures, debris in eyes

a) Ensure ground is safe condition. Snow

and debris is removed and the ground is
sanded if necessary
b) Ensure stable footing at all times and
proper body ergonomics
c) Implement the most safe and efficient
method for handling equipment
d) Utilize machinery to move wherever
possible.
e) Ensure gin wheels are properly installed,
inspected and tagged accordingly
f) Identify and avoid potential pinch points.
g) Use proper lifting techniques
h) Maintain good communication at all times
i) Wear gloves at all times
j) Make sure proper housekeeping is
maintained at all times
a) Ensure all crew members clearly
understand the work plan.
b) Inspect all scaffold equipment prior to use
and tag and remove from service any
defective material.
c) Ensure the crew size is adequate for the
job.
d) Ensure that all crew members
understand their roles and responsibilities
and are capable of performing them.
e) When passing material never slide it
through your hands, always hand over
hand
f) Ensure that the person you are handing
material to communicates that they have
the piece before letting go of it.
Page 143 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Hoarding
Cuts, punctures, strains
Housekeeping
Slips, trips, foreign bodies to eyes, dropped

g) Ensure that the scaffold is red tagged

prior to commencing modifications or
dismantle and that a red tag is hung on a
new scaffold as soon as it is possible.
h) Ensure that flagging is adequately
installed and tagged accordingly.
i)
Install fall protection system if required
j) Complete decks, access and install
decking on the above lift before
ascending to the above lift.
k) Ensure that all components are properly
fastened, secured or torque.
l)
Do not store material on an incomplete
deck
m) Avoid cutting wood at elevation whenever
possible. Take measurements and have
cuts done on the ground. If it is necessary
to cut wood at elevation controls for dust
must be in place.
n) Make sure that nails are properly driven
and that none are left sticking out.
o) Return unused equipment to the
appropriate lay down, make sure area is
clean, remove flagging and report any
tagging instructions to your foreman.
a) Always cut away from body parts
b) Cut resistant level 4 gloves are the
minimum requirement when using a knife
c) Cut wire at 90 degrees and make sure
you are using the proper technique to
avoid punctures.
d) Always wear gloves when tying wire.
e) Always be mindful of wind conditions
when handling tarps and take the
necessary measures to mitigate the
hazards
a) Clean up excess materials and debris
Page 144 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
items

Page 145 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
6.51 Industrial Sewing Machine
Tools:
Sewing Machine
Shears/Scissors
Needles
Material:
Cloth etc.
Insulation
Thread

Hearing Protection (recommended)
Steps
Job Sequence
Complete FLHA at your work

area before commencing
work.
Pre-use Activities
Personal Injury
Equipment failure/damage
Broken needle
Damaged cord/electrocution
Personal injury
Punctured fingers
Pinched fingers
Cut fingers
Foreign body to eyes
Unintended operation of
machine
Machine operation
Potential Hazards

Developed By: Dean Forest, Annette Craig

a) Inspect the work area for any potential hazards (i.e. tripping,
loose cords, poor housekeeping).
b) Write plans to eliminate / control hazards on FLHA and
follow through with the plan before commencing work.
a) Thoroughly review and understand information provided in
the owners manual with particular attention given to
descriptions of safety procedures.
b) Before using, always inspect the sewing machine for
damage or disrepair, including the power cord. Assure all
ventilation openings are clear of lint and scrap cloth. Also,
inspect all machine settings and adjustments and modify as
necessary for the sewing task you intend to perform.
c) If a sewing machine fails your pre-use inspection, notify your
supervisor. Tag it out of service and do not use until it has
been repaired.
a) Only use a sewing machine for its intended purpose as
described in the operators manual.
b) Use proper type and size needle as per manufacturers
recommendation.
c) Prior to use, always inspect the needle to make sure it is not
bent, dulled, or damaged. Never use a bent or damaged
needle.
Page 146 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Slip /trips
Broken needles
Equipment damage


d) Keep your hands away from needle when you turn ON the
power switch or while the machine is in operation.
e) Always maintain a safe zone around the presser foot where
fingers never enter when the sewing machine is operating.
Try to keep your fingers to the side of the presser foot rather
than in front of it.
f) Do not put your fingers into the thread take-up cover while
the machine is operating.
g) Never sew with the presser foot in a raised position. Do not
force the fabric forward or backward while sewing. Hold the
fabric firmly between your fingers and allow the feed dogs to
pull the fabric.
h) During operation, be careful not to allow your or any other
persons head, hands, or clothes to come close to the hand
wheel, V belt and motor. Also, do not place anything close
to them.
i) Never look away from the machine while it is sewing. If you
need to look away, stop sewing first.
j) Do not use magnetic pin dishes or other magnetized objects
near a sewing machine.
k) When using shears, cut away from your body in regular,
small strokes. Resting the shears against a table allows for
better cutting control. It is easier to cut from right to left when
you are right handed and from left to right when left handed.
Clip threads with small scissors or a thread clip rather than
large sewing shears.
l) Always turn the sewing machine OFF and unplug from the
power source before changing the light bulb, tilting the
machine head, lubricating machine parts, removing the belt
cover or the V belt, and/or cleaning the machine.
m) Do not operate your machine with the belt cover and/or
finger guard removed.
n) When tilting the machine head, be sure to confirm that the
head support bar is properly attached to your machine head,
and be careful not to allow your fingers or the like to be
pinched in the machine head.
Page 147 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Housekeeping
Potential Hazards
Slip/trips


o) Regularly use a lint brush to clean the area around the
bobbin. Remove the throat plate and brush out all the visible
bits of thread and fuzz that accumulate. If you do it every
time you wind the bobbin, you wont forget.
p) It is recommended that sewing machines be lubricated every
day. Follow the instructions in the owners manual. If the
machine has been stored or unused for a long time, lubricate
and test the machine before using.
a) Clean up the work space when finished with your sewing
task.
Page 148 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Hydraulic Shear
Steps
Job Sequence
Complete FLHA at
your work area
before commencing
work.
6.52 Hydraulic Shear

Material:
Metal

Hearing Protection
Gloves
Potential Hazards

a)
Other workers in the area.
b)
Inspect work area for any potential hazards prior to starting

work.
Write plans to eliminate/control hazards on FLHA and follow
through with plan while performing work.
Pre-use Activities
Personal Injury
Missing guards
a) Thoroughly review and understand information provided in the

owners manual with particular attention given to descriptions of
safety procedures.
b) Before using, always inspect the shear for damage or disrepair.
c) If a machine fails your pre-use inspection, notify your supervisor.
Tag it out of service and do not use until it has been repaired.
Machine operation
Lack of training/experience
Pinch points
Hand injuries
Sharp edges
Soft tissue injury
Back injury
Unintended operation of machine
a) Read and follow all safety labels on the machine.

b) Do not operate the machine unless all safety guards and barriers
are in place.
c) Do not wear loose fitting clothing that could get caught in the
machine.
d) Only one person is allowed to operate the machine at a time.
When working with a partner you must communicate.
e) Position yourself in a way that is comfortable and where you can

Revision Date: April 2011
Page 149 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Slip trip
Equipment damage
f)
Lack of communication
Equipment overload
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
a)
Housekeeping
Slip/trips

b)
manage materials and controls without stretching or putting

yourself off balance.
The shear drop area must be kept clear of personnel or any
other item which may interfere with the movement of the
machine beam or back gauge.
Shut off the main motor before removing material from behind
the shear.
Keep the working area clear from scrap and garbage.
Any maintenance/repair of electrical/hydraulic circuit;
change/adjustment of blade should be done only by qualified
personnel.
Always turn off power and lock out electric supply before doing
any tool change or maintenance work.
Keep hands clear of all moving parts at all times. Fingers must
not go under or inside the safety guards
Never attempt to cut material not specified for the shear.
If any problem or abnormal condition arises during operation,
stop the machine immediately and report to your supervisor.
The machine should never be left under power when not in
operation or unattended. Always isolate the machine after
turning the power off.
When working with long or heavy materials they should be
supported. Set up tables, stands, rollers etc. Use mechanical
means to move heavy items.
Never exceed the rated capacity of the machine.
After completion of operation, all materials must be cleaned
away from the machine.
Position materials so they do not fall or block designated
walkways.
Page 150 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Hydraulic Brake

Material:
Metal

Hearing Protection (recommended)
Gloves
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Complete FLHA at
your work area
before commencing
work.
a) Inspect work area for any potential hazards prior to starting work.
b) Write plans to eliminate/control hazards on FLHA and follow
through with plan while performing work.
Pre-use Activities
Personal Injury
Missing guards
a) Thoroughly review and understand information provided in the

owners manual with particular attention given to descriptions of
safety procedures.
b) Before using, always inspect the press brake for damage or
disrepair.
c) If a machine fails your pre-use inspection, notify your supervisor.
Tag it out of service and do not use until it has been repaired.
Machine operation
Pinch points
Hand injuries
Sharp edges
Soft tissue injury
Back injury
a) Read and follow all safety labels on the machine.

b) Do not operate the machine unless all safety guards and barriers
are in place.
c) Only one person is allowed to operate the machine at a time.
When working with a partner you must communicate.
d) Position yourself in a way that is comfortable and where you can
manage materials and controls without stretching or putting

Page 151 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

Slip trip
Equipment damage
Lack of communication
Equipment overload

Yourself off balance.

e) Keep the working area clear from scrap and garbage.
f) Any maintenance/repair of electrical/hydraulic circuit;
change/adjustment of tooling should be done only by qualified
personnel.
g) Always turn off power and isolate electric supply before doing any
die changes or maintenance work.
h) Never install dies or service the machine without proper
instructions and without first reading & understanding operators
manual.
i) Always use safety tools, fixtures and supporting devices when
changing or adjusting Press Brake tooling.
j) Never service or maintain the brake when the ram is at top
position.
k) Do not leave any tools or instruments in or on the brake at any
time.
l) Always leave ram at bottom of stroke when brake is not in
operation.
m) Support the ram by inserting safety blocks between the dies, if it
becomes necessary to position the ram above the bottom of the
stroke when brake is not in operation.
n) Keep hands clear of all moving parts at all times. Never place
any part of the body in the die area of the brake.
o) Never reach into die area to lubricate, clean or adjust. Use
remote systems or long-handled instruments.
p) Always use hand tools and supporting devices for feeding,
supporting and removing small pieces or parts.
q) Make sure that the m has made firm contact with the back gauge,
before activating the brake.
r) Never operate the machine when personnel are located in the
rear area, behind the bed and ram.
s) Use protective hood on footswitches and foot pedals to prevent
actuation by falling objects.
t) Do not operate the brake without pinch points guarded and
without adequate point of operation safeguarding.
Page 152 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

u) If any problem or abnormal condition arises during operation, stop
the machine immediately and report to your supervisor.

v) When working with long or heavy materials they should be
supported. Set up tables, stands, rollers etc. Use mechanical
means to move heavy items.
w) Never exceed the rated capacity of the machine.
x) The machine should never be left under power when not in
operation or unattended.
y) Turn key selector switch and power switch to the OFF position
and remove keys when the Press Brake is not in use.
a)
Housekeeping
Slip/trips

b)
After completion of operation, all materials must be cleaned away

from the machine.
Position materials so they do not fall or block designated
walkways.
Page 153 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Tools:
Cutting Table
Associated support
equipment
Steps
Job Sequence

6.54 Waterjet Cutting Table

Material:
Metal
Abrasive Sand
Water

Hearing Protection
Gloves
Potential Hazards
a) Inspect work area for any potential

hazards prior to starting work.
b) Write plans to eliminate/control hazards
on FLHA and follow through with plan
while performing work.
Pre-use Activities
Personal Injury
Missing guards
a) Thoroughly review and understand

information provided in the owners
manual with particular attention given to
b) Before using, always inspect the waterjet
table and all supporting equipment for
damage or disrepair.
c) If a machine fails your pre-use
inspection, notify your supervisor. Tag it
out of service and do not use until it has
been repaired.
Machine operation
Pinch points
a) Only Qualified personnel who have

reviewed the operators manual shall

Developed By: Donald Henwood
Page 154 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Hand injuries
Sharp edges
Soft tissue injury (water injection)
Slip trip
Equipment damage
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)

operate, service or maintain the

equipment.
All protective guards, shields or covers
shall be in place on the equipment at all
times.
Safety glasses shall be worn when
operating or working near the equipment.
Wear appropriate gloves when handling
hot or sharp parts.
Restrain long hair. Avoid wearing
neckties, scarves, loose fitting clothing
and hanging jewelry during machine
operation.
The operator shall practice and promote
safety at all times to avoid potential injury
and unnecessary downtime.
The operator shall ensure that the work
area around the equipment is clean and
free of debris and oil, water, sand or
coolant spills.
Avoid placing hands on the table top
when the machine is turned on.
Operators should never leave the
machine unattended during the cutting
sequence.
A lockout/tagout procedure must be
followed to service or maintain the
equipment. At this time all energy
sources must be de-energized.
An Emergency Medial Card is included
in the front of the maintenance manual.
This information should be used to aid in
the treatment of a waterjet injury.
Any questions, ask your supervisor.
Page 155 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

a)
Housekeeping

Slip/trips
After completion of operation the

equipment and work area must be
cleaned up.
Page 156 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
6.55 Straight Knife Cloth Cutting Machine
Required:
Material:
Cloth
Insulation

Gloves
Chain mail glove
Potential Hazards
Steps
Tools:
Upright knife
Job Sequence

Pre-use Activities
Machine operation.

Developed By: Annette Craig

Slip/trips

hazards (i.e. tripping, loose cords, poor
housekeeping).
Personal injury
Equipment failure
Damaged cord / electrocution
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Personal injury
Cut/amputated fingers
Broken blade,
Broken sanding band
a) Only use for cutting cloth & insulation.

b) Inspect material to ensure no metals, i.e.
pins, tape measures, etc.
c) Sharpen blade before cutting to ensure
no binding of the fabric on the blade
Review & understand owners manual.

Inspect blade to see if its loose.
Remove any lint or threads.
Inspect sanding band for sharpening.
If equipment fails inspection, tag it out of
service and notify your supervisor. Do
not use until repaired.
Page 157 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards
Equipment damage
Cutting electrical cords
a)
b)
c)
Housekeeping

d) Use proper blade and sharpening bands

as per instruction manual.
e) ONLY OPERATE WITH CHAIN MAIL
GLOVE ON FREE HAND. If you are
right handed, that will be your left hand.
If your are left handed, that will be your
right hand.
f) Ensure oil is within the lines on reservoir.
g) Do not put your fingers behind the guard.
h) Guard must be down onto the fabric
before cutting.
i) Do not leave guard up for cutting.
j) Do not remove your hand from the
handle until the blade has completely
stopped moving. Machine can roll away.
k) Always be aware of the electrical cord
location.
l) Always cut away from your body.
m) When you are at the end of a cut and a
small portion remains, do not push the
fabric in under the guard. Place your
free hand BEHIND the machine to
stabilize the fabric so you can cut safely.
n) When replacing sharpening bands,
unplug machine.
o) If anything binds in the blade, turn off
machine; hold until blade has stopped
moving. Unplug knife and clean away
the fabric. Inspect blade and sharpener.
Unplug knife to clean after cutting.

Include cleaning underneath blade.
Clean work space when finish with your
cutting task.
Page 158 of 162
JOB PROCEDURES
Required:
Steps
Tools:
CNC Cutting Table
Crank Lift
Cloth Unwinding Rack
Job Sequence

Pre-use Activities
6.56 CNC Textile Cutting Table


Material:
Cloth
Insulation

Level 4 or 5 cut resistant gloves
Chainmail glove
Potential Hazards

Personal Injury

hazards.(i.e. tripping, loose cords, poor
housekeeping).
b) Write plans to eliminate/control hazards
Personal Injury
Broken or chipped rotary blade
Damaged cords or air lines
a) Thoroughly review and understand

information provided in the owners
manual with particular attention given to
b) Before using always inspect the rotary
blade. Assure that the cutting head is
free of lint or debris. Turn air on, inspect
that all gauges are reading the correct
pressure.
c) If the cutting machine fails your pre-use
inspection, notify your supervisor. Tag it
out of service and do not use until it has
been repaired.
Page 159 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Machine Operation

Potential Hazards
Personal Injury
Cut fingers
Personal contact with cutting head
Equipment damage
Broken blades
a) Only use the CNC cutting table for its

intended purpose as described in the
operators manual.
b) Use the appropriate rotary blade with the
corresponding holder as described in
operators manual.
c) Never use a bent or damaged rotary
blade.
d) Always have cut resistant gloves on
while operating the CNC cutting table.
e) Test your cutting pressure at the
beginning prior to cutting. If the rotary
blade cuts the material with a set
pressure between 20 to 40 psi, the blade
is fine. If you are unable to cut the fabric
between these pressures, you need to
change the blade.
f) Inspect fabric for any metal debris that
will cause the rotary blade to break.
g) Clear off any rulers or other tools from
the cutting table surface.
h) To change the large rotary blade, you will
need the CHAIN MAIL GLOVE on your
dominant hand. Hold the large rotary
blade in your dominant hand as you
loosen the top to pull off this particular
cutting device.
i) The CHAIN MAIL GLOVE needs to be on
at all times when you are handling the
large rotary blade. It is extremely sharp.
j) Loosen the 2 anchoring discs, remove
old blade and place in the Sharps
container for safe disposal. Place new
blade in between the anchoring discs
and return to the holder.
Page 160 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

k) When changing the small rotary blade,
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
Housekeeping

Excessive fiber content in air
a)
cutting resistant gloves need to be worn.

Loosen the 2 anchoring discs, remove
old blade and place in Sharps container
for safe disposal. Place new blade in
between the anchoring discs and return
to holder.
Turn CNC cutting table on. Press Find
Home. Allow table to find home. Open
computer software and select the
patterns you would like to cut.
Press blower 1 and 2 on the cutting table
display. If something sounds wrong with
the blowers, turn them off by pressing the
icon again.
Once you have started the cutting,
should anything become jammed or a
rotary blade break, activate the
emergency shut off switch at the front of
the table or the orange pause buttons
located on both sides of the cutting head
and the front of the table.
Stay clear of the cutting head, it will hit
you if you are in the way.
All other personal to stay out of the
control zone indicated by red lines on the
floor during operation. Ensure that
anyone watching is outside of the control
zone as soon as the blower motors are
started.
Blow off cutting head with low pressure

air.
Page 161 of 162
Steps
Job Sequence
Potential Hazards

b)
Dry mop the cutting table and then blow

off with low pressure air.
c)
Blow out rails on side of machine with

low pressure air.
Dry mop the floor around the table.
d)

Page 162 of 162

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
1 of 21
Safeguards
Issued: January 19, 2009

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
REV No. AFFECTED PAGE(S) DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
2 of 21
DESCRIPTION

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
3 of 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE .................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS ...........................................................................................................5
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................6
6.0
PROCEDURE ...........................................................................................................8

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
4 of 21
INTRODUCTION
Serious injuries to workers can occur if proper safeguards are not in place. These
injuries can result from the use of saws, presses, conveyors, bending or shaping
machines as well as powered and non-powered hand tools, forklifts, skid-steers,
doors and materials handling, servicing and maintenance activities. The office
environment also presents hazards that can result in serious injuries with the use
of paper cutters, large pairs of scissors and sheers etc.
Safeguarding is essential for protecting worker from needless and preventable
injury. A good rule to remember is:
Any tools, equipment or machine part, function or process that may cause injury
must be safeguarded.
2.0
PURPOSE
3.0
To establish required safeguards to protect workers from hazards at the

point of operation.
Guarding workers against the hazardous energy sources. .
Safeguarding employees during maintenance and servicing operations.
SCOPE
This procedure applies to all companies, facilities, workers, and sub-contractors,
under the direction of this company.
Additional procedures that apply to safeguarding of Tools and Equipment:
A015 Workplace Inspection

A017 General Rules and Regulations
A024 Hazard Assessment and Control
B008 Energy Isolation LOTO
B018 Preventative Maintenance of Tools and Equipment
Legislation and Standards that apply to Safeguarding of Tools, Equipment and

Machinery:

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
4.0
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
5 of 21
CSA Standard Z432_4,Safeguarding of Machinery.

ANSI Standard A10.11-1989 (R1998), Construction and Demolition
Operations Personnel and Debris Nets
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Safeguarding is any means of preventing workers from coming in

contact with moving parts of machinery or equipment, that would
potentially cause physical harm.
4.2
Device is a mechanism or control designed for safeguarding at the point

of operation. Devices include presence-sensing devices, movable-barrier
devices, holdout or restraint devices, pull-back (out) devices two hand-trip
devices and two hand control devices.
4.3
Guard The word guard often refers exclusively to barriers designed for
safeguarding at the point of operation. Guards include die-enclosure
guards, fixed-barrier guards, interlocking-barrier guards, and adjustablebarrier guards.
4.4
Enclosure is safeguarding by fixed physical barriers that are mounted

on or around a machine to prevent access to the moving parts. Enclosures
are most effective when designed as part of the machine, but they can be
bolted or welded to the frame or the floor.
4.5
Fencing is safeguarding by means of a locked fence or rail enclosure

that restricts access to the machine to authorized workers only.
4.6
Location safeguarding by location results when hazard is physically

inaccessible under normal operating conditions. Both fencing and location
are very limited as safeguarding techniques and are permitted only if
caution restrictions can be met.
4.7
Nip Point or Bites is a hazard area created by two or more mechanical

parts rotating in opposite directions within the same plane and in close
interaction.
4.8
Pinch Points is any place where a body part can be caught between
two or more moving mechanical parts.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
5.0
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
6 of 21
4.9
Point of Operation is an area on a machine where material is

positioned for processing, where work is actually being performed on the
material.
4.10
Power Transmission includes all mechanical parts, such as gears,

cams, shafts, pulleys, belts, clutches, brakes, and rods, which transmit
energy and motion from a source of power to equipment or a machine.
4.11
Shear Points is a hazardous area created by the cutting movement of a

mechanical part past a stationary point on a machine.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
President/Vice President
5.2
5.4
Ensure that the projects have the necessary resources to comply with
CSA, OH&S and company safeguarding requirements.
Ensure that all Project Managers/Superintendents follow this
procedure.
Provide advice and assistance on safeguarding regulations and

standards.
General Managers/Project Manager/Superintendent
Provide assistance and advice on safeguards or safeguarding

accessories available for tools, equipment and machinery that is
purchased or rented.
Ensure that workplace inspections are performed to identify all
safeguarding requirements.
Ensure that all identified safeguarding requirements are implemented
in a timely manner.
Ensure that the tools, machinery and equipment that are made
available to workers have all necessary safeguards and are in good
condition.
Ensure tools, machinery and equipment complies with all CSA and
OH&S safeguarding requirements when purchased or rented.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
5.5
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
7 of 21
HS&E Advisor
5.6
January 19, 2009
Section: B003
Provide assistance with workplace inspections to identify hazards and

situations that require safeguarding.
Provide assistance with Hazard Assessments creation and reviews to
ensure safeguarding that is to be used dose not create any new
hazards.
Conduct informal and formal compliance inspection to ensure all
employees and sub-contractors are following safeguarding
requirements.
General Foreman/Foreman
Conduct informal and formal workplace inspections to identify any new

hazards or situations that require safeguarding.
Ensure tools, equipment and machinery safeguards are used by all
employees.
Provide information on the safe use, inspection and storage of tools,
machinery and equipment.
Ensure defective tools, equipment or machinery is tagged and removed

from service immediately, and are quarantined.
5.7
Workers
Inspect all tools, equipment and machinery safeguards prior to

use.
Verify that all tool, equipment and machinery have safeguards installed
prior to use.
Remove tools, equipment or machinery that have missing safeguards or
are defective or damaged from service, tag them and inform
supervision.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.0
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
8 of 21
PROCEDURE
WARNING
DO NOT use tools, equipment or machinery that are defective, damage or
are missing safeguards.
WARNING
Before maintenance is performed on any tools, equipment and machinery
they must be LOTO in accordances with procedure B015 Energy Isolation
LOTO.
WARNING
When used as protection from falling objects, structures such as canopies
must be strong enough to prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by
any objects that may fall onto them.
WARNING
All manufacture supplied safeguards will be used on all powered and nonpowered hand tools (i.e. guards and handles on hand held electric
grinders)
6.1
Identification of Hazards or Situations that Require Safeguarding
6.2
You can help prevent workplace injuries by looking at your workplace

operations and identifying the hazards associated with the use and care of
tools, equipment and machinery.
Refer to procedure A015 Workplace Inspection for detailed information on
conducting workplace inspection.
Hazard Assessment of Identified Safeguarding Requirements
The Hazard Assessment shall focuses on the relationship between the

worker, the task, the tools, the equipment, the machinery and the

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.6
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
9 of 21
environment. When evaluating work activities for potential injuries hazards,

you need to consider the entire task, process, operation and individual
activities associated with the tool, equipment or machinery including servicing
and maintenance for the potential of injury to the worker.
Refer to procedure A024 Hazard Assessment and Control for detailed
information on conducting Hazard Assessments and implementing controls.
General Requirements for all Safeguards
Prevent contact the safeguard must prevent the workers hands, arms
and any other part of the body from making contact with dangerous moving
parts. A good safeguarding system eliminates the possibility of the operator
or another worker placing parts of their bodies near hazardous moving
parts;
Be secure workers will not be able to easily remove or tamper with the
safeguard. Guards and safety devices must be able to withstand conditions
of normal use;
Protect moving parts from the entry of falling objects the safeguard
will ensure that objects such as tools and materials cannot fall into moving
parts;
Create no new hazards a safeguard must not create a hazard of its own
such as a shear point, a jagged edge, or an unfinished surface that can
cause a cut. The edges of guards for example, may be rolled or bolted in
such a way as to eliminate sharp edges;
Create no interference any safeguard that prevents workers from doing
their work quickly and comfortably may soon be overridden, ignored or
disabled; by workers.
Permit safe lubrication if possible, workers should be able to lubricate
the machine without having to remove safeguards. Locate oil reservoirs
outside the guard, with a line leading to the lubrication point.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.6
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
10 of 21
Examples of safeguarding methods

Fixed or barrier guard
Moveable guard with interlock switch
Two hand controls

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Infrared light curtains
Pressure sensitive safety mats
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
11 of 21

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.7
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
12 of 21
Pressure-sensitive edges
Enclosure of open building shaft

Where there is no work platform at a doorway or opening to a building shaft,
workers must be protected from falling into the shaft. The doorway or opening
must be enclosed, signed and tagged and locked out as shown in the figure
below to prevent unauthorized access.
Refer to procedure B008 Energy Isolation LOTO for detailed information
on Energy Isolation LOTO procedures.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.6
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Section: B003
Controlled Document
Page #
13 of 21
Covering openings
Workers must be protected against the hazard of falling into openings and
holes. The section does not specify a minimum or maximum dimension on the
opening or hole if a workers foot could fall through, then the opening or hole
is large enough to present a hazard requiring protection.
Securely attached covering
(a)
(b)
The cover must be securely

attached over the opening or hole
and
The cover must be designed to
support any anticipated load this
includes workers, tools and
materials.
Temporary covering

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
14 of 21
Guardrails and toe boards
Guardrail specifications

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
15 of 21
Examples of acceptable guardrails
Wire mesh used as mid-rail

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.7
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
16 of 21
Machine failure
Where you have identified a hazard of machine failure that could result in the
machine breaking apart and throwing out debris that might injure a worker,
some form of adequate restraining or containing safeguard is required. For
example, the figure below shows a cage used to restrain split rim wheel
assemblies while being serviced.
Cage to restrain split rim wheel assemblies

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.8
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Section: B003
Controlled Document
Page #
17 of 21
Protection from falling objects

This section covers the use of alternate type of falling object overhead protection
based on the extent to which workers are in the hazardous area. The table below
shows the options available.
Options for falling object protection
Workers that are likely to be in the hazardous

area as part of their regular duties?
I.e. frequently and normally
Yes
No
Overhead protection e.g.

canopies, awnings, nets,
etc. must be provided that
can withstand the shock or
impact loads from objects
that may fall onto it.
Place appropriate and

adequate warning signs,
horns, flashing lights, or
similar devices to warn
workers
Are workers likely to pass

through the hazardous area as
part of their regular duties?
I.e. to access other areas of the
workplace
OR
Overhead protection e.g.

canopies, awnings, nets, etc.
must be provided that can
withstand the shock or
impact loads from objects
that may fall onto it.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.9
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
18 of 21
Alternate approaches to providing overhead protection
Push stick or block

This section is intended to protect workers from hazards inherent in the operation
of equipment such as powered carpentry, wood milling or metal milling
machinery. Push sticks and push blocks control the work piece, significantly
reducing the possibility of the workers hands contacting the cutting devices.
Example of push stick
6.10
Example of push block
Safety nets
The term safety net includes both personnel and debris nets. Personnel nets
are designed to safely catch workers who fall from a height; debris nets are
designed to catch small, lightweight debris, tools, building materials, and
other materials that might be dropped, pushed, knocked off or blown from a
structure
The mesh size of debris nets depends on the application. These nets are
available in many sizes and strengths depending on the size and weight of
the debris to be contained. Safety nets for debris can provide overhead

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
19 of 21
protection in cases where workers are required to work beneath an area

exposed to falling debris.
ANSI Standard A10.11-1989 (R1998), Construction and Demolition
Operations Personnel and Debris Nets. Establishes safety requirements
for the selection, installation, and use of personnel and debris nets during
construction, repair, and demolition operations. The standard allows nets to
be made of natural e.g. manila, sisal, hemp, etc. or synthetic fibres.
Procedures to be used by manufacturers during the testing of their
products for compliance with the standard are also described.
To meet the requirements of the Standard, personnel nets must be
permanently labelled with the following information:
(a) name of manufacturer;
(b) identification of net material;
(c) date of manufacture;
(d) date of prototype test;
(e) name of testing agency; and
(f) serial number.
The Standard does not require debris nets to be labelled
Example of safety net in use

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
6.11
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
20 of 21
Flagging and Tagging

Wherever and whenever there exists, in an area, a hazard for which
workers are not otherwise protected, access to that particular area will be
restricted via the use of flagging. Such hazards shall include but not
limited to the following.
o A danger to workers due to falling objects.
o An ongoing hazardous operation e.g. x-rays.
o A hazardous condition e.g. high pressure steam leak.
Only four (4) types of flagging shall be used.
o Danger Do Not Enter - Red with black lettering.
o Caution- Yellow with black lettering.
o Radiation-Do Not Enter flagging with a hanging triangular
Danger Radiation complete with symbol attached.
o Asbestos White flagging with Danger, Asbestos, in addition to
signage with Cancer and lung disease hazard, Authorized
personnel only, Respirators and protective clothing required in
this area.
Flagging will be used to restrict an area, immediately when a hazard has
been determined to exist within that area.
All flagging will be identified by means of a Flagging Tag stating name of
person installing the flagging and the reason.
Flagging will be removed after it has been determined that a hazard within
the restricted area no longer exists.
A restricted area will be restricted on all sides. All access and egress
areas, including stairways, building doorways and ladders to that area
shall be restricted.
Only authorized persons will be permitted within the confines of an area
which has been restricted via the use of the Danger Do Not enter or
Radiation Do Not enter flagging or Danger Asbestos flagging.
Authorized: Those persons directly involved in and necessary to
execute the work which may be ongoing in the restricted area and have
reviewed and signed on to the Field Level Hazard Assessment.
All personnel within the confines of an area which has been restricted via
the use of Danger Do Not Enter flagging will be appropriately protected
against hazard(s) within the restricted area.
Whenever and wherever there exists in an area, a hazard of such a
degree that workers should be warned of, but not necessarily restricted
from access to that area will be restricted via the use of the yellow
Caution flagging.

Safeguards
Title:
Effective Date:
January 19, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B003
Page #
21 of 21
Access to an area which has been restricted via the use of the yellow
flagging may be permitted when one or more of the following have been
met:
o It is necessary for a worker to be within the confines of that area.
o The all clear has been given by a designated Safety Watch person
for that area and / or
o At all times the workers about to enter the area are aware of and
adequately protected from the hazard(s) within the restricted area.
Conditions which may warrant the use of the yellow Caution flagging
include but may not be limited to the following:
o Slippery conditions
o Intermittent lifting (personnel are not permitted in the area during an
actual lift)
o Chemicals in the area.
o Tripping hazards.

Title:
Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)
Effective Date: April 20, 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
1 of 8

Title:
Revision # 0
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
2 of 8
DESCRIPTION

Title:

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
3 of 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................6

Title:
1.0

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
4 of 8
INTRODUCTION
Hydrogen sulphide gas is one of the most deadly occupational hazards. It goes
by the names: H2S, sour gas, sewer gas, stink damp and sulfuretted hydrogen.
Workers in our industry must be aware of its deadly properties.
BE ALERT! TAKE EVERY PRECAUTION
2.0
PURPOSE
To alert workers to the dangers involved in working where H2S may be present
and to provide guidance for controlling the hazards.
3.0
SCOPE
Additional procedures that apply to Hydrogen Sulphide.
A024 Hazard Assessments and Controls
B020 Personal Protective Equipment
4.0
DEFINITIONS
Hydrogen Sulphide or (Hydrogen sulfide) is a colorless, flammable gas with a
characteristic odor of rotten eggs. It is produced naturally and as a result of
human activity.
Hydrogen sulphide is extremely toxic. Workers are exposed when they inhale
hydrogen sulphide in air, and this toxic gas is quickly absorbed by the lungs. It is
believed that exposure to hydrogen sulphide prevents the brain from using
oxygen by inhibiting the enzyme cytochrome oxidase.
Short-term (acute) exposure to hydrogen sulphide can cause irritation to the
nose, throat, eyes and lungs. Exposure to higher concentrations can cause very
serious health effects, and even death

Title:
5.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
5 of 8
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
President/Vice President
Ensure resources are available for H2S Alive training.
Insist on compliance to this procedure/code of practice.
5.2
Project Manager
Participate in the Workplace Hazard Assessment as per A024-Hazard
Assessments and Controls
Take steps to eliminate or control the hazards from H2S, if this is
reasonably practicable.
Know and inform workers about the company policy on H2S.
Ensure appropriate PPE is available for the tasks to be performed.
Ensure all employees required to work in an area deemed hazardous
due to H2S have a valid H2S Alive certification prior to accessing the
hazardous are.
5.3

Review and update this procedure/code of practice as required.
Ensure compliance to federal and provincial rules and regulations.
Track employee H2S Alive training through the safety training
database.
5.4
Superintendent
Know and inform workers about the company policy on H2S.
Know the Safe Job Procedures and include them in instructions when
teaching job methods.
Identify unsafe conditions and actions
Take IMMEDIATE and appropriate action when H2S is suspected or
detected.
Ensure workers are competent to perform tasks in an H2S environment
or are under the direct supervision of a person who is competent.
Ensure workers have appropriate first aid training.
Assume the responsibilities of the Project HS&E Advisor when he or
she is not present or assigned to the project.
5.5
Project HS&E Advisor

Monitor and ensure compliance to this procedure
detected.

Title:
6.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
6 of 8
5.6
Foreman
Conduct sessions to inform workers of this procedure/code of practice
and the applicable safe job procedures prior to commencement of
work.
Identify unsafe conditions and actions
detected.
Ensure workers are competent to perform tasks in an H2S environment
or are under the direct supervision of a person who is competent.
Ensure that the personal protective equipment used by the worker
does not endanger their health and safety.
5.7
Workers
When workers must wear personal protective equipment, they must
use the appropriate equipment and they must not use personal
protective equipment that is not in a condition to perform the function
for which it was designed. See B009-Personal Protective Equipment,
6.2 Respiratory Protection.
Workers with equipment under their control that does not comply with
the OHS Code must remove that equipment from service.
Must be familiar with this procedure/code of practice and the safe job
procedures for the tasks they are to perform.
Participate in the training programs provided.
PROCEDURE
6.1
Hazard Assessments
Many of the clients that this company provides services to have processes
that involve H2S. As per A024 Hazard Assessment and Controls, a
workplace hazard assessment will be conducted to assess all
worksites/jobs/tasks to identify existing or potential hazards before work
begins and will describe how hazards will be eliminated or controlled. The
presence of or potential for H2S at the workplace will be communicated to
the workers and include signage in the affected areas.
Potential sources of H2S include: (list not all inclusive)
Gas plants, refineries
Petro-chemical plants
Sulfur recovery plants
Underground mines
Tank cars, tank trucks
Oil and gas wells, battery stations

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
7 of 8
Septic tanks, sewers

Commercial Laboratories
Pulp and paper mills
Pipelines
Steam assisted gravity drainage (SAGD)
6.2
Exposure
At no time will an employee exceed the occupational exposure limit
(OEL) of 10 ppm H2S during and 8 hour period.
At no time will an employee be exposed to H2S of 15 ppm or
greater without the appropriate respiratory protective equipment.
See A020 Personal Protective Equipment for the selection and use
of the appropriate respiratory protective equipment.
6.3
Training
All employees working in an area where H2S is present or has the
potential to be present will be trained in:
H2S Alive and possess a current and valid certification.
Rescue procedures utilizing Self Contained Breathing Air (SCBA)
and Remote Supplied Breathing Air (RSBA) which is provided
through the H2S Alive.
Safe Job Procedure specific to the task to be performed.
6.4
Detection of H2S
Hydrogen Sulphide in low concentrations is easily recognizable by its
characteristic foul odor similar to rotten eggs. However, continued
exposure or exposure to concentrations over 100 ppm will temporarily
eliminate ones ability to smell the gas. The effect usually misleads the
worker into thinking the danger has passed; often with tragic results.
WARNING
Your cannot rely on your nose to tell you
How much H2S is present!
Wear your respiratory protection.
To determine the presence of H2S in your work area, one of the following
means of detection should be used:
Continuous Monitors In larger plants, a system is used where
potentially hazardous areas are sampled by strategically located
sensors. An alarm system is activated by any sensor and will give
warning when the H2S concentration rises above preset limits for
the area sampled.

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B004
Page #
8 of 8
Personal Monitors- Battery worn H2S monitors can be carried or

worn by individual workers to indicate the concentration of H2S to
which they are being exposed.
Familiarize yourself with the detection equipment at your work site.
Learn its proper operation. Maintain and operate it according to the
manufacturers specifications. YOUR LIFE MAY DEPEND ON IT!
6.5
Hydrogen Sulphide Emergency Response

1. Evacuate
Get to a safe area immediately
Move upwind if release is downwind of you
Move crosswind if release is upwind of you
Move to higher ground if possible.
2. Alarm
Call for help (Man Down), sound bell, horn, and whistle or call
by radio.
3. Assess
Do a head count
Consider other hazards
4. Protect
Put on breathing apparatus before attempting rescue
5. Rescue
Remove victim to a safe area
6. Revive
Apply rescue breathing if necessary
7. Medical Aid
Arrange transport of victim to medical aid
Provide information to Emergency Medical Services (EMS)

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
1 of 24
Issued: September 21, 2006

Title:
Effective Date:

June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
REV No.
1
AFFECTED PAGE(S)
Page 10-6.6.1
Jan 8, 2007
1
1
1
1
1
Page 11- 6.1.2

Page 11- 6.2
Page 12- 6.3
Page 14- table
Page 18- 7.2
Jan 8, 2007
Jan 8, 2007
Jan 8, 2007
Jan 8, 2007
Jan 8, 2007
1
1
Page 21- 7.8

Attachment
Form B005-2
Page 8 4.5
Page 23 8.0
Page 17 7.1
Page 18 7.2
Page 19 7.4
Page 20 -7.5
Page 20 7.6
Page 9 5.4
Page 22- 7.8
Page 5, 10,11- 4.1,
6.1.4
Page 13, 14 - 6.4, 6.5
9
Jan 8, 2007
Jan 8, 2007
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
DATE
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
June 1, 2009
Nov-13
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
2 of 24
DESCRIPTION
Fall arrest replaced travel restraint
and restriction on lanyard length.
Remove travel restraint.
Third bullet, three point contact.
Flat roof to include 4 degree slope
Add Per Worker
Lanyard made of conductive
material.
Eight bullet, HLL inspections
Harness-Preventative Maintenance
Inspection Form
General protection
Training requirements
New standards
New Standard
New standard
New standard
New Standard
Inspection and Maintenance
New Standard
Changed to Personnel Basket
22.2 Kilonewtons to 16 Kilonewtons
Add Rescue plan to be developed

Title:
Effective Date:

June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
3 of 24
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................5
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................9
7.0
FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT ........................................................................... 16
8.0
TRAINING .................................................................................................................22
ELEVATED WORK RESCUE PLAN .................................................................................. 23

HARNESS PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION FORM .............................. 24

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
4 of 24
INTRODUCTION
Falls are one of the leading causes of serious injuries. Working at elevations can
place workers in danger of falls when proper precautions are not in place. In
order to minimize the risk, all workers must understand and comply with
procedures for working at elevations, or in areas where falls to another elevation
could occur, i.e. falling into an excavation or trench, etc.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
Identify the minimum height when fall protection is required.
2.2
Identify known areas where fall protection is required.
2.3
Identify the minimum standards for fall protection equipment.
2.4
Identify the minimum standards for use, inspections and maintenance of

fall protection equipment.
2.5
Identify the minimum standards for working from elevated work platforms.
2.6
Identify the minimum standards for working from portable ladders.
2.7
Identify the minimum standards for working in a control zone.
2.8
Identify the minimum standards for working with a travel restraint system.
2.9
Identify the minimum standards for working with a fall arrest system.
2.10
Identify the minimum standards for working with guard rails.
2.11
Identify the minimum standards for working with a procedure based fall
protection system.
2.12
Identify rescue procedures and plans
2.13
Identify training requirements.
SCOPE
3.1

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
5 of 24
3.2
Rescue personnel involved in training or performing rescues are out of the

scope of this procedure.
3.3
At fall heights of 1.8 meters (6ft.) or more (or at a lesser height if there is
an unusual possibility of injury), workers are required to use a fall
protection system regardless of whether the work area is a temporary or
permanent work area. At fall heights of 1.2 meters (4ft.) or less, this
procedure does not require the use of fall protection systems unless there
is an unusual possibility of injury.
Warning: 100% Fall Protection is Required at All Times
Additional procedures that may apply:
Cranes, Hoists and Rigging.
Scaffolding.
Ladders.
4.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
4.2
Elevated Work
Where a worker is at risk of a vertical fall of 1.8 meters / (6 feet), or

greater.
When a worker is working over any moving or rotating equipment or

other hazard regardless of fall distance (i.e. rebar, water etc.).
Working in or from approved Aerial Work Platforms (i.e. boom lift,

scissor lift etc.).
Working from ladders or other unguarded work platforms (i.e.

scaffold).
Working from a crane personnel basket, swing stage or spider etc.
Fall Protection
Guarded Protected by a handrail (top and mid rails) or solid platform

below elevated work area or secured mesh netting.
Fall Restraint Designed to restrict or contain a workers movement to
a safe distance or area from a fall hazard (i.e. working on the roof).

Title:
Section: B005
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 24
Fall Restraint
4.3
Fall Arrest Designed to protect workers in a vertical fall.
Permanent Work Area - The word permanent describes the nature of

the work being performed, not whether the work area is a temporary or
permanent structure. In a permanent work area the worker performs the
task frequently and is subject to the fall protection requirements applicable
to permanent work areas, which is a fall protection system when above
1.2 meters or 4 feet.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.4
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
7 of 24
Temporary Work Area - The word temporary describes the nature of

the work being performed, not whether the work area is a temporary or
permanent structure. In a temporary work area the worker performs the
task infrequently and is subject to the fall protection requirements
applicable to temporary work areas, which is a fall protection system when
above 1.8 meters or 6 feet.
Note: Any work area at a construction site is considered to be a
temporary work area.
4.5
Unusual Possibility of Injury - May include situations involving work

performed above moving water, operating machinery, open vessels, into
or onto a hazardous substance or object, or through an opening in a work
surface, extremely hot or cold surfaces, etc. There is an unusual
possibility of injury if the injury may be worse than an injury from landing
on a solid, flat surface.
4.6
Leading Edge - A leading edge is the edge of a floor, roof, or formwork

for a floor or deck or other walking or working surface that changes
location as additional sections are placed, formed or built.
4.7
Lanyard Safety line between the harness and the anchor point.
4.8
Harness Device that straps over the shoulders, chest and around the
workers upper legs, having variable attachment points and is designed to
direct impact forces to appropriate parts of the body and distribute these
forces over a large area of the body should a fall occur.
4.9
Personal Fall Arrest System The use of a harness, lanyard and or

variable attachment equipment and anchor point, in combination to arrest
a vertical fall.
4.10
Anchoring Point The point on a structure where the fall arrest or fall
restraint system is attached and is capable of withstanding the required
static force.
4.11
Self-Retracting Devices (SRD) Device that allows retracting and

extending from an anchor point.
4.12
Aerial Work Platform (AWP) (i.e. Boom lifts or Scissor lift, etc.).

Title:
Effective Date:
5.0
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
8 of 24
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
5.2
Superintendent
5.3
Purchase only approved fall protection equipment identified within this

procedure.
Maintain a minimum number of harness and lanyards on site to ensure
worker access.
Ensure condition inspections are conducted prior to issue of any fall
protection to workers and upon return of fall protection systems.
Maintain records of all SRD inspections and certifications.
Ensure workers are protected from falls and enforce compliance.
Evaluate all work activities to determine where fall protection is
required.
Ensure all workers who must wear fall protection are trained in its
proper use.
Ensure workers are aware of where and how to obtain fall protection
equipment.
Ensure a rescue plan is in place for any elevated work.
5.4
Ensure that appropriate fall protection is available and used.

Ensure that site supervision is aware of their responsibilities and is in
compliance to this procedure.
Reviews and approves procedure based fall protection systems.

Provide training in the use, care and inspection of personal fall
protection.
Approves all elevated work that does not meet the requirements of this
procedure.
Employees Working at Elevations
Shall be trained in worker fall protection.

Shall follow all fall protection procedures.
Shall inspect the equipment and hardware before each use.
Shall limit the vertical distance of a fall but still permit the unimpeded
performance of the workers duties,

Title:
Effective Date:
6.0
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
9 of 24
Report all damaged equipment to their supervisor, tag and remove

from service.
Report any incident involving a fall to their supervisor.
Ensure a rescue plan is developed before workers use a fall arrest
system at the worksite.
Will conduct a Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA).
Ensuring that his or her personal fall arrest system or travel restraint
system is securely attached to an anchor point or plate.
PROCEDURE
6.1
Elevated Work Platforms

6.1.1 Aerial Work Platforms
Workers, working from boom-supported aerial platforms and
personnel carrying baskets used on bucket trucks must be
protected against falling. Ejection from the platform or basket is
one of the leading causes of injury associated with boom lifts.
Fall Arrest systems will be utilized to prevent workers from reaching
an edge from which they may fall. The lanyard shall be short
enough to prevent the worker from being ejected from the platform
but long enough to allow the worker to perform his or her work.
Scissor lifts and similar vertical aerial platforms are generally more
stable than a work platform supported by a boom. With vertical lifts
such as scissor lifts a worker need not use a travel restraint or fall
arrest system if the equipment is operated on a firm, substantially
level surface with all the manufacturers guardrails and chains in
place. However, if the manufacturers specifications require the
use of travel restraint or fall arrest systems when the vertical aerial
platform is being used, then the manufactures specifications take
precedence and must be followed. If the workers movements can
not be adequately restricted in all direction by a travel restraint
system, the worker must use a personal fall arrest system and the
lanyard must be short enough to prevent the worker from falling out
off the platform or being ejected from it. Review site specific rules
as they may require the use of a fall protection system.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
10 of 24
6.1.2 Fork Mounted Work Platforms

A fork mounted work platform intended to support a worker is to be
equipped with guardrails and toe boards. If the platform is 1.8
meters (6 feet) or more above the ground the guard rail system
provides the required worker fall protection. However, if a portion
of the guardrail system is removed while above 1.8 meters (6 feet)
the worker must use a fall arrest system.
6.1.3 Swing Stages and Spiders
A worker, working from a swing stage or spider will be protected
from falling by using a fall arrest system such as a vertical lifeline
and rope grab combination or a self-retracting lifeline. The fall
arrest system will be attached to an anchor point which is
independent of the anchor points utilized to suspend the swing
stage or spider.
6.1.4 Personnel Basket
A secondary personnel basket support will be attached between the
suspended personnel basket and the hoist line above the hook
assembly and each worker within the personnel basket will wear a
full body harness with the lanyard attached to the personnel basket.
The secondary personnel basket support, becomes a component of
the fall arrest system and must be kept as short as possible to limit
the workers fall distance and resulting force of arresting a fall.
6.2
Portable Ladders
Workers are permitted to work from a ladder without using a fall arrest
system in situations where the use of a fall arrest system is not
practicable. This allowance is subject to several conditions:
the work must be a light duty task where the duration of work at each
spot where the ladder is set is less than 15 minutes;
while doing the task, the worker must keep his or her centre of gravity
between the side rails of the ladder; and
the worker maintains three-point contact whenever the worker extends
an arm beyond a side rail.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
11 of 24
If any one of these three conditions cannot be met, a form of fall protection
is required.
Note: For more information on ladder safety, refer to the procedure on
ladders.
6.3
Control Zones
The use of a control zone is an approach to fall prevention that can be

utilized when work is being performed on a level surface or a surface with
no more than a 4 degree slope towards an unguarded edge.
If a raised barrier is in place, 2 meters (6.5 feet) from the unguarded

edge, fall protection will be required within the 2 meter (6.5 feet)
perimeter and no fall protection will be required inside the barrier.
If no raised barrier is in place, fall protection is required when working

within 4 meters (13 feet) of the unguarded edge.
Work Away From Unguarded Edge
Situations may arise where, on a large flat roof for example, work is
performed at a significant distance (more than 4 meters or 13 feet) away

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
12 of 24
from an unguarded edge. With the exception of when workers enter or

leave the work area at an unguarded edge, workers have no contact with
the edge. Upon accessing the roof, workers must proceed directly to their
work area. Under such circumstances, a line defining a control zone is
unnecessary, as are the remaining requirements for fall protection that
would normally apply at the unguarded edge.
Line Defining the Control Zone
A raised warning line or other equally effective means such as barricades

will be placed 2 meters (6.5 feet) from the edge to provide a visual and
physical reminder of the presence of the hazard.
For compliance purposes, a raised warning line can consist of ropes,
wires or chains, and supporting stanchions, and must be
o flagged or marked with highly visible materials at intervals that do
not exceed 2 meters (6.5 feet),
o rigged and supported so that the lowest point (including sag) is not
less than 0.9 meters (36 inches) from the walking or working
surface and its highest point is not more than 1.2 meters (48
inches) from the walking or working surface,
o attached to each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one
section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being
taken up in the adjacent section before the stanchion tips over, and
o the rope, wire or chain must have a minimum tensile strength of 2.2
kilonewtons (500 pounds-force).
An equally effective method may be a substantial barrier such as piled
materials and supplies, or building system pipe or ducts that are
positioned between the worker and the unguarded edge. Since this
substantial barrier is serving as a guardrail it must be at least 920
millimeters (36 inches) tall.
Note: A control zone cannot be used if the level working surface on which
work is being performed is less than 4 meters (13 feet) wide. In such
circumstances, another method of fall protection will be required.
6.4
Travel Restraint System

A travel restraint system is designed and used to prevent a worker from
entering a position or location where there is a potential to fall. Its design
and purpose is not to arrest a fall but to prevent it. It may utilize a full body

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
13 of 24
harness, lanyard and anchor point like a fall arrest system but the anchor
point load-carrying capacity may be much less than that of a fall arrest
system and should be used when guardrails cannot provide sufficient
protection
Summary of travel restraint system load capacities

Load-carrying
Circumstances
Capacity Per Worker
3.5 kilonewtons
Temporary anchor for travel restraint systems
(800 pounds-force)
16 kilonewtons
Permanent anchor for travel restraint systems
(3,600 pounds-force)
Warning:
To prevent a worker from confusing a fall restraint anchor with an
anchor intended for fall arrest, the temporary anchor must be
permanently marked as being for travel restraint only and
removed upon completion of the project.
6.5
Self-retracting lifelines must not be used in a travel restraint

system unless the length of the life line on the drum of the unit
prevents the worker from reaching the edge from which he or she
could fall.
Fall Arrest System

A fall arrest system is designed and utilized to arrest a workers vertical
fall. It will consist of a worker wearing a full body harness attached
through various systems to an approved fall arrest anchor.
The maximum free fall limits for fall arrest systems are 1.2 meters (4 feet)
without a shock absorber and 1.8 meters (6 feet) with a shock absorber.
Whenever possible, a shock absorber will be used for fall arrest. The only
fall arrest system in which a shock absorber is not desired is one in which
the added fall distance 1.2 meters (4 feet) created by the shock absorber
fully extended creates a greater risk of injury than if the shock absorber
were not used.
The maximum arresting force to which a worker can be exposed during a
fall arrest is limited to 8 kilonewtons (1800 pounds-force). A fall arrest
system that correctly uses a shock absorber will limit the maximum
arresting force to 4 kilonewtons (900 pounds-force).

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
14 of 24
Anchor points used for attachment of a personal fall arrest system must be
capable of:
supporting a load of at least 16 Kilonewtons (3,600 pounds-force) per

worker attached, in any direction required to resist a fall, or
if the structure to which the anchor point is attached is not capable of
withstanding this 16 Kilonewtons (3,600 pounds-force) without
damage, then a lower strength is acceptable as long as the system
maintains a safety factor of 2 (i.e. capable of withstanding twice the
maximum dynamic arresting force per attached worker).
Having all anchors comply with the 16 kilonewtons (3,600 pounds-force)

per attached worker option is the preferred choice as it provides a greater
factor of safety than the second option and there is no confusion as to the
strength of the anchor. The second option requires that the anchor point
be part of an engineered system.
When using the 2:1 safety factor option the company must be able to
demonstrate that the safety factor approach has been certified by a
professional engineer.
6.6
Guard Rails
A guard rails shall be utilized for fall protection whenever practicable and
will:
have a horizontal top member installed between 920 millimeters (36

inches) and 1070 millimeters (42 inches) above the base of the
guardrail or work surface that the guard rail is attached to,
have a horizontal intermediate member spaced mid-way between the
top member and the base, and
vertical members at both ends of the horizontal members with
intermediate vertical supports that are not more than 3 meters (10 feet)
apart at their centers.
With temporary guardrails, the intermediate horizontal member can be

replaced with a substantial barrier such as wire mesh or a solid panel that,
when positioned and secured between the top member, toe board, and
vertical members, will prevent a worker from falling through the space.
A guardrail must be strong enough to be capable of withstanding a force
of at least 890 newtons (200 pounds-force) applied within 5 centimeters
(2 inches) of the top edge in any outward or downward direction. The

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
15 of 24
guardrail can bend but must not break or separate from the structure to
which it is attached.
The cross braises on scaffolds are not an acceptable alternative to
guardrails as a means of protecting workers from falling. Guard rails on a
scaffold must meet the requirements of this procedure.
6.7
Procedure Based Fall Protection Systems

This Worker Fall Protection Procedure recognizes that in a very limited
number of circumstances, it is impracticable or impossible to provide or
use one of the fall protection systems listed in this procedure. An option is
to utilize a procedure based fall protection system which can be used in
the following situations:
installation or removal of fall protection equipment (first person up/last

person down) typical examples may involve installing a fall arrest
anchor at the peak of a roof, installing a perimeter guardrail system on
a flat roof, installing a portable fall arrest post at height, etc.;
roof inspection or estimating applies to both flat and sloped roofs;
and
emergency repairs this does not include normal maintenance and
service tasks. Emergency repairs must involve light duty tasks of
limited duration.
If a procedure based fall protection system is to be utilized, all of the

following conditions must be met:
A written hazard assessment specific to the work site and work being
performed must be completed.
The procedures to be followed by workers while performing the work
must be in writing and available to workers before the work begins.
Workers must understand the activity they are about to undertake.
If the use of standard fall protection systems are practicable, they must
be used e.g. if anchor points are available or a fall protection system
can be rigged without exposing workers to a greater hazard, then a fall
protection system must be used.
The work must be carried out in such a way that minimizes the number
of workers exposed to the fall hazard while work is performed.
Use of a procedure based system must not expose a worker to undue
harm, such as having a worker free climb a severely sloped metal clad
roof to install an anchor point or exposing a worker to hazards due to
environmental conditions such as high winds, icy footing, etc.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
16 of 24
The work must be limited to light duty tasks of limited duration.

o The work done must be less than approximately 15 minutes in
duration; and
o While doing the task, the worker will not turn his or her back to the
edge and must keep the edge in sight.
If either of these conditions cannot be met, a procedure based system
cannot be used.
The worker performing the work must be competent to do so.
If the procedure based approach is used for inspection, investigation or
assessment, it would be before or after the actual construction. During
construction, the inspectors or investigators will utilize the same fall
protection systems as the workers.
Prior to the utilization of a procedure based fall protection system the
hazard assessment and the written procedure will be reviewed and
approved by the Corporate HS&E Manager and the client.
Warning: The option of using a procedure based fall protection

system is not intended to allow our company or our workers to avoid
using a fall protection system or some type of elevated work
platform just because doing so may be inconvenient or take more
time than using a procedure based fall protection system.
7.0
FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

7.1
Full Body Harness
Full body harnesses are the only harnesses allowed.

Only CSA approved harnesses, bearing the mark of CSA, Ul, SEI, etc.,
indicating that the harness has met the requirements of the CSA
standard will be purchased or used. Harnesses manufactured on or
after July 1, 2009 must be approved to
o CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z259.10-06 (full Body Harnesses)
o ANSI/ASSE Standard Z359.1-2007 (Safety requirements for
personal fall arrest systems, subsystems and components,
or
o CEN Standard EN 361: 2007, (Personal protective
equipment against falls from a height Full body harnesses.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
17 of 24
Warning: The use of a chest harness without leg straps, a sit

harness having only leg and waist straps or a safety belt are
prohibited.
7.2
Lanyards
Only lanyards approved to CSA Standards are acceptable. A lanyard

used for fall arrest will be equipped with a shock absorber. Lanyards
manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 must be approved to
o CSA Standard Z259.11-05, (energy absorbers and
lanyards,)
o ANSI/ASSE Standard Z359.1-2007, (Safety requirements
for personal fall arrest systems, subsystems and
components,) or,
o CEN Standard EN 354002, (Personal protective
equipment against falls from a height - Lanyards
A wire-rope lanyard must be used in any situation that involves
welding, cutting with a torch or other similar operations. Synthetic fibre
lanyards can be cut, burned, melted or otherwise damaged during
such operations.
If working near an energized conductor or in a work area where a
lanyard made of conductive material cannot be used safety, the worker
will use another effective means of fall protection.
To achieve 100% fall protection, dual leg lanyards with a shock
absorber will be routinely utilized.
The lanyard length must be as short as possible for the work involved,
yet allow reasonable maneuverability and working convenience. When
in use, all lanyards, whatever their length, must not allow a worker to
drop more that the specified free fall distances.
Lanyards and safety straps (anchor slings) must not be daisy chained
to extend the distance that a worker can move.
Warning: Workers must try to secure their lanyard or safety strap to

an anchor point no lower than their shoulder height, but preferably
as high above their heads as possible.
7.3
Shock Absorbers
Only shock absorbers and shock absorbing lanyards approved to CSA

standards are acceptable.
Shock absorbers serve three main functions:
o to reduce the maximum arresting force on the workers body
during arrest of the fall;

Title:
Effective Date:
7.4
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
18 of 24
o lessen or prevent damage to other components of the fall

arrest system; and
o to lower the force acting on the fall arrest anchor.
The maximum arresting force is limited primarily through elongation of
the shock absorber. The user or designer of a fall arrest system
incorporating a shock absorber must, therefore, consider the increase
in the total fall distance due to extension of the shock absorber. Shock
absorbers manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 must meet
o CSA Standard 259.11.05, (Energy-absorbers and lanyards)
o ANSI/ASSE Standard Z359.1-2007, (Safety requirements for
personal fall arrest systems, subsystems and components,)
or
o CEN Standard EN 355:2002, (Personal protective equipment
against fall from a height-Energy absorbers)
Connecting Hardware
Carabiners, D-rings, O-rings, oval rings, self-locking connectors and

snap hooks used to interconnect the components of a personal fall
arrest system are subjected to the full maximum arresting force
developed during a fall.
These items must meet the CSA standards for connecting components
for personal fall arrest systems.
Approximately 95 percent of the carabiners used in the industry are
actually mountaineering equipment. Self-closing and self-locking
carabiners bearing a CE (Conformite Europenne) mark will be
considered acceptable for use for the purpose of this procedure.
Only snap hooks and carabiners that are self-closing and self locking
can be used as interconnecting hardware in fall arrest systems. For
these connecting components to be acceptable for use, their gates
require at least two consecutive, deliberate actions to open and
marked with its breaking strength in the major axis and the name or
trademark of the manufacturer.
Components of a fall arrest system consisting of carabiners, D-rings,
O-rings, oval rings, self-locking connectors and snap hooks
manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 must be approved to
o CSA
Standard
Z259.12-01
(R2006),
connecting
Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems (PFAS)
o ANSI/ASSE Standard Z359.1-2007, Safety requirements for
personal fall arrest systems , subsystems and components
o CEN Standard EN 362:2004, Personal protective equipment
against falls from a height-Connectors

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
19 of 24
o CEN Standard 12275: 1998, Mountaineering equipmentConnectors Safety requirements and test methods
Warning:
Screw gate carabiners that rely on the user to twist a collar
across the gate opening cannot be used in personal fall
protection systems.
Aluminum carabiners will not be connected directly to wire rope
and slid along the ropes length as the aluminum wears and the
carabiner loses strength.
7.5
Fall Arresters
7.6
Only fall arresters approved to CSA standards are acceptable.

Fall arresters, commonly referred to as rope grabs or cable grabs, are
used when workers need to move vertically, normally over substantial
distances.
Fall arresters are divided into different classes with different
mechanical functions, applications, allowable total arrest distances and
attachment points on the full body harness. Workers must be trained
in the application and limitations of the particular fall arrester they are
utilizing.
Fall arresters manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 must be approved
to
o CSA Standard z259.2.1-98 (R2004), Fall Arresters, Vertical
Lifelines, and rails
o ANSI/ASSE Standard Z359.1-2007, Safety requirements for
personal fall arrest systems, subsystems and components,
or
o CEN Standard EN 353-2:2002, Personal protective
equipment against falls from a height-Part 2: Guided type fall
arrestors including a flexible anchor line.
Self-Retracting Devices (SRD)
Will bear the mark or label of a nationally accredited testing

organization such as CSA, UL, SEI, etc. as evident that it meets the
requirements of the CSA standard.
Are equipped with a velocity sensing device that will engages a brake
or locking device to arrest a workers fall when the cable or webbing is
deployed at 1.5 meters per second (5 feet per second).
Depending on the style and type, may be equipped with an internal
shock absorbing mechanism that works with the brake to minimize

Title:
Effective Date:
7.7
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
20 of 24
impact forces. If not so equipped, an external shock absorber will be

used.
Units equipped with the internal shock absorbing mechanism will have
a visual load indicator to indicate if the device has arrested a fall. This
must be inspected prior to utilizing the SRD.
Workers will field test the locking feature prior to use by pulling down
on the line quickly and forcefully.
If the device does not lock when tested, has been involved in a fall
arrest or has the visual load indicator activated, it will be removed from
service, tagged DANGER DO NOT USE and not used again until
certified.
Only the manufacturer is capable of disassembling, refurbishing and
re-certifying a SRD.
To minimize free fall distance when using a SRD, the device must be
anchored above the workers work location and there can not be slack
in the lifeline.
A self- retracting device manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 and
used with a personal fall arrest system must be approved to
o CSA Standard Z259.2.2-98 (R2004), Self- Retracting
Devises for personal fall-arrest Systems,
o Anchored above the workers head unless the
manufacturers specification allow the use of a different
location and
o Used in a manner that minimizes the hazards of swinging
and limits the swing drop distance to 1.2 meters is a worker
falls.
Vertical Lifelines
Each lifeline must be secured to its own, independent anchor point.

Must have a nominal breaking load of at least 27 kilonewtons (6070
pounds-force) if made of synthetic fibres or a maximum tensile strength
of at least 27 kilonewtons (6070 pounds-force) if made of metal wire.
Will be free of knots or splices except for the attachment knot at the top
or the stopper knot at the bottom.
Will extend downwards to within a minimum of 1.2 meters (4 feet) of
the ground or other safe lower surface.
Will have only one worker attached to the line at any time.
Must be protected from any rough or sharp edges.
Must be used and installed in a manner that minimizes the hazards of
swinging if a worker falls.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
21 of 24
Warning: Must be installed by a competent person or under the

supervision of a competent person.
7.8
Horizontal Lifelines (HLL) Flexible and Rigid
Will be installed as per manufacturer instructions or the specifications

of a professional engineer.
Consist of a fixed rail or synthetic or wire rope rigged between two
substantial anchor points which allows for a worker to move
horizontally while safely secured to a fall protection system.
Each anchor of a temporary HLL must have an ultimate load capacity
of at least 71 kilonewtons (16,000 pounds-force) or as per
manufacturers specifications.
Will be utilized for spans of not less than 6 meters (20 feet) and not
more than 18 meters (60 feet).
At no time will there be more than 3 people using an individual HLL.
Manufactured on or after July 1, 2009 meet the requirements of
o CSA Standard Z259.13-04, Flexible Horizontal Lifeline
Systems, or
o The applicable requirements of CSA Standard Z259.16-04,
Design of active Fall-Protection systems.
Warning:
Must be installed by a competent person or under the supervision
of a competent person.
Will be comprised of an engineered system from the
manufacturer or designed by a professional engineer.
Before a horizontal lifeline system is used, a professional
engineer, a competent person authorized by the professional
engineer, the manufacturer, or a competent person authorized by
the manufacturer, certifies that the system has been properly
installed according to the manufacturers specifications or the
specifications certified by a professional engineer.

Title:
Effective Date:
8.0
June 1, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B005
Page #
22 of 24
TRAINING
Workers will be trained in fall protection, prior to utilizing fall protection

equipment or working at a location with a potential for a fall.
Workers will be trained to inspect fall protection equipment and shall
conduct equipment inspections prior to each use.
Training will be comprised of
o Review current Alberta legislation pertaining to fall protection.
o An understanding of what a fall protection plan is.
o Fall protection methods a worker is required to use at a work site.
o Identification of fall hazards.
o Assessment and selection of specific anchors the worker may use.
o Instruction for the correct use of connecting hardware.
o The effects of a fall on the human body including, maximum arresting
force, the purpose of a shock and energy absorbers, swing fall, free
fall.
o Pre use inspection
o Emergency response procedures to be used at the work site if
necessary
o Practice in, inspecting, fitting, adjusting and connecting fall protection
systems and components
o Emergency response procedures.
ELEVATED WORK RESCUE PLAN

Date
Time
Location
Evacuation Muster Point
Safework Permit #
Standby contact names trained in first aid & CPR
E.R.P. Numbers
Radio Channel
Communication with workers is by

Location of
Air Horn
Yes
First Aid Kit
Radio
Yes
No
Eye Wash
No
Verbal
Yes
No
Safety Shower
Type of Elevated Work
Rescue Plan/Rescue Equipment

Crane on location with approved man basket
Yes
No
Man lift on location

Yes
No
Aerial Rescue Team Available

Yes
No
Rescue Plan
Access/Egress
Possible change in condition
Special P.P.E. Required
Attendance (Print and Sign)
Controlled Form Reference Number: B005-1
Harness Preventative Maintenance Inspection Form
Harness No:
1st Qtr. (Jan.)
nd
Qtr. (April)
Job No:
3rd Qtr. (July)
Item Description
Dee Rings
Dee Pads
Nylon Webbing
Stitching
Strap Keepers
Grommets
Buckles
Tagging/Labels
CSA Approved
Shock Absorber
Lanyard
Double Locking Hooks
4th Qtr. (Oct.)

N/A
Fail
Pass
Comments:
Inspector:
Date:
Pass - Return To Service
Signature:
Fail - Remove From Service
Signature:

Title:
Welding/Cutting/Grinding
Effective Date:
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
1 of 12

Title:
Effective Date:
Revision # 0
April 5, 2006
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
2 of 12
DESCRIPTION

Title:
Effective Date:
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
3 of 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE .................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS ...........................................................................................................5
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................6
6.0
PROCEDURES .........................................................................................................7

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
4 of 12
INTRODUCTION
Welding, cutting and grinding operations present many hazards to the worker.
These hazards range from inhalation of hazardous fumes, exposure to ultraviolet light, radiant heat, flying particles to fire or explosion. Protecting our
workers and client assets is of paramount importance during these work
activities.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
To ensure the safe application of welding/cutting/grinding operations to

protect workers from injuries and equipment/materials and property from
damage.
2.2
Set the standards for purchasing, use, inspection and basic safety
requirements.
SCOPE
All company facilities, employees, subcontractors, customers and visitors.
REFERENCE: ACSA/OH&S
WARNING
Hot work
Hot work can create an ignition source to cause a fire or explosion. The
following precautions must be implemented before any hot work is started:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Combustibles and/or flammables must be identified and controlled.

Welding, cutting or grinding on equipment/material that was in
operation and contained flammable material must be inspected and
cleaned to ensure flammable materials have been removed.
Special precautions must be used for equipment that has linings, as
flammable products could be trapped inside the lining.
If welding, cutting or grinding is done in a confined space, special
precautions must be followed (refer to the Confined Space Entry
Procedures).
Hot taps are not covered in this procedure and will require a specific
hazard assessment for each hot tap.

Title:
Effective Date:
f.
4.0
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
5 of 12
When working on client sites, the client hot work permit system will
be followed.
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Hot Work Any work involving welding, oxygen/acetylene cutting,

brazing, soldering, heat treating, grinding, powder-actuated tools, hot
riveting, non-approved/rated electrical tools (i.e. Class #1 Div. #1) and all
other similar applications producing a spark, flame or heat.
4.2
General Mechanical Ventilation Building ventilation systems that are of

sufficient capacity and so arranged as to produce the number of air
changes necessary to maintain welding fumes and smoke within safe
limits.
4.3
Local Exhaust Ventilation Movable hoods intended to be placed as

close as practicable to the work. This system shall be of sufficient
capacity and so arranged as to remove fumes and smoke at the source
and keep the concentration of them in the breathing zone within safe
limits.
4.4
Confined Space An enclosed, or partially enclosed space that is not

designed or intended for continuous human occupancy, with a restricted
means of entry or exit and may become hazardous to a worker entering it
because of its design, construction, location or atmosphere, work
activities, materials or substances in it, evacuation, rescue or other
emergency response service is compromised, or of other hazards relating
to it.
4.5
SMAW (Shielded Metal Arc Welding) Stick Welding Electrical

power is supplied to the work at a low voltage and a high current (either
AC or DC); an arc is struck between the rod and the work, which produces
heat that melts both the rod and the material.
4.6
GTAW (Gas Tungsten Arc Welding) TIG TIG welding uses a nonconsumable tungsten or tungsten alloy electrode. Filler metal is added by
hand or by a cold wire feeder. Inert shielding gas (usually Argon) protects
the weld and tungsten.
4.7
GMAW (Gas Metal Arc Welding) MIG Metal inert gas uses an alloy
wire as a combined electrode and filler material. The filler materials are

Title:
Effective Date:
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
6 of 12
added continuously and automatically. This is also known as semiautomatic welding. Inert shielding gas may be used to protect the weld.
4.8
5.0
Oxygen/Acetylene Gas Cutting The high flame temperature required

for oxygen/acetylene cutting processes is obtained by combining oxygen
with a fuel gas to produce temperatures of approximately 2500 to 3000
degrees Farenheit.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Project or Construction Manager/Superintendent
5.2
5.3
Ensure that the tools and equipment are in good condition and made
available to the worker.
Ensure tools and equipment comply with all CSA and OH&S
requirements when purchased.
Provide information on the safe use, inspection and storage of tools
and equipment.
Initiating action to correct unsatisfactory tool/equipment use.

Verify that the workers are qualified and competent to operate the
equipment/machinery.
Ensure work is performed in compliance with this procedure,
manufacturers recommendations, CSA Standards and OH&S
requirements.
Ensure tools are inspected and that inspections are documented.
Ensure tools that are defective are removed from service and tagged.
Worker
Use tools properly and per this procedure.

Inspect tools before each use.
Report any hazard or concerns for condition of tools.
Tag any tool that is defective.
Return tools to tool crib attendant or Supervisor.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.0
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
7 of 12
PROCEDURES
Welding
6.1
General Procedures for all Hot Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Comply with client Hot Work Permit Procedures when required.

Ensure all combustibles and flammables are controlled.
Fire watch must be in place 30 minutes, 1 hour and 2 hours after
Hot Work is completed. 1 hour and 2 hours in high-risk areas.
Fire watch will be trained in fire extinguisher use.
All workers who are required to weld or use acetylene/oxygen
cutting will be trained in fire extinguisher use.
LEL/02 testing may be required when the equipment/materials have
been in flammable service.
Welding or cutting on line equipment (vessels, tanks, etc.) require a
specific safe work procedure.
WARNING
Welding operations can expose the workers to various hazards from
intense heat, inhalation of fumes, dust, radiation, etc., and the potential to
cause fires and explosions. Welders need to understand the dangers and
follow proper procedures to ensure a safe work environment.
Do not fuel welding machine while it is running.
Pressurized butane lighters are prohibited, as they are likely to explode if
sparks or slag come in contact.
Do not stand in water or on damp areas when welding.
6.2
Welding
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform a walk around inspection before starting equipment.

Ensure welder unit is firmly attached to the transportation unit, or
mounting brackets.
Check all fluids to ensure they are at acceptable levels for
operation.
When fueling, DO NOT top off the fuel tank. Fuel expands as the
outside temperature rises. This may result in seepage and
potential fire hazard.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
6.3
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
8 of 12
Ensure the side covers are kept closed to protect equipment from
any damage from external objects, as well as to protect the worker
and others from moving parts.
Ensure cables are not damaged (i.e. exposed wiring) which will
result in an electrical shock.
Ensure there are no loose connections in the cables.
All cable are to be wound up securely when transporting. DO NOT
hang cables on fire extinguisher.
All gasoline or diesel powered welders must have a 20 lb fire
extinguisher mounted and be inspected monthly.
Any repairs shall be done by qualified mechanics or technicians.
All welders will wear appropriate PPE, as identified on their FLHA.
Air purifying respirators will be required in areas where ventilation is
inadequate to remove contaminates.
Do not wear any clothing that is oily. Ensure that pockets and cuffs
are not open as they could catch sparks or hot slag.
Ensure the work area has proper ventilation. NEVER use oxygen
to assist in ventilating work area.
Ensure the welding machine is properly grounded in close proximity
to the work.
Never change the polarity switch when the machine is under load;
wait until the machine is idling.
Do not locate welding machine up wind from other workers that
may be affected by the exhaust fumes emitted from the machine.
Positive air shut offs are required on diesel welders in potentially
flammable or explosive environments.
Utilize welding screens, whenever possible, to protect other
workers.
Cutting (Oxygen/Acetylene)
WARNING
Cutting (Oxygen/Acetylene)
1.
2.
3.
Never store flammable gases in compartments that are not

engineered for proper ventilation (i.e. welding rigs).
Compressed gas cylinders must be secured to prevent falling
or dislodging.
Keep the oxygen/acetylene equipment clean, free from oil and
in good condition.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
9 of 12
Never lubricate valves, couplings, regulators, hoses or

torches.
Oil and grease mixed with oxygen can cause
spontaneous fire.
The following is a list of safety requirements that must be followed when

using an oxygen/acetylene outfit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Bulk storage of flammable gases and oxidizers (oxygen) shall be

separated by 25 feet or a 2-hour firewall.
Never use acetylene gas at a pressure over 15 psig.
Check all connections for leaks with Snoop or a soapy water
solution.
Never use damaged equipment.
Never use oxygen or fuel gas to blow dirt or dust off clothing or
equipment.
Never light a torch with matches or a lighter; always use a striker.
When opening an oxygen or fuel cylinder valve, always crack it
open first.
Always make sure regulators have their adjusting screws released
by turning them counter clockwise until free before opening cylinder
valves. Stand to the side of a regulator, not in front of it when
opening cylinder valves.
Always wear the proper welding goggles, gloves and clothing when
operating oxygen/acetylene equipment. Pants should not have
cuffs.
Always have a 20 lb fire extinguisher handy when operating
oxygen-acetylene equipment.
Always remove hoses and regulators and replace cylinder caps
when finished using cylinders.
Do not rely on the color of the cylinder to identify its contents as
some suppliers may use different color codes.
Always use the proper regulator for the gas in the cylinder.
Always use acetylene and propane cylinders in the upright position
only.
Never store cylinders in temperatures over 130F.
Always keep the valve handle on the acetylene cylinder valve when
in use. Only open valve a maximum of 1 turns.
Do not carry lighters, matches or other flammable objects in
pockets when cutting.
Always be aware of others around you when using a torch.
Be careful not to let welding hoses come into contact with torch
flame or sparks from cutting.

Title:
Effective Date:
20.
21.
22.
6.4
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
10 of 12
Ensure flash back arrestor and excess flow valves are in place on
regulator and mixing bowl of torch end.
Never transport bottles with gauges on.
Ensure all cylinders are properly stored and secured with protection
caps in place.
Grinding
WARNING
Grinding
Rotating discs can cause serious injury. Proper storage and
maintenance of discs and wheels must be observed. Familiarize
yourself with the grinder operation before commencing work.
Two types of grinders are commonly found in a work environment:
Portable Grinder A hand held grinder that can be used anywhere,

electrical or air source is available.
Bench Grinder A grinder that MUST be securely mounted to the work

table or bench.
A.
Portable Grinder
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Worker must ensure a grinder is operated in accordance

with the manufacturers specifications and equipped with a
guard and handle.
When using a grinder, the object being ground cannot move.
A worker must ensure that the guard of a portable grinder
covers the area of the grinder accessory contained within
120 of the accessorys circumference.
Replace damaged, defective and modified guards.
Never exceed the maximum RPM speed marked on the disc.
Also ensure that the grinding disc is designed for the job.
Check discs for cracks or defects.
Ensure that the mounting flanges are clean and mounting
blotters are used.
Do not over tighten the mounting nut.
Before grinding, run the newly mounted grinding disc at
operating speed to check for vibrations.

Title:
Effective Date:
April 5, 2006
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Controlled Document
Page #
11 of 12
Clean and service the grinder according to manufacturers

instructions.
Inspect the grinder for any cracks, or defects before using.
Unplug grinders when servicing or replacing discs.
A worker must never grind material using the side of an
abrasive wheel unless the wheel has been designed for that
purpose.
Grinders will not be equipped with trigger locks.
Table Grinder/Bench Grinder

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Revision # 0
Section: B006
Keep the tool rest no more than 1/8 from the grinding wheel.
Sound the grinding wheel, ring test, to listen for a nonvibration sound, which would indicate a crack.
Keep the face of the grinding wheel true. Use a grinding
wheel dresser to true the wheel and remove glaze from the
wheel surface.
When turning on the machine, stand to the side of the
grinding wheel. Never stand in direct line with the grinding
wheel while it is coming up to operating speed.
Keep grinder eye shields in place and clean at all times.
Keep the spark deflector in place and adjusted so it is never
more than 1/8 from the grinding wheel.
Grind only on the face of the grinding wheel. Heavy side
pressure may cause the grinding wheel to break apart and
strike the operator.
Replace the grinding wheel when it is worn to of its
original diameter. The surface grinding speed of the wheel
is reduced when the grinding wheel is worn, resulting in a
rough grinding surface. It is also difficult on most grinders to
keep the tool rest adjustment to within 1/8 of the grinding
wheel when the wheel is worn to less than its original
diameter. A space of more than 1/8 allows metal to be
pulled between the tool rest and the grinding wheel. This
action may catch fingers, causing the metal to be thrown by
the grinding wheel, tool rest or both.
Do not grind when other workers are near. A bump to
someone grinding may cause a serious incident.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
April 5, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B006
Page #
12 of 12
PPE (Personal Protective Equipment)

Choose the proper PPE, depending on the hazards, for welding, cutting
and grinding operations.
Hazards
Flying Particles
Radiant Heat
Inhalation of Hazardous Materials
PPE Requirements
Welder Hard Hat/Visor Combination
Safety Glasses
Face Shield
Goggles
Gloves
Leather Coat
Carharts
Chaps
Welding (Full Face) Visor
Welding Gloves
All Skin Must be Covered
Supplied Air
Air Purifying/Cart Resp.
Local Ventilation

Title:
Section: B007
Ladders
Effective Date
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
1 of 12
Ladders
Issued: December 18, 2006

Title:
Effective Date
December 18, 2006
Section: B007
Ladders
DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
2 of 12
DESCRIPTION

Title:
Effective Date
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
3 of 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................6
APPENDIX 1 LADDER SET-UP ........................................................................................9

APPENDIX 2 LADDER USE............................................................................................ 10
APPENDIX 3 STEPLADDER USE .................................................................................. 11
LADDER - PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION FORM.................................. 12

Title:
Effective Date
1.0
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
4 of 12
INTRODUCTION
The ladder is an extremely useful, simple device that if not used correctly can be
hazardous. The types of injuries sustained from falling or slipping can be
horrendous, even from a short distance.
2.0
3.0
4.0
PURPOSE
2.1
Identify applications and limitations of ladders.
2.2
Identify installation procedure of ladders.
2.3
Establish requirements for utilizing ladders.
SCOPE
3.1
All company facilities, employees and subcontractors utilizing ladders.
3.2
Other procedures that may apply:

Preventative Maintenance of Tools and Equipment
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Fixed Ladder Is a ladder that is an integral part of a building or

structure.
4.2
Ladder Cage Is a permanent structure attached to a ladder to provide a

barrier between the worker and the surrounding space. It serves to
support a worker if the worker needs to rest and is not a means of fall
protection.
4.3
Combination Ladder Is a portable ladder capable of being used either

as a stepladder or a single or extension ladder. It may also be capable of
being used as a trestle ladder or a stairwell ladder. Its components may
be used as single ladders.
4.4
Extension Ladder Is a non-self-supporting portable ladder consisting of

two or more sections traveling in interlocking rails, guides, or brackets so
arranged as to permit length adjustments.

Title:
Effective Date
5.0
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
5 of 12
4.5
Extension Trestle Ladder Is a self-supporting portable ladder,

adjustable in length, consisting of a trestle ladder base and a vertically
adjustable extension section. Trestle ladders are used in pairs to support
planks or staging and its rungs are not intended to be used as steps.
4.6
Section Ladder Is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable

in length, consisting of two or more sections, so constructed that the
sections may be combined to function as a single ladder.
4.7
Single Ladder Is a non-self-supporting portable ladder, non adjustable

in length, consisting of one section only.
4.8
Special-Purpose Ladder Is a ladder that represents either a

modification or a combination of design or construction features of a
general-purpose ladder, in order to adapt to special or specific uses.
4.9
Stepladder Is a self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in

length, having flat steps and hinged back. The back section consists of
either a single ladder or some other supporting device.
4.10
Step Stool Is a self-supporting, fixed or foldable, portable ladder nonadjustable in length, 800 millimeters (32 inches) or less in overall size with
flat steps and without a pail shelf. The ladder top cap is designed to be
climbed on as well as all steps. The side rails may continue above the top
cap.
4.11
Trestle Ladder Is a self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in

length, consisting of two sections, hinged at the top to form equal angles
with the base. Trestle ladders are used in pairs to support planks or
staging. The rungs are to intended to be used as steps. A trestle ladder
cannot be more than 6 meters (20 feet) long.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Supervision
Ensure workers are supplied with the appropriate ladder for the task to
be performed.
Ensure all ladders used or purchased are CSA or ANSI approved.
Ensure workers are familiar with this procedure and are competent to
erect and use the ladders.

Title:
Effective Date
5.2
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 12
Ensure ladders are identified with a unique identification number.

In addition to pre-use inspections, ensure quarterly preventative
maintenance inspections are completed and documented.
Audit compliance to this procedure.
Worker
6.0
December 18, 2006
5.3
Section: B007
Ladders
Inspect all ladders prior to each use.

Install and utilize ladders as per manufacturers specifications and this
procedure.
Be familiar with this procedure.
Conduct a Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
Ensure other workers are restricted from entering the potential drop
zone.
Utilize worker fall protection when required.
PROCEDURE
Warnings:
Ladders will not be used to access or egress an elevated or sublevel work area if the area has a safe, alternative i.e. stairway,
ramp, etc.
Metal ladders and wooden ladders with side rail metal

reinforcement will not be used during the servicing of energized
or potentially energized electrical equipment.
Fall protection is required when working with a fall potential of 1.8

meters (6 feet) but is not required when moving up or down a
portable ladder.
Fall protection is not required when it is not reasonably

practicable but the following conditions must be met.
o The work must be a light duty task such as inspection
and must be less than 15 minutes at each location.
o The worker must keep his or her center of gravity
between the side rails.
o The worker must maintain three-point contact whenever
the worker extends an arm beyond a side rail.

Title:
Section: B007
Ladders
Effective Date
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
7 of 12
If any one of these three conditions cannot be met, a form of fall

arrest protection is required.
6.1
General Rules For The Safe Use Of Ladders
Wooden ladders shall not be painted or treated except with clear

finishes.
Ladders shall be inspected prior to each use.
Fiberglass ladders, which are not good conductors of electricity, shall
be used when working in close proximity to electrical equipment.
All non-platform ladders shall be tied off at the top and at the bottom
when possible. Ladders shall be held by another worker until tie off is
complete.
When working off the ladder the body shall not be extended in a
manner that allows the belt buckle to pass beyond the rails.
Ladders shall be placed on a solid, even base.
Ladders shall extend a minimum of one meter (3 feet) above the top of
a platform or landing.
Always maintain 3-point contact and face the ladder when climbing up
or down.
Do not carry tools or material in your hands when climbing; use a rope
and tool bag for hoisting and lowering.
Workers shall not stand on the top two rungs of any ladder unless
specified by the manufacturer, i.e. stepstool.
Ladders shall not be placed near doorways, roadways or equipment
access routes, unless the door or access route is made temporarily
inoperative and signs are posted.
Materials or tools shall not be placed at the base or top of a ladder
access.
Keep boots and ladder rungs clean of any mud, grease or other
slippery materials which could cause loss of footing.
Non-self-supporting ladders shall be placed on a base of 4:1 base to
height.
Do not place ladders against a flexible or moveable surface.
When erecting long, heavy or awkward ladders get help to avoid
overexertion. One worker shall secure the base of the ladder while the
other walks it into position.
Stepladders will only be used on a clean, solid and level base.
Stepladders will only be used in the fully open position with the
spreader bars locked.

Title:
Section: B007
Ladders
Effective Date
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
8 of 12
Please see appendix 1, 2, and 3 for further instruction on ladder setup and use.
6.2
Ladder Inspections
Prior to each use the worker will conduct a visual inspection of the
ladder and its installation.
Ladders will be identified with a unique identification number.
Ladders will be formally inspected quarterly and the inspection will be
documented, utilizing B007-1, LadderPreventative Maintenance
Inspection Form.
Note: Ladders in storage or in the tool crib do not require the quarterly
inspection and documentation until issued to the field.

Title:
Effective Date
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 12
Appendix 1 Ladder Set-up

Title:
Effective Date
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
10 of 12
Appendix 2 Ladder Use

Title:
Effective Date
Section: B007
Ladders
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
11 of 12
Appendix 3 Stepladder Use

Title:
Section: B007
Ladders
Effective Date
December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
12 of 12
Ladder - Preventative Maintenance Inspection Form

Ladder No:
1st Qtr. (Jan)
Wood
Step
Job No:
2 Qtr. (April)
3rd Qtr. (July)
Aluminum
Steel
Extension
Platform
Single
Steps or Rungs
Metal Fasteners
Uprights
Non-slip bases
Stability
Hinges
Spreader bars
Spreader bar locks
Extension locks
Rope
nd
4th Qtr. (Oct)

Fiberglass
Other
N/A Pass
Fail
Loose, worn or broken

Loose nails, screws, bolts or rivets
Cracked, split or broken
Damaged or worn
Unstable from side strain
Loose or broken
Loose or bent
Broken or missing
Loose, broken defective or missing
Worn, rotten or missing
Comments:
Inspected by:
_________________________
_________________________
________________
Print Name
Signature
Date
Repairs Required:
Removed from service/tagged by:
Repaired by:
Returned to service by:
Date:
Date:
Date:

Title:
Energy Isolation Lock Out/Tag Out (LOTO)
Effective Date: December 18, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
1 of 19
Energy Isolation
Lock Out/Tag Out
(LOTO)

Title:
Revision # 0
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
2 of 19
DESCRIPTION

Title:

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
3 of 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 4
2.0
PURPOSE .............................................................................................................................................. 4
3.0
SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.0
DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 5
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................................... 7
6.0
LOTO PROCEDURE ..........................................................................................................................10
6.1
GENERAL ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................10
6.2
LOTO MATERIAL AND HARDWARE .....................................................................................................11
6.3
APPLICATION OF LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROLS ...............................................................12
6.4
GROUP LOTO .....................................................................................................................................13
6.5
SHIFT AND PERSONNEL CHANGES .............................................................................................14
6.6
RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO SERVICE ......................................................................................14
6.7
ISOLATING PIPING SYSTEMS OR PIPELINE .............................................................................15
6.8
INSPECTIONS .....................................................................................................................................16
6.9
TRAINING ...........................................................................................................................................16
Attachments
ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT (PART 1) ...................................................................................................17
ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT (PART 2) ...................................................................................................18
DANGER DO NOT OPERATE TAG (SAMPLE) ..........................................................................................19

Title:
1.0
Section: B008

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
4 of 19
INTRODUCTION
Uncontrolled energy can have immediate and serious consequences to
workers, equipment, facilities and customer assets.
Understanding,
managing and controlling energy sources are required to ensure work
activities are safe, protecting people, facilities, environment and customer
assets.
2.0
PURPOSE
To prevent unexpected start-up or release of energy that may result in

injury to personnel or damage to machinery, equipment or customer
assets or the environment.
Identify minimum energy isolation control requirements for workers

working with energy sources.
Meet the requirement of provincial legislation.
WARNING:
3.0
Violation of LOTO will result in serious discipline action up to

termination of employment.
When working on a client site and their energy isolation

procedure exceeds or is equivalent to the requirement of this
procedure the clients procedure will be followed. If the clients
energy isolation procedure is not equivalent to the requirements
of this procedure then this procedure must be used.
SCOPE
All employees, customers and contractors.
All tools, facility buildings and/or equipment.
Additional Procedures that apply;

Confined Space Entry procedure refer to the Confined Space Entry
procedure.

Title:
4.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
5 of 19
DEFINITIONS
4.1
LOTO Lock out/Tag out
4.2
Types of Energy:
Potentially hazardous energy sources may include but are not limited
to:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Electrical
Mechanical
Hydraulic
Pneumatic
Thermal
Residual stored energy
Gravity
Pressurized liquid/gases
Chemical
Radiation
4.3
Energy Isolation Device A mechanical device that physically

prevents the transmission of energy in a system. e.g. blind, blind
flange, double block and bleed, keyed lock, electrical disconnects, etc.
4.4
Lockout Placement of a device that uses a positive means to hold

an energy-isolating device in a safe position. Normally operated by a
key or permanent sealed tie wire.
4.5
Tagout The placement of a prominent warning tag, through

established procedures (customer procedures, manufacturing
requirement or engineering guidelines) to indicate that the energy
isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be
operated until the tag and lock is removed.
4.6
Isolated/Disconnected Complete separation of energy source from

work area. e.g. disconnecting a piping system, pulling a breaker/fuse
system, etc.
4.7
Group Lockout/Tagout When more than one worker or trade is to

perform work on a piece of equipment that has been isolated.

Title:
Section: B008
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 19
4.8
Authorizer Means a person who gives a guarantee of isolation.
4.9
Guarded Means totally secure from any contact with people,

material or equipment.
4.10
Lock Box A sealed device used to place keys for multiple lockouts
where worker(s) can lock onto the lock box.
4.11
Energy Isolation Permit (EIP) Specific form used to identify and

document control of hazardous energy. This is a two-part form.
4.12
Double Block and Bleed Closing and locking of two block valves
with an open, operable locked bleed valve between the block valves,
with work being conducted on the downstream side of the block valve.
Some block valves may have a bleed built into the body of the valve.
Locked
Closed
Locked Closed
Work Area
Locked Open
WARNING:
Unless certified by a professional engineer a blind or blank must be
manufactured in accordance with the specification of one of the
following standards. The most current standard must be used.
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.13
ANSI Standard AP1/590-Steel Line Blanks

ANSI Standard ASME/ANSI B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flange
Fittings
ANSI Standard ASME/B31.3, Power Piping
ANSI Standard ASME/B31.3, Chemical Plant and Petroleum
Refinery Piping
Qualified Worker One who is specifically trained in LOTO
procedures and understands energy sources and isolation techniques
including the positive verification of isolations.

Title:
Section: B008
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
7 of 19
4.14
Live Electrical Having an AC or DC voltage of sufficient current to

cause injury due to arcing, shocking or other similar event.
4.15
Exposed Conductor A conductor having no covering or electrical

insulation.
4.16
Safety Watch A suitably equipped, trained and competent person

who is able to recognize hazards and summon rescue operations.
4.17
Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) A device intended for the protection

of workers, that functions to de-energize a circuit or portion thereof
within an established period of time when a current to ground exceeds
a predetermined value that is less than required to operate the over
current protections device of the supply circuit.
4.18
Blind or Blind Flange The placement of a solid, certified metal disc

between two flanges that act as a positive barrier.
NOTE: Wherever possible blinds and blind flanges will be pressure
rated for the normal process operating pressure.
Tagged
Locked
Closed
Work Area
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Authorized Energy Isolation Permit Issuer/Holder
NOTE: There are times when working on client sites, the client will be the
issuer and our supervisor will be the holder (receiver).

Title:
5.2
5.3
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
8 of 19
Is normally the supervisor or qualified leader of the work team

performing the work also known as the Authorizer.
Ensure all energy sources are identified.
Ensures proper isolation of identified energy isolation sources.
Completes the Energy Isolation Permit (EIP) and ensures

workers sign on.
Project Manager:
Ensure site superintendents are aware of and follow all energy

isolation procedures.
Authorize the removal of LOTO during an emergency.
Site/Project Superintendent
Maintains a minimum/maximum supply of LOTO device in

supply to meet LOTO requirement. e.g. locks and tags, blinds,
chains etc.
Ensures personnel are aware of and follow LOTO procedures

for equipment, and/or facilities.
Ensures compliance to the LOTO procedures.
Ensures contractor personnel are aware of and follow LOTO

procedures.
Ensures fire protection systems are locked and tagged in the

appropriate fail-safe position.
Ensures (EIP) is completed and issued for all facility or

equipment energy disconnects/isolations.
Maintains file for all EIP for a minimum of one year from date of
issue.
Identifies critical work tasks that may expose workers to

hazardous energy sources.

Title:
5.4
5.5
Section: B008

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 19
Acts as the Authorizing Supervisor for issuing energy isolation

permits and authorizes all group LOTO.
Ensures all workers are aware of hazardous energy sources

and the steps to control hazardous energy.
Develops safe work procedures for work on energized

machinery or equipment, with consultation of the HS&E
Department.
Authorizes the removal of a workers lock when worker is not

available, only in extreme cases when the worker is not
available.
Inspects, daily, LOTO devices that are within their area of

control when employees are dependent on these devices to
control hazardous energy.
Provides initial training on LOTO procedures.
Audits the LOTO systems.
Reviews client procedures.
Assist with the development of safe work procedures for work

on energized machinery or equipment when energy may harm
workers.
Workers
Follows this LOTO procedure and/or client procedures.
Never tamper with or remove a LOTO without specific

authorization.
Ensures removal of any energy isolation device will not cause

any uncontrolled energy release that may cause injury, damage
to equipment or the environment.

Title:
6.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
10 of 19
Signs on and off group LOTO forms as required.
Removes locks or tags when work is completed or at end of

workday (each shift).
Apply personal lock and tag to any system when performing

work where energy must be safely controlled e.g. block valves,
breakers, and lock boxes.
LOTO PROCEDURE
WARNING: Prior to work commencing, all known energy sources will
be safely isolated and confirmed (bump tested) by a competent worker,
where energy may cause personnel injury or damage. See definitions
for energy sources.
6.1
General Isolation Requirements
No workers shall work on equipment or machinery that is not

locked and tagged out, isolated/disconnected and tested to
ensure safe working conditions, if such equipment/machinery
could release energy that would cause harm to worker
equipment or environment.
Where it is not practical to isolate/disconnect machinery or

equipment specific Safe Work Procedures will be developed
and employees trained.
A safety watch may be required for live electrical work. This will
be addressed in the pre-job safety review i.e. JSA.
If a safety watch is required they will be trained in basic first aid

and CPR.
At no time will live electrical equipment be left unguarded.
Only authorized, qualified and trained workers will be assigned

to do live electrical disconnects i.e. Journeymen electricians.
Before a worker isolates/disconnects energized equipment they

will obtain an Energy Isolation Permit (EIP) form.
(See
Attachment #1)

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
11 of 19
The EIP is a two-paged form and both sides need to be printed.
The EIP will, at a minimum, contain the following information.

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Date and hour when the EIP is completed.

Duration of EIP.
The name of the worker whom the EIP is issued to.
A detailed description of the scope of work and the
energy isolations that is required.
Local start/stop test completed (bump test).
Voltmeter test O.K. (to be completed by a qualified
electrician.
When LOTO must be done is a sequence the steps will
be detailed on the EIP, in the required sequence.
A copy of the EIP will be provided to the worker with
appropriate instruction and directions.
All EIP will be maintained on file for a period of one year.
The EIP will be returned to the authorized issuer after

completion of the task or at the end of the workers regular shift.
When using tags they:

o Must be affixed as close as possible to the device being
isolated and in a position that is immediately obvious to
anyone attempting to operate the device.
o Must be securely affixed so not to come off due to
working conditions. Ties are recommended.
o Tags will be designed to be used in the work
environment.
WARNING:
6.2
Tags, alone, cannot be used as an energy-isolating device.
No worker may apply or remove any personal lock that

does not belong to them. You cannot put on or remove
your partners lock even if they give you permission.
LOTO Material and Hardware
Locks shall:

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
12 of 19
o Be identifiable as energy control devices only, used for

no other purpose.
o Be durable to the environment that they are to be used
in.
o Be standardized in colour, shape, and size.
o Be constructed of appropriate material for the application
intended.
o Be assigned to each worker and have a unique mark or
tag to identify the worker who the lock was assigned.
Energy Isolation Tags will have at a minimum:

o
o
o
o
o
o
Danger Do Not Operate warning.

Reason for the tagout.
Date of tagout.
Contact number.
Printed name.
Signature of applicator.
See Attachment #2 for example. Not necessarily identical to what will

be available on the job location.
6.3
APPLICATION OF LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROLS

It is required that the lockout/tagout procedures be performed in the
following sequence:
Identification of the full scope of work and the energy to be

controlled to safely perform work.
Completion of a job safety analysis.
A complete knowledge of the type, magnitude and hazards of

the energy to be controlled and the methods required.
Machine or equipment made safe with isolation of energy.
WARNING:
Stored energy can be very serious. The Authorizer of the LOTO
must ensure stored energy is released or controlled. This may

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
13 of 19
include disconnecting or draining the source of stored energy

and verification that the sources are secure. Example of stored
energy: Residual pressure in hydraulic lines or process lines, air
pressure, power stored in large capacitors, etc.
6.4
For plant maintenance follow established client procedures, if

equal to or greater than this procedure.
The person(s) performing the work shall apply lockout and

tagout devices.
The person applying the LOTO will complete each section of the
tag.
GROUP LOTO
In cases where multiple workers or trades are performing work

using the same energy isolation device all workers being
protected by that device shall sign on to the Group LOTO
master sheet. See Appendix #1 Energy Isolation Permit
Part 2 of the form must be signed onto.
Each worker working under a Group LOTO must apply a

personal lock and tag on a lock box, containing the keys for the
group LOTO.
After completing work, remove locks and sign off Group LOTO
Part 2.
The equipment being protected by the Group LOTO can only be

put back into service after:
o All work has been completed or has been made safe to
put back into service,
o All workers have removed their personal locks and tags
off the lock box,
o Sign off the Group LOTO permit; and,
o The person starting the equipment has made a thorough
inspection of the area and equipment and its safe to start
up.

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
14 of 19
WARNING: Complicated Group Controls energy isolation will

require the approval of the director of inspection for Alberta
Worksite, if deviation from this procedure is required.
6.5
SHIFT AND PERSONNEL CHANGES

When changes to personnel occur due to shift changes or other
circumstance the incoming workers will review and sign the group
LOTO master sheet Part 2 of the EIP and they will lock out the lock
box.
6.6
RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO SERVICE

When servicing or maintenance is complete the equipment may be
returned to service. Returning the equipment to service shall include
but is not limited to:
Inspection of the area to ensure that the equipment components

are intact and those all nonessential items have been removed
from the area.
Ensuring that all workers are account for and safely positioned
or out of the area.
Removal of the lockout and tagout devices by the employees

who applied them.
Ensure all safety devices have been reapplied e.g. guards, limit
switches, etc..
Note: A Project Manager/Superintendent can authorize removal of a

LOTO, if:
It is an emergency.
The worker or workers who applied the device are not available
on site. All reasonable attempts to contact the worker and
immediate notification of the employee that their device was
removed, upon their return must be completed.
After notification of all workers who were affected by the work

(Group LOTO) sign off.

Title:
6.7
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
15 of 19
After complete
personnel.
After notification of the HS&E department.
After notification and approval of the client when on a client site.
review
of
the
equipment/machinery
for
ISOLATING PIPING SYSTEMS OR PIPELINE

WARNINGS:
Before opening any process piping system all client and

company procedures must be met. At no time will workers
open or close client process valves, without written
consent/direction from the client and applicable job safety
analysis and/or written procedures for the specific task.
Opening process piping systems has a high potential for

release of uncontrolled energy that can cause significant
injuries, equipment damages and environmental impact.
Before any process piping system is opened, the workers will be

protected by one or more of the following:
a.) Installing of a blank or blind upstream of the work.
b.) A double block and bleed.
c.) If options (a) and (b) are not available, then a procedure
approved by a professional engineer, must be obtained.
All block valves will be:

o Locked in the safe position e.g. open or closed
o Tagged with and appropriate Do Not Operate tag.
NOTE: Blank or blinds will be clearly tagged/identified.
At a minimum when opening process systems 1st line break

the following will be the minimum PPE:
o Full face shield;
o FRC clothing when client requires or flammable products
were previously in line; and,

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B008
Page #
16 of 19
o Gloves appropriate to the chemicals in the process.
Green Field Construction: When green field construction piping

systems are connected to live process equipment their piping
systems will be considered live.
WARNING:
All workers protected by a blind, double block or bleed must lock
and tag out the energy isolation device or a group LOTO must be
used.
6.8
INSPECTIONS
The Project Manager/Superintendent will conduct periodic inspections
of their energy control program to ensure that the provisions of the
procedure are being followed.
6.9
TRAINING
Initial training and certification will be provided to:

o Superintendent /Project Manager.
o Any supervisors that issue EIP and perform
lockout/tagout procedures.
o Employees working in areas where lockout and tagout
procedures are used and are protected by LOTO.
Training content will cover:

o Review of HS&E Energy Isolation procedure.
o Identifications of common energy sources.
o Review of isolation procedures, and techniques e.g.
electrical disconnects, blinds, etc.
o Completion of EIP (Energy Isolation Permit).
o Group LOTO.
ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT (Part 1)
Date of Issue:
Time of issue:
Issued to: Print name and
Name:
trade clearly.
Has a JSA been completed? Yes No
If no, why?
Expiry Time:
Trade:
Detailed description of the work to be done and the energy isolations required to
complete the work safely.
Identify the energy source(s) that must be isolated/disconnected. Identify if energy must
be isolated in sequence to ensure the safety of workers. Use a number system starting
from 1 to indicate the 1st isolation and so on.
a.
Electrical
f.
Nuclear
b.
Hydraulic
g.
Thermal
c.
Pneumatic
h.
Stored Energy
d.
Mechanical
i.
Gravity
e.
Pressurized liquids
j.
Chemicals
The following test(s) have been completed to ensure electrical energy isolation are
effective.
Stop/start test at the machinery
a)
Yes
Time
Initial
location
b) Volt-meter test, by electrician
Yes
Time
Initial
Piping/Process System
Blinded
Yes
No
Double Blocked/Bleed
Yes
No
Disconnected/Capped
Yes
No
Will there be more than one worker protected by energy
Yes
No
isolation?
When one or more workers are working under this energy isolation permit they must sign
off on the Group LOTO portion on the backside of this permit. WARNING: At no time
will any energy isolation device be removed until ALL group LOTO workers have signed
off the LOTO form. All workers will lock out the lock box for energy isolations. See
reverse side.
Permit Agreement:
I (the issuer and receiver) have made a complete inspection of the work area, the scope
of work and the energy isolation devices that are in place and provide assurance that
hazardous energy is controlled.
Signature of Issuer:
Print:
Date:
Signature of Receiver:
Print:
Date:
Controlled Form Reference Number: B008-1 Part 1
ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT (Part 2)
Group LOTO
I, the undersigned, understand that I am working on a group LOTO and that I must sign
on and off, and lock the lock box before commencing work, and remove my lock/tag
at the completion of my work.
Name: (Print)
Trade: (Print)
Sign On: (Initial)
Sign Off: (Initial)
Controlled Form Reference Number: B008-1 Part 2
Danger Do Not Operate Tag (Sample)
DANGER
DO
NOT
OPERATE
This LOTO may
only be removed by:
Name: ___________________
Dept.: ___________________
Expected Completion: ______
Front of Tag
DANGER
This energy source has
been LOCKED OUT!
Unauthorized removal of this
LOTO may result in
immediate discharge
Remarks: ___________________
____________________________
____________________________
____________________________
____________________________
Rear of Tag
Figure 1a: DO NOT OPERATE TAG

NOTES:
1. Tags are 5.75 high x 3 wide with two chamfered corners and 7/16 brass
grommeted hole.
2. Heavy-duty polyester.
3. Danger is the white characters on red oval on black rectangle.
4. Characters and lines are positioned approximately as shown.

Title:
Personal Protective Equipment
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
1 of 30

Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B009

Revision # 2
May 20, 2009
DATE
Controlled Document
Page #
2 of 30
DESCRIPTION
10,13
May 20, 2009 Updates as per Alberta OH&S 2009
26
May 20, 2009 6.8 added Hand, Arm and Torso Protection
28
May 20, 2009 6.11 added Traffic Control
10
Feb 22, 2013
6.1 Addition of sealed eyewear

Title:
Effective Date:

May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
3 of 30
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................... 10
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
Personal Protective Equipment Standards........................................................... 10

Respiratory Protection ......................................................................................... 11
Fire Resistant Clothing ........................................................................................ 18
Hearing Protection ............................................................................................... 19
Head Protection ................................................................................................... 22
Eye And Face Protection ..................................................................................... 23
Foot Protection .................................................................................................... 25
Hand Protection ................................................................................................... 26
Specialty PPE ...................................................................................................... 27
Worker Fall Protection Equipment ....................................................................... 28
APPENDIX: ........................................................................................................................28
HEALTH QUESTIONNAIRE FOR FITNESS TO WEAR A RESPIRATOR ................. 29
RESPIRATOR FIT TEST........................................................................................... 30

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
4 of 30
INTRODUCTION
The Personal Protective Equipment Procedure has been developed to provide
the MINIMUM standards for the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
PPE is to be used during specific conditions of work when engineering and
administrative controls do not provide adequate protection from hazards. Its use
must be viewed as a last resort only and is not to be considered as an alternative
to workers following the proper rules, standards and procedures in the
performance of their work.
2.0
PURPOSE
3.0
Identify standards for the purchasing of PPE.

Identify requirements for the use of PPE.
Identify training requirements for the use of PPE.
SCOPE
All company employees, subcontractors, visitors and vendors.
4.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
ANSI
The American National Standards Institute
4.2
Administrative Controls
Controls which reduce Worker exposure to hazards using methods such
as safe job procedures, scheduling changes and job rotation.
4.3
Air-purifying Respirator
A respirator that removes contaminants from the atmosphere by filtration,
absorption or adsorption.
4.4
Chemical Cartridge
A small container filled with absorbing media used with air-purifying
respirators for removing low concentrations of specified vapours and
gases.
4.5
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
4.6
Dusts
Fine particles generated by the breakdown of solid material through
mechanical processes such as grinding, crushing, drilling, blasting,
sanding or milling.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
5 of 30
4.7
Engineering Controls
Controls which reduce Worker exposure to hazards using engineering
methods that may include ventilation, enclosure or isolation of the
process, and substitution with a less hazardous material.
4.8
Eye and Face Protection

Safety glasses with side shields, goggles, and face masks and shields.
4.9
Face Shields
Devices designed to provide protection to the face and neck from flying
particles and sprays or hazardous liquids, and to provide anti-glare
protection.
4.10
Facepiece
The tight fitting portion of a respirator which covers the wearers nose and
mouth (half-mask facepiece), or which covers the nose, mouth and eyes
(full facepiece).
4.11
Fire Resistant Clothing

Clothing which offers protection against flash fires. It is either selfextinguishing where the flame will die upon removal of the ignition source
or it is inherently non-flammable where it will char without bursting into
flames. It is not considered to be fire proof.
4.12
Flash Fire
The rapid propagation of flame through a cloud of flammable mixture of
uniform concentration in an unconfined and/or unobstructed space. This
usually occurs when ignition takes place sometime after the initial gas
release, when the gas has had a chance to mix and the gas/air mixture is
more evenly distributed.
4.13
Fit Test
A test direct by competent personnel to measure the effect of the
facepiece-to-face seal. Included quantitative and qualitative fit tests.
4.14
Fumes
Extremely small particles formed when solid materials are heated and
then quickly cooled such that the vaporized metal oxidizes and
condenses. Operations such as welding, smelting, and pouring of molten
metal produce fumes.

Title:
Section: B009
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 30
4.15
Gases
Substances that are found in their gaseous state at room temperature.
They spread freely through a container or area to occupy the entire space
available. Examples include oxygen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide,
nitrogen, helium and air.
4.16
Hand Protection
Any protective equipment such as gloves, mitts or barrier creams which
offer protection against injury or illness (dermatitis) to a workers hands.
4.17
Hard Hat (CSA Grade 1)

A head protection hat that offers protection from penetration, electrical
shock and impact. Grad 1 will withstand 125 joules or 93 ft. lbs. which
would be generated by a 50 pound weight dropped from a height of 22
inches.
4.18
Hearing Protection
Protective equipment such as ear muffs, ear plugs/molded ear plugs
which offers protection against hearing loss.
4.19
IDLH
Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
4.20
Manufacturers Specifications
The written specifications, instructions or recommendations, if any, of the
manufacturer of equipment, which outline the manner in which the
equipment is to be erected, installed, assembled, started, operated, used,
handled, stored, stopped, adjusted, maintained, repaired or dismantled,
and includes a manufacturers instruction, operating or maintenance
manual or drawings for that equipment.
4.21
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

A comprehensive information sheet for a particular hazardous material
outlining the technical and hazard information as well as suggested
handling procedures.
4.22
Mechanical Field Check

Field verification of the seal of a respirator to the wearers face.
4.23
Mechanical Filters or Pre-Filters

A fibrous media used with an air-purifying respirator to remove particulate
matter from the air.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
7 of 30
4.24
Metatarsal Protection
An additional protective pad attached to the boot designed to protect the
top of the foot between the toes and ankle.
4.25
Mists
Fine particles or liquid droplets formed when liquid materials are atomized
or when vapours condense. Operations such as spraying, plating, mixing
and cleaning may produce mists.
4.26
OEL
Occupational Exposure Limit, in respect of a substance, means the
Occupational Exposure Limit(s) established by Chemical Hazard
Regulation for that substance.
This regulation refers to average
concentrations of airborne substances to which Workers may be exposed
to, for specific time periods. It also includes ceiling OELs which represent
the maximum instantaneous concentration of the air borne substance
acceptable.
4.27
Oxygen Deficiency
A lack of oxygen in air caused by a chemical reaction, fire, or a gas that
displaces (or pushes out) oxygen. Defined as less than 19.5 percent
oxygen in air.
4.28
Oxygen Enriched
An oxygen concentration in the air of 23% or greater.
4.29
Particulate
A particle of solid or liquid matter. Includes dusts, fumes and mists.
4.30
Personal Protective (PPE)

Equipment or clothing which offers complete or partial protection to
various parts of the body from specific hazards
4.31
Qualitative Fit Test

A test where a person wearing a fitted air-purifying respirator equipped
with a suitable cartridge is exposed to a specific substance. The
respirator wearer uses the sense of smell to detect any leakage of the test
agent into the facepiece.
4.32
Quantitative Fit Test

A test where a person wearing a fitted respirator is exposed to a test
atmosphere containing a known concentration of a chemical agent.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
8 of 30
Instrumentation compares the agent concentration in the test atmosphere

and inside the facepiece.
5.0
4.33
Remote Supplied Breathing Apparatus (RSBA)

A respirator with an independent source of compressed air supplied from
a stationary source.
4.34
Respirator
A device to protect the wearer from inhalation of harmful contaminants;
includes air-purifying respirators and air supplying respirators.
4.35
Respiratory Protection
Any method used to protect the Worker from inhalation of harmful airborne
contaminants.
4.36
Safety Glasses
Glasses having CSA approved frames and side shields and designed to
prevent eye injury from flying objects.
4.37
Safety Goggles
CSA approved devices which consist of flexible frames and lenses, which
fit to the face. They are available in different classes and can be worn
with or without glasses.
4.38
Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)

A respirator with an independent source of compressed air attached by a
harness to the Workers back.
4.39
Vapours
The gaseous state of substances normally found as liquids or solids at
room temperature. These liquids and solids have very low vapour
pressures and consequently evaporate or vaporize readily. Examples
include gasoline, solvents, and mothballs.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
President
Ensure funding is available for required Personal Protective
Equipment.
Ensure an effective Personal Protective Equipment procedure is
implemented.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
9 of 30
5.2
Vice President / General Manager

Ensure effectiveness and compliance with this procedure.
Ensure the purchasing of PPE meets the requirements of this
procedure.
5.3
Corporate HS&E Manager/ Site Safety Coordinator

Ensure effectiveness and compliance with this procedure.
Ensure purchasing standards are adhered to.
Assist Supervision with the identification of types of PPE to be
utilized.
Ensure PPE training is made available.
Review and approve third party training.
5.4
Project Manager / Superintendent

Ensure all aspects of this procedure are implemented and followed.
Ensure the purchasing of PPE meets the requirements of this
procedure.
Ensure all Managers, Supervisors and Workers fully understand
their responsibilities under the OH&S Act and its associated
regulations with regard to PPE.
Ensure inspections for compliance to this procedure are conducted.
Ensure all workers exposed or potentially exposed to hazards are
informed and instructed as to the requirements of this procedure.
Ensure the required PPE is made available to their Workers.
Ensure the appropriate PPE is designated for specific situation or
task.
Ensure all potentially exposed Workers are trained in the use of the
selected Personal Protective Equipment.
Ensure all PPE is adequately maintained and inspected to ensure
its functionality.
5.5
Worker
Ensure PPE is used and maintained in accordance with the
instruction and training received.
Inspect all PPE prior to each use.
Ensure all precautions are taken to prevent damage to PPE and
that damaged equipment is tagged and removed from service.
Bring to the attention of their supervisor any health problems that
may interfere with the wearing of PPE.
Identify to their supervisor any additional PPE that they may need
to safely perform their work.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
6.0
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
10 of 30
Purchase approved safety foot wear as per the requirements of this

procedure.
PROCEDURE
6.1
Personal Protective Equipment Standards

Respiratory Protective Equipment will be selected, purchased
and utilized in accordance with CSA Standard Z94.4-02, Selection,
Use and Care of Respirators and be approved by NIOSH.
Hearing Protection Equipment will be selected, purchased and
utilized in accordance with CSA Standard Z94.2-02, Hearing
Protection Devices-Performance, Selection, Care, and Use and
Table 2: Selection of Hearing Protectors.
Head Protection Equipment will be selected, purchased and
utilized in accordance with:
o CSA Standard Can/CSA-Z94.1-05 Industrial Protective
Headwear,
o ANSI Standard Z89.1-2003, American National Standard for
Industrial Head Protection for Type II.
If the protective headwear was manufactured on or after July 1,
2009.
Eye and Face Protection Equipment All employees are required
to wear sealed eyewear at all times in accordance with:
o CSA Standard CAN/CSA-Z94.3-07, Eye and Face Protectors,
o CSA Standard Z94.3-99, Industrial Eye and Face Protectors,
o CSA Standard Z94.3-02, Eye and Face Protectors
If the use of plastic prescription lenses is impracticable, and there is
no danger of impact, a worker may use lenses made of treated
safety glass meeting the requirements of:
o ANSI Standard Z87.1-1989, Practice for Occupational and
Educational Eye and Face Protection, or
o ANSI Standard Z87.1-2003, Practice for Occupational and
Educational Eye and Face Protection
Foot Protection Equipment will be selected, purchased and
utilized in accordance with:
o CSA Standard Z195-02, Protective Footwear, or
o ASTM Standard F2413-05, Specification for Performance
Requirements for Protective Footwear.
If the protective footwear was manufactured on or after July 1,
2009,

Title:
Effective Date:
6.2
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
11 of 30
The company will take reasonable measures to institute engineering
controls, safe job procedures and/or administrative controls to eliminate or
reduce potential respiratory hazards to acceptable levels. Personal
protective equipment should be used as a last resort.
Respiratory protection shall be used when engineering or administrative
control measures are not practical or do not reduce the respiratory hazard
to acceptable levels, or while such controls are being instituted.
All workers shall use respiratory protection when they are engaged in
activities that expose them to respiratory hazards or when they are
entering areas where respiratory hazards are present.
Exemptions
There are NO exemptions to the use of respiratory protection when a
worker is potentially exposed to respiratory hazards.
Each Project or Worksite is required to:
Identify all the potential respiratory hazards, evaluate the need for
respiratory protection against those hazards, prescribe the
appropriate respiratory protective equipment, and conduct regular
monitoring for compliance.
Ensure all workers who are required to use respirators receive
training and then mask fit testing prior to its initial use.
Ensure all workers who are required to use respirators receive
refresher training and mask fit testing every two years.
Ensure appropriate respiratory protection is available.
Ensure respiratory protective equipment is:
o Stored in a readily accessible location in a manner that
prevents it contamination;
o Maintained in a clean and sanitary condition;
o Inspected before and after each use; and
o Serviced and used in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications.
Ensure respiratory protective equipment that is not used routinely
but is kept ready for emergency use, is inspected at least monthly
to ensure it is in satisfactory working condition.
Post warning signs at the hazardous areas where respiratory
protection is mandatory.
Inform all contractors, visitors and vendors of potential respiratory
hazards in areas that they will be accessing.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
12 of 30
Provide formal training on selection, care and use of respirators

and conduct mask fit testing.
Maintain respiratory protective equipment training records.
Front-line Supervisors are required to:

Ensure workers are trained and then fit tested prior to being
assigned any task that requires the use of a respirator.
Ensure proper respirators are used by the workers to protect
against respiratory hazards.
Ensure that respirators are used in accordance with the training
received and the safe job procedures established for the workplace,
and ensure that respiratory protective equipment is:
prevents it contamination;
o Inspected before and after each use; and
o Serviced and used in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications.
In the case of a tight fitting face-piece, ensure respirator users
maintain their required clean-shaven condition, and do not have
any object or material that would interfere with the seal or operation
of the respirator.
Workers are required to:
Ensure respiratory protective equipment in their care is:
prevents its contamination;
o Inspected before and after each use.
Perform a mechanical field check (user seal check) on respiratory
equipment to ensure a proper facial seal each and every time a
respirator is worn.
Note: A user seal check shall not be used as a substitute for a
qualitative or quantitative fit test.
Maintain their required clean-shaven condition and refrain from
having any object or material that would interfere with the seal or
operation of the respirator.
Notify their supervisor of any health status or physical changes that
may necessitate medical reassessment or fit testing.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
13 of 30
Respirator Selection
Company HS&E professionals and/or industrial hygienists are trained in
the respiratory protective equipment selection process and should be
consulted to determine the correct respiratory protection.
The parameters listed below must be considered prior to the selection of
respiratory protective equipment:
The nature of any combination of contaminants;
The concentration, or likely concentration, of any airborne
contaminants;
The duration, or likely duration, of the workers exposure;
The toxicity of the contaminants;
The partial pressure of oxygen;
The warning properties of the contaminants;
The need for emergency escape;
Specific regulations or guidelines associated with the hazards;
Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) concentration
and Occupational Exposure Limit (OEL);
Characteristics of the operation, activity, or process;
Respiratory characteristics, capabilities, and limitations; and
Respiratory protection factors.
WARNING:
Particulate and chemical cartridge filter respirators shall not be used in
environments that are IDLH or in atmospheres containing less than 19.5%
or greater than 23% oxygen. Chemical cartridge respirators shall not
be used for protection against hydrogen sulfide.
Air-Supplying Respiratory Equipment
All SCBA and RSBA equipment must:
Be capable of maintaining positive pressure in the face piece;
Have a capacity of at least 30 minutes;
In the case of SCBA, be fitted with an audible alarm warning of low
pressure; and
In the case of RSBA, be fitted with an auxiliary supply of respirable
air of sufficient quantity to enable the worker to escape from the
area in and emergency.
Quality of Air
The quality of air supplied to SCBA and RSBA equipment shall comply
with Table 1 of CSA standard Z180.1-00(R2005) Compressed Breathing
Air and Systems as a minimum. The air used for this type of equipment

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
14 of 30
must not contain a substance in concentration greater than 10 percent of

its Occupational Exposure Limit.
Ambient air systems used to supply respiratory air to abrasive blasting
hoods will meet CSA z180.1-00, Appendix B.
Use
Workers must don the respirator properly and ensure that there is no
obstruction between the sealing surface of the mask and the face, i.e.
excessive facial hair, piercing, eyeglasses, etc.
Workers who are required to use respirators shall be clean-shaven which
is defined as no facial hair below the earlobe except mustaches that
must be trimmed to the corners of the mouth. Respirators that require
a tight fit in order to perform effectively must not be used when an
effective seal cannot be achieved and maintained.
Cold Temperature Procedure
Cold temperature operating procedures must be followed at ambient
temperatures between 50C to -250C.
SCBA or RSBA equipment is not permitted at ambient temperatures below
-250C unless safe work procedures have been developed (Note: wind chill
does not affect equipment.)
Refer to SCBA/RSBA Cold Weather Use Rules for details.
Abrasive Blasting Operations
Abrasive blasting hoods shall be supplied with air that is at a positive
pressure not exceeding 140kPa (20.3 psi).
Safe Job Procedures and Safe Work Permits
When Safe Job Procedures or Safe Work Permits apply to a task, they
must specifically reference any required respiratory protective equipment.
Training
All employees who use air-purifying respirators must receive initial
training, and subsequent refresher training every two years.
Training will cover such topics as:
Nature, extent, and effects of the respiratory hazards to which a
Worker may be exposed;

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
15 of 30
Explanation of the operation, limitations, and capabilities of

selected respirators;
Knowledge of the elements of this HS&E Procedure;
Procedures for mechanical field checking (user seal check),
inspecting, wearing, donning and doffing;
Maintaining, cleaning and sanitizing, and storing respirators;
Disposal of used cartridges and filters, and change out frequency;
and
Use under failure or emergency situations.
All employees who use SCBA or RSBA will attend H2S Alive training
provided by a certified trainer or an alternative but equal program with
prior approval from the Corporate HS&E Manager. Retraining will be
dependent on the competency of the individual worker and the term of
certification by the training provider.
Fit Testing
Workers, who are required to use air-purifying respirators, SCBA, or
RSBA, must be fit tested at least once every two years to ensure a proper
seal between the facepiece and the face.
Prior to fit testing, Form B009-1 Health Questionnaire For Fitness to Wear
a Respirator must be completed by the worker. If a health condition of
concern is identified, the worker must be deemed medically fit by a health
care professional before performing any work that requires them to wear a
respirator and the fit testing will not continue without the medical approval.
Upon completion of the fit test, Form B009-2 Respirator Fit Test will be
completed to document the respirator training and fit test and the worker
will be issued a wallet sized card.
Forms B009-1 and B009-2 will be placed in the workers personal file.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
16 of 30
This card is to certify that ______________________

has successfully completed the training and fit testing
for the use of a respirator on ___________________
This card is valid for two years from date of issue.
Certified by: ________________________________
MAKE: _________________ SIZE: ______________
MAKE: _________________ SIZE: ______________
Maintenance
Respirators must be properly maintained to retain their original
effectiveness. Supervision and Workers are responsible to ensure that
respiratory protective equipment is working properly.
Maintenance will include:
Cleaning and sanitizing;
Inspection, testing, and repair; and
Storage.
SCBA and RSBA equipment will be cleaned, sanitized, inspected,
maintained, repaired, and stored in accordance with the manufacturers
specifications.

Title:
Section: B009
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
17 of 30
SCBA and RSBA Cold Weather Use Rules

SCBA (Self Contained Breathing Air)
When using SCBA with ambient temperatures between plus 5oC and
minus 25oC the following controls must be put in place.
SCBA cylinders and equipment must be stored in temperatures of

plus 5oC or warmer for a minimum of 20 minutes prior to use.
SCBA equipment is to be donned and doffed in a warm location.
The mask and regulator must be kept warm, e.g. tucked inside a
coat, when removed to prevent ice forming in the exhalation valve.
SCBA equipment must not be left exposed to freezing temperatures
when not in use.
RSBA (Remote Supplied Breathing Air) SKA Work Packs

When using RSBA with ambient temperatures between plus 5oC and
minus 25oC the following controls must be put in place:
A heated location must be supplied for the Breathing Air Cylinders.

Storage temperatures must be maintained above plus 5oC for the
duration of the work.
Breathing Air Cylinders must be stored in temperatures of plus 5oC
or warmer for a minimum of 20 minutes prior to use.
Standby SCBA and RSBA equipment is to be donned and doffed in
a warm location.
RSBA work line hose length must not exceed 150 feet.
RSBA equipment must not be left exposed to freezing temperatures
when not in use.
When responding to an emergency at ambient temperatures colder than

minus 25oC, Emergency Response personnel may use SCBA that has
been stored in a warm location for emergency response use. Otherwise a
Safe Job Procedure is required before SCBA or RSBA work of any kind is
performed at ambient temperatures colder than minus 25oC.
Note: Temperatures referred to above are ambient air temperatures.
Wind chill does not affect equipment.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.3
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
18 of 30
Fire Resistant Clothing

A misconception exists that Fire Resistant Clothing will not burn. This is
not the case. The purpose of Fire Resistant Clothing is to protect a
Worker in a flash Fire situation, giving them extra time needed to escape
to a safe location. Fire Resistant Clothing is designed for resisting only a
short duration Flash Fire (normally 4 seconds) without the fabric igniting.
The value of Fire Resistant Clothing is its ability to minimize the secondary
ignition of the persons clothing. Protection against a high heat flux over a
longer time period would require flame resistant garments with higher
thermal integrity, heavier mass and/or layering of flame resistant fabrics in
order to achieve adequate thermal insulation.
To determine if Fire Resistant Clothing is required, refer to the Workplace
Hazard Assessment (Hazard Assessment and Controls A024) which
should have assessed items such as fire hazards, safe job procedures
and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). The requirement to utilize Fire
Resistant Clothing is often determined by the client.
Use
To maximize the protection provided by Fire Resistant Clothing, it must be
worn as the outer garment. The underclothing is of great importance in
maintaining proper protection. It is essential that fusible materials (nylons,
polyesters) are not worn because heat causes synthetics to melt and burn
to the skin. Cotton, high percentage cotton blends or wool fabrics are
recommended. Undergarments consisting of long sleeve shirts or T-shirts
and long pants of at least 4 oz/yd2, cotton or wool should be worn under a
single layer of Fire Resistant Clothing, i.e., coveralls trousers, shirts,
jackets, rainwear and reflective vests.
Fire Resistant Clothing should provide a good functional fit for maximum
protection and comfort on the job. Users should be aware that the fit of
the garment (that is, too tight or too loose) can have a direct influence on
how much protection can be provided by the garment. For maximum
protection, the clothing must be worn properly. The neck will be worn
closed rather than open and the sleeves will be worn down rather than up.
The clothing must be kept clean as soiling will reduce the protective
qualities and increase the risk of second and third degree burns.
Maintenance
It is imperative that all employees treat their clothing with the appropriate
care and handling, especially in regard to its cleaning and daily use. All
Fire Resistant Clothing will be maintained, cleaned and cared for as per
specific manufacturers instructions.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.4
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
19 of 30
Hearing Protection
All employees shall meet the requirements of this procedure and the
OH&S Noise Regulation. Use of hearing protection is mandatory when
workers are engaged in activities that may expose them to noise hazards,
or when entering areas where noise hazards may be present.
The Company shall take all reasonable and practical steps to reduce a
Workers exposure to noise. When reducing noise exposure, preference
will be given to engineering controls, then administrative controls, and
finally appropriate personal hearing protection.
Engineering controls are used to minimize or eliminate exposure by
altering or removing the source.
Administrative controls are used to control exposure by modifying
the circumstances of the workers exposure.
Personal hearing protection reduces exposures when the other
approaches have not reduced the hazard to an acceptable level.
Workers will wear approved hearing protective equipment in areas posted
as requiring hearing protection or when exposed to noise exceeding the
limits set out in Table 1.
Each Project or Worksite is required to:
Educate workers in the hazards of excessive exposure to noise and
communicate guidelines for the use and maintenance of hearing
protectors.
Identify all areas where noise levels are over 85 dBA and post
areas with warning signs stating the required haring protection.
Identify noise-exposed workers for inclusion in the Audiometric
Testing Program.
Ensure appropriate hearing protective equipment is worn by
affected workers according to Table 2, selection of Hearing
Protectors.
Ensure only approved hearing protective equipment is being used
by all workers.
Workers are required to:
Use hearing protective equipment when they are potentially
exposed to excessive noise.
Ensure that their hearing protective equipment is maintained to
retain its effectiveness.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
20 of 30
Audiometric Testing Program

For any noise exposed workers:
An initial baseline test must be conducted within 6 months from the
start of employment, or within 6 months of becoming newly noise
exposed due to a change in activities or duties; and
A follow-up test must be conducted within 12 months after the initial
audiometric testing; and
Tests must be conducted at least every 2 years thereafter.
Occupational Exposure Limits
Occupational Exposure Limits (OELs) define a workers maximum
permitted daily exposure to noise without hearing protection. OELs take
into consideration the loudness of the noise -- measured in decibels (dBA)
-- and the duration of exposure of that noise -- measured in hours per day.
No person is to be exposed to noise that exceeds the OELs.
Table 1: Occupational Exposure Limits for Continuous Noise
Without Hearing Protection
Sound Level (dBA)

82
83
84
85
88
91
94
97
100
103
106
109
112
Greater than 115
Maximum Permitted Duration

of Exposure Without Hearing
Protection
(per 24 hour period)
16 hours
12 hours and 41 minutes
10 hours and 4 minutes
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
1 hours
30 minutes
15 minutes
8 minutes
4 minutes
2 minutes
1 minutes
0 minutes
Hearing Protection Selection

Where noise levels cannot be reduced by the use of engineered noise
controls or by the use of administrative controls, the Company shall take

Title:
Section: B009
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
21 of 30
steps to reduce exposure to those noise levels by providing individual

hearing protective equipment in accord with Table 2.
Table 2: Selection of Hearing Protectors
Maximum equivalent
noise level
(dBA Lex)
90
95
100
105
110
>110
CSA Class of hearing

protection
CSA Grade of
hearing protection
C, B or A
B or A
A
A
A earplug +
A or B earmuff
A plug + A or B earmuff
and limited exposure time
to keep sound reaching the
workers ear drum below
85 dBA Lex
1,2,3, or 4
2,3, or 4
3 or 4
3 or 4 earplug +
2, 3, or 4 earmuff
3 or 4 earplug = 2,3, or 4
earmuff and limited
exposure time to keep
sound reaching the
workers ear drum below
85 dBA Lex
Exemptions
There are NO exemptions to the use of hearing protection when a worker
is exposed to noise over the Occupational Exposure Limit set in Table 1 or
when they are in an area posted as requiring hearing protection.
Use
For maximum protection, a hearing protector must make a tight seal within
the ear canal or against the side of the head.
Modifying hearing protectors to reduce wearer discomfort (e.g. by drilling
holes in ear cups, by reducing headband tension or earmuffs, or by
trimming or removing flanges on pre-molded plugs) seriously
compromises their effectiveness.
The compatibility of a hearing protector with other equipment (e.g. hard
hats, goggles, glasses, and masks) must be checked to ensure that
interference with the hearing protector does not reduce its effectiveness.
Maintenance
Hearing Protection will be maintained so that it retains its integrity.
Manufactures instructions will be followed for all maintenance and
cleaning.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
22 of 30
Head Protection
Workers will wear approved head protective equipment to protect the
wearer from potential injury when exposed to hazardous conditions. The
level of head protection appropriate for the hazards normally encountered
will be determined through the Workplace Hazard Assessment and Safe
Job Procedures.
There are two levels of protection: General usage, and lateral impact.
The majority of tasks performed require general usage head protection.
For tasks where there is a significant potential risk of a lateral blow to the
side of a Workers head, a hard had designed with lateral protection must
be used.
Note: Metal hard hats will not be used.
Exemptions
Head Protection is not required in offices, lunch rooms, rest rooms,
change/locker rooms or specifically designated walkways unless
otherwise specified.
Use
The fit of the hard hat must be adjusted so that it is comfortable. A hard
hat must never be worn in a tilted or backward position on the head unless
it is specifically designed to be worn brim back.
The suspension can be adjusted in many ways to ensure comfort and the
ability to remain on the users head during normal tasks.
The company logo and the workers first and last name must be on the
front of the hard hat and in addition if the worker is a certified first aider, a
first aid sticker will be placed on the side of the hard hat.
If riding a bicycle at a work site and not exceeding 20 kilometers per hour
the use of a hard hat with a chin strap is acceptable.
Maintenance
Shell
For maximum head protection, the shell of a hard hat should be checked
by the wearer for any visible damage before each use. If the shell is found
to have a crack, dent or penetration, the hard hat must be discarded.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
23 of 30
Suspension
The suspension forms a barrier between the head and the shell of a hard
hat. The suspension shall be inspected frequently for loose or broken
threads, broken retainer clips, and overall cleanliness. The suspension
and shell will be cleaned regularly by using a wet sponge with mild soap.
Replacement
It is recommended that the shell be replaced every 5 years, and the
suspension replaced annually. Replacement will occur immediately if
inspection reveals obvious damage.
6.6
Eye And Face Protection

Workers shall wear appropriate Eye and Face Protection. The minimum
eye protection required is CSA approved Safety Glasses with side shields
or CSA approved safety goggles. Contact lenses shall not be permitted in
areas where safety glasses must be worn, except as stated in the
exemptions.
Exemptions
Eye and Face Protection is not required in offices, lunch rooms, rest
rooms, change/locker rooms or specifically designated walkways unless
Use
Workers must ensure that the appropriate type of Eye and Face Protection
is worn for the task they are performing. Material Safety Data Sheets,
Field Level Hazard Assessments and Safe Job Procedures should identify
the specific PPE which is required.
To maximize effectiveness, Eye and Face Protection must always be used
for its intended purpose and in the proper manner.
Dark lens safety glasses are not to be used for general tasks while
working indoors, in low light conditions or in the dark.
Welding and cutting operations present a serious hazard to employees
eyes and must be treated accordingly. See CSA Standard W177.2, Code
for Safety in Welding and Cutting and Table 3 for the appropriate shade of
protective lens.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
24 of 30
Table 3: Selection of Shaded Lenses for Welding and Cutting

Operations.
Welding/Cutting Operation
Shade Required
Soldering
2
Torch Brazing
3 or 4
Oxy/Acetylene Cutting
Up to 1/8 inch.
3 or 4
1/8 inch to 1/2 inch
4 or 5
6 inches and over
5 or 6
Gas Welding
Up to 1/8 inch.
4 or 5
1/8 inch to 1/2 inch
4 or 5
1/2 inch and over
6 or 8
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Electrodes 1/16, 3/32,1/8, 5/32
10
3/16, 7/32, 1/4
12
5/16, 1/4
14
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Non-Ferrous
11
Ferrous
12
Plasma Arc Welding and Cutting
12
Atomic Hydrogen Welding
10 to 14
Carbon Arc Welding
14
Air Carbon Arc Welding
14
Note: These recommendations may be varied to suite the individuals needs.
Contact Lenses
If a Worker must wear contact lenses in order to obtain adequate optical
correction, a written statement from the Workers optometrist must be
presented to supervision. A copy of the statement will be placed in the
workers personal file.
Safety glasses with side shields or safety goggles must be worn where
required, in addition to the contact lenses by those workers authorized to
wear contact lenses. All those given approval to wear contact lenses must
wear some indication to that effect, such as a medic alert bracelet or
necklace.
Warning: The wearing of contact lenses must not violate client policy.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
25 of 30
Maintenance
Individuals are responsible for the cleaning and care of Eye and Face
Protection. Safety glasses, safety goggles and face shields which are
scratched or damaged will be disposed of in such a manner that others
cannot use them and be replaced immediately.
6.7
Foot Protection
All Foot Protection shall be CSA Grade 1 approved. Foot Protective
Equipment must be worn while working in or passing through designated
work areas. Designation of Foot Protection areas will be determined by
project management. Management will ensure that protective footwear
worn by Workers offers sufficient protection to minimize exposure to foot
injuries. Footwear selection will be based on the type of work expected to
be performed by employees. The type of work performed may also dictate
the need for additional protection such as metatarsal protection, electrical
protection, chemical protection, slide resistance or weather protection.
It is recommended that boots with a raised heel be worn and boots will be
fully laced and tied.
Protective footwear alone cannot be relied on to safeguard Workers. It is
essential to practice safe working methods, the need for incident
prevention, hazard assessment and constant care.
Exemptions
Foot Protection is not required in offices, lunch rooms, rest rooms,
change/locker rooms or specifically designated walkways unless
Any suitable footwear which offers adequate ankle stability and does not
pose a slipping or tripping hazard due to its design may be worn in the
exempt areas.
Maintenance
Workers are to inspect Foot Protection regularly for damage or defects.
Workers must repair or replace worn or defective footwear. Foot
Protection must be replaced when the heels or soles show excessive wear
or when toe caps are showing through the leather.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.8
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
26 of 30
Hand Protection
All personnel will wear Hand Protection appropriate to the hazards likely to
be encountered while at a work site, handling equipment or materials or
performing tasks which are hazardous to the hands. Hand Protection
shall be considered, and, where appropriate, specified in the Safe Job
Procedures.
NOTE: If there is a danger that a workers hand, arm leg or torso may be
injured, an employer must ensure that the worker wears properly fitting
hand, arm, leg or body protective equipment that is appropriate to the
work, the work site and the hazards identified.
Each project must ensure appropriate standards and Safe Job Procedures
are established to reflect this
Exemptions
Tasks requiring the degree of finger dexterity impossible to achieve while
using hand protection.
Use
No single type of Hand Protection will offer protection in all situations.
Unique hazards and procedures may require special protection, e.g.
leather gloves are not made to protect against chemicals, gauntlet style
gloves are designed to protect the wearers wrists as well as the hands,
barrier creams may provide protection from some exposures, and wristlets
may also be used for wrist protection.
There are many types of Hand Protection available. It is important to use
Hand Protection that is appropriate to the work being done and the nature
of the hazards involved. For product and material handling, check the
appropriate MSDS recommendations. The HS&E Advisers may also be
contacted for advice in selecting the most appropriate Hand Protection for
specific applications.
Gloves are not to be recycled. Experience has shown that recycled
gloves have cause injuries due to the presence of embedded foreign
objects.
CAUTION: While performing certain work, the wearing of rings and
bracelets is not permitted. In all other situations the wearing of rings and
bracelets is highly discouraged due to the potential hazard associated with
getting them caught on protruding pieces of machinery or structures.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
27 of 30
Maintenance
Hand Protection can be disposable or non-disposable, depending on the
type and application. All Hand Protection will be inspected daily before
use. Damaged or defective Hand Protective Equipment shall be replaced.
Personal cleanliness is most important in the prevention of skin irritation.
Wash basins and hand cleaners are available in appropriate locations and
Workers should wash thoroughly as soon as possible after contact with
skin irritants, and immediately prior to any work breaks.
6.9
Specialty PPE
Specialty personal protective equipment (PPE) includes those items that
are used for unusual applications and may require specialized training on
use, care and maintenance. The use of specialty PPE may be required to
meet specific legislative or company standards, e.g. personal flotation
devices (PFDs) for work around water hazards.
Specialty items include but are not limited to:
High visibility vest;
PFDs;
Cooling vests/suits;
Welding leathers;
Disposable coveralls; and
Specialty gloves, e.g. High Voltage Gloves.
Exemptions
In the event that manufacturers instructions differ from OH&S Legislation
or this Companys Safe Job Procedures, a formal Job Safety Analysis
must be conducted to address the differences and ensure adequate
protection of personnel is provided.
Use
When the requirement to wear Specialty PPE has been identified and
before its use, the affected Workers shall receive proper training and
instruction on its use, care and maintenance. A user of Specialty PPE will
follow the manufacturers recommended practices and applicable
Company Safe Job Procedures, for its use and care, except as described
above in Exemptions.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 20, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B009
Page #
28 of 30
Specialty PPE shall be worn at all times by the affected Workers while
exposed to the hazard requiring its use.
Maintenance
Individual users are responsible to ensure that Specialty PPE receives the
proper cleaning and care. The manufacturers recommended practices for
maintenance and service must be followed.
Damaged items are to be removed from service and tagged Danger Do
Not Use and sent for repair or disposal.
6.10
Worker Fall Protection Equipment

See B005 Worker Fall Protection.
6.11
Traffic Control
If vehicle traffic at a work site is dangerous to workers on foot, in vehicles
or on equipment, an employer must ensure that the traffic is controlled to
protect workers.
An employer must ensure a worker on foot and exposed to traffic wears a
Highly visible piece of clothing. A worker on foot and exposed to traffic
must wear a highly visible piece of clothing. If a worker is designated by
an employer to control traffic, the employer must ensure that the
designated traffic controller wears a highly visible piece of clothing.
Appendix:
Health Questionnaire For Fitness To Wear A Respirator
Respirator Fit Test
HEALTH QUESTIONNAIRE FOR FITNESS TO WEAR A RESPIRATOR

Introduction
There are many health conditions that do not put you at risk when carrying out your normal, daily activities. However, the combination of a
health condition when using respiratory protective equipment (RPE) could put you at risk of a life-threatening illness or injury. That is why it is
important that you thoroughly read and carefully answer the questions on this questionnaire. If a health condition of concern is identified, you
must be deemed medically fit by a health care professional before performing any work that require you to wear a respirator.
Note: If you have any concerns about your ability and medical fitness to wear a respirator at any time, you may request an assessment by a
Health Services Provider.
Instructions
Read the questionnaire and check any health concerns that are applicable.
Name
ID Number
Date of Birth (mm/dd/yyyy)

Yes
History and Personal

Experience
Medical History
Health Status
No
Have you worn RPE in the Past

If yes:
Have you ever been excluded from wearing RPE or had medical restrictions?
Have you ever had any problems or difficulties wearing or fitting RPE in the past?
Have you ever had to remove your respirator because of difficulties or in the middle of a
practice/training session before the appropriate time?
Do you have now, or ever had, any of the following problems or medical conditions?
Lung/breathing problems, (e.g. asthma, shortness of breath, wheezing, persistent

coughing/coughing blood, chronic bronchitis, emphysema, silicosis, asbestosis, allergies, hay
fever, pneumonia. Tuberculosis, lung cancer, lung surgery, pneumothorax (collapsed lung), and
other chest injury)?
Heart/blood vessel problems, (e.g. chest pain/tightness, angina, heart attack, high blood
pressure, high cholesterol, heartburn/indigestion not related to eating, heart irregularities
irregular. fast rate, skipped/missed beats, palpitations, - heart failure, swelling in legs/feet,
pacemaker)?
Brain conditions (e.g. seizures/epilepsy, sudden loss of consciousness/fainting, claustrophobia,

anxiety/panic attacks, fear of heights, dizziness/lightheadedness, brain attack/stroke)?
Metabolism conditions (e.g. diabetes, thyroid condition)?
Skin problems, unusual facial features, or dentures/missing teeth, which might affect RPE face
seal?
Loss of, or reduced, sense of smell or taste?
Heat exhaustion or heat stroke?
Drug or alcohol problem?
Muscle/bone problems (e.g. back condition, mobility/physical problems)?
Do you have any concerns about your medical fitness to wear a respirator?
Has there been any recent change in your health status (including use of prescription or overthe-counter medications)?
Have you had an extended absence or time off work for medical reasons?
Have you been hospitalized/had surgery?
Comments: Please respond to yes responses
IMPORTANT
By signing this form you:
a) Confirm that the answers to the above questions are complete and accurate to the best of your knowledge
b) Consent to the Company to collect and use the personal information that has been disclosed by yourself above or that may hereafter be
disclosed by yourself for the purpose of assessing your medical fitness to wear a respirator.
I understand that the Company will otherwise keep this personal information confidential by storing it in my personal file.
Signature:
Date:
RESPIRATOR FIT TEST

Name:
ID Number:
Date of Birth (mm/dd/yyyy)
Company Name:
Job Title:
Respirator Make:
Respirator Model:
Evaluation of Wearer
Clean Shaven
Glasses
Yes
No
Yes
No
Mustache
Dentures
Yes
No
Yes
No
Facial Scars
Health Questionnaire
Completed
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Other
Comments:
Worker Trained In:

Inspection Care and
Maintenance
Yes
No
Yes
No
Indications for Cartridge

Change
Yes
No
Negative
Pressure
Positive Pass
Pressure
Donning of Respirator
Appropriate Use & Limitations

Conducting Field Fit Check
Hazards & Emergency
Procedures
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Pass
Fail
Fit Test
Pass
Fail
Fail
Smoke Irritant
Bitrex
ALL OF THE ABOVE HAS BEEN EXPLAINED TO ME AND I CLEARLY

UNDERSTAND MY RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE RESPIRATORY
PROTECTION PROGRAM
Employee Signature:
Employee Name:
(please print)
Training & Fit Test
Conducted by:
Date:
Date:
Title:

Title:
Safety Recognition Program
Effective Date : May 18 2009
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
1 of 7

Title:
Revision # 0
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
2 of 7
DESCRIPTION

Title:

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
3 of 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................6

Title:
1.0
Section: B010

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
4 of 7
INTRODUCTION
Providing employees with recognition for working safely is an important part of
our overall HS&E program. Workers want to know that their contributions are
recognized and appreciated. A simple thank you is often sufficient but to follow
that up with an award is also important. Studies have shown that if you reward
positive behaviors and performance workers are more likely to respond and
repeat such performance.
NOTE: The Safety Recognition Program is administered at managements
discretion and may be terminated without notice.
2.0
PURPOSE
3.0
SCOPE
4.0
Establish HS&E recognition criteria.

Identify who is entitled to receive awards.
Specify the recognition processes and how to obtain awards.
All salaried employees

All hourly employees
Not in scope are:
o Sub-Contractors; and
o site/project specific HS&E awards programs.
Other procedures that apply:
o A009 - Incident Reporting, Recording and Investigation, and
o A011 Standard for Injury/Illness classification.
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Allocated Award Points - For each hour of safe work an employee is

awarded one point.
4.2
Incidents - Class 1, 2 and 3 incidents are used to determine employee

point reduction.
4.3
Eligible Employee - An employee that maintains continuous employment

without a three month consecutive leave period.

Title:
4.4
5.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
5 of 7
Reasonable Management Control (RMC) A process that is used to

classify injuries or illness for statistical purposes.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Vice President
5.2
Program Administrator
5.3
Overall responsibility to administer the HS&E Safety Recognition

Program.
Assigns point reductions and notifies the Program Administrator if an
employee loses allocated award points due to an incident.
Ensures that HS&E orientation program addresses HS&E Safety
Recognition Program.
Approves earned points for special HS&E activities.
Project Manager/Superintendent
5.5
Ensures safe hours worked are captured on pay stubs.

Ensures upkeep of tracking system and eligibility.
Notifies 3rd party vendor to release awards to approved employees.
Ensure that payroll is advised of any employee who has been
terminated for cause.
5.4
Ensures adequate funding for awards program

Approves dollar value for each milestone level
Distribute HS&E safety recognition awards to workers.

Recommend additional earned points for special HS&E activities.
Workers
Submits request to 3rd party vendor to redeem allocated HS&E award

points.
Participate in extra activities to earn safe work points.
Notify head office regarding changes to contact information.
Redeem allocated HS&E point in specified time frame.

Title:
6.0

Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
6 of 7
PROCEDURE
Employees will collect one point for every safe hour worked.
Employees can accumulate a maximum of 50,000 points at which time the

employee will redeem points.
Employees who are eligible can redeem their points in May and November
Once a milestone is achieved, a notification in the form of a gift certificate will
be sent to site.
Employees will have two weeks to select an award from the website or the
onsite award binder (If an award is not selected by the expiry date listed on
the notification gift certificate, the employee will not receive an award for that
milestone level.
Any award with a dollar value of $500.00 or more, including taxes, is a

taxable benefit, as per The Canadian Payroll Association Year End 2007 &
New Year Requirements Section 1, item 2 Gifts and Rewards.
Employees who are on long term leave (i.e. Maternity Leave or non work
related LTD) will not accumulate points during this absence, but can redeem
points that have been previously earned /accumulated. Upon return
employees will start to accumulate points. The employees points will be
maintained if not used during this absence.
When employment is terminated for cause, employees will lose all points.
When an employee is involved in an incident the HS&E manager determines

if employees points are reduced based on the cause of the incident.
Employees who receive first aid treatment, receives a speeding ticket in a

company vehicle, commits a policy infraction, etc will be deducted 2,000
points.
Employees who are involved with a medical aid incident will be deducted
3,000 points.

Title:
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B010
Page #
7 of 7
Employees who are put on modified work, have an at fault vehicle incident,
violates the drug and alcohol policy or cell phone policy, etc will lose all their
points and start from zero.
Note: For injury/illness type incidents the final RMC MAY NOT be used to
downgrade from a Class 1, 2 or 3, It is at the discretion of the HS&E Manager to
determine the final class of an injury or illness and how its impacts and
employees safety awards points.
For redeeming your earned points

Log onto the company web site.
Click the shopping cart icon.
Select award based on points earned.
You may also order from the on site awards binder
The Program Administrator will be sent an e-mail to approve and track
points by the third party vendor.
o Once approved the awards are sent to the corporate office for
distribution.
o
o
o
o
o
NOTE: For employees who have earned and ordered an award but are not
available at work, the award will be available at the Northern corporate office for
a period of four weeks.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
Asbestos Abatement
Issued: October 2, 2006
1 of 38
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
REV No. AFFECTED PAGE(S) DATE
Controlled Document
Page #
DESCRIPTION
May 18, 2009 4.2 Health Affects
May 18, 2009 4.3 Health affects
May 18, 2009 Addition of Vermiculite
12,13
July 15, 2012
Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
6.4 Asbestos awareness training
2 of 38

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
3 of 38
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 10

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
4 of 38
INTRODUCTION
Maintenance and construction activities, such as asbestos abatement or
containment can have a significant impact on workers health and our
environment. Poor project design or lack of knowledge can result in unnecessary
and potentially harmful, asbestos exposures to workers, the general public,
plants and animals. Project managers, safety and environmental professionals,
maintenance personnel, as well as contractors, need to understand the
implications of asbestos activities and the techniques / methods and technology
available to undertake such work in a manner which minimizes occupational and
environmental exposures.
2.0
PURPOSE
To provide procedures to ensure the safety and health of employees who
perform asbestos abatement or perform activities to support asbestos abatement
operations.
3.0
4.0
SCOPE
3.1
Applies to all employees and subcontractors engaged in operations or

activities under the direction of this company.
3.2
Additional procedures support that apply to the Asbestos Abatement

Procedure:
Respiratory Protection Procedure
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Asbestos - is the term used to identify a family of naturally occurring

fibrous hydrated silicates which are divided on the basis of mineralogical
features into two groups: serpentines (curly fibres) and amphiboles
(straight fibres).
4.2
Chrysotile - or white asbestos is of the serpentine group. Ninety percent

of the asbestos production in the world is chrysotile. Long term exposure
may cause Asbestosis, asbestos airway disease, carcinoma of the lungs,
and peritoneal mesothelioma.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
5 of 38
4.3
Amphibole - asbestos fibres are straight and needle-like and as a result

of this characteristic have a greater tendency to become airborne.
Examples of amphibole asbestos are:
Amosite - (brown asbestos);
Crocidolite (blue asbestos); and
Actinolite, anthophyllite, and tremolite have been used to a lesser
extent in industries. Vermiculite insulation may also contain tremolite
asbestos and was sold under the brand name Zonolite Over
exposure to these types of asbestos can cause damage to lungs, lung
cancer and mesothelioma of the pleura and peritoneum, pleural
thickening plaques and effusion.
4.4
Low Risk Asbestos Abatement -
4.5
Removing non-friable products (that are in good condition)

manufactured from asbestos-containing materials without cutting,
breaking, sanding or vibrating the materials. This includes handling
products such as gaskets (30 cm diameter or less), vinyl asbestos floor
tile, asbestos cement products, millboard (transite) and asbestos
cement piping.
Work done in proximity to friable asbestos that does not require

contacting the asbestos.
Using non-powered hand tools designed to cut, drill or abrade a nonfriable manufactured product containing asbestos, as long as water or
Hepa vacuum is used to control fibre release and waste products are
controlled.
Set up and dismantling of an asbestos enclosure.
The transportation or handling of asbestos-containing materials in

sealed containers.
Moderate Risk Asbestos Abatement
Using non-powered hand tools to cut, shape, drill or remove a nonfriable manufactured product containing asbestos if water is not used
to control fibre release.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
4.6
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
6 of 38
Using a mechanical or electrically powered tool, fitted with a HEPA

filter dust collector, to cut, shape or grind non-friable manufactured
products containing asbestos.
Removing all or part of a false ceiling to gain access to a work area

and where friable asbestos-containing materials are, or are likely to be,
lying on the surface of the false ceiling.
Removing, encapsulating, enclosing or disturbing minor areas (less

than 0.09 m2 (1ft2) of friable asbestos-containing material during the
repair, alteration, maintenance, demolition or dismantling of a building,
structure, machine, tool or equipment, or parts of it.
Performing glovebag operations. Dry buffing and stripping of vinyl

asbestos tile. Renovation or hand demolition involving drywall joint
compound, block mortar, stucco, or brick mortar products containing
asbestos.
Removal of 9.3 m2 (100 ft2) or less of contiguous ceiling tile containing

asbestos or sheet vinyl flooring/vinyl floor tiles having an asbestos
backing.
Dry removal of non-friable asbestos material where the material may

be cut, broken, or otherwise damaged during removal.
High Risk Asbestos Abatement
Removing, encapsulating or enclosing areas 0.09m2 (1 ft2) in size or

greater of friable asbestos-containing materials during the repair,
alteration, maintenance, demolition, or dismantling of a building,
structure, machine, tool or equipment, or part of it.
Cleaning, maintaining or removing air-handling equipment in buildings

where sprayed fireproof asbestos-containing material has been applied
to airways or ventilation ducts.
Repairing, altering or dismantling a boiler, furnace, kiln or similar

device, or part thereof, where asbestos-containing materials have been
used or applied.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
5.0
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
7 of 38
Demolishing, dismantling, altering or repairing any building or

structure, or part of it, in which insulating material containing asbestos
was used or in which asbestos products were manufactured.
Removal of more than 9.3 m2 (100 ft2) of contiguous ceiling tile

containing asbestos or sheet vinyl flooring having an asbestos backing.
Dry removal of friable asbestos-containing material.
Abatement activities involving any type of project where there is a

reasonable chance of the concentration of airborne asbestos being at
least 50 percent of the 8-hour OEL, which is 0.1 f/cc: i.e. a restricted
area.
4.7
OEL- The Occupational Exposure Limit in respect to a substance,

meaning the 8-hour time weighted average exposure limit for a given
substance as defined by Occupational Health and Safety Codes and
Regulations.
4.8
Acute Term used to define short term effects that may be encountered
by workers exposed to a substance.
4.9
Chronic Term used to define long term effects that may be encountered
4.10
Containment Method of enclosure to eliminate migration of fibre to

another part of the work area. Typically undertaken in conjunction with air
filtration systems.
4.11
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Arresting Type of filter utilized for

elimination of airborne fibres and particulates. Used in filter systems for
air handling units, vacuums and respirators.
4.12
Exposed Worker means a worker who may reasonably be expected to

work in a restricted area at least 30 work days in a 12-month period.
4.13
Asbestos Waste is a waste containing more than 1 percent asbestos by

weight.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
5.2
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Approve any deviation from this procedure.
Coordinate medical evaluations of exposed workers.
Section: B011
Page #
8 of 38
Project or Construction Management/Superintendent
Ensure all asbestos abatement work is performed in compliance with

this procedure.
Submit the Asbestos Project Notification Form to Workplace Health

and Safety where required.
Provide for a third party company or ensure the client has provided air
monitoring where required.
Ensure all HEPA-filtered equipment has been tested and certified

where required.
Ensure when using client asbestos abatement procedures that they

meet the minimum standards of this procedure.
Ensure all workers who perform asbestos abatement procedures are

adequately trained and certified in provinces that require certification.
Evaluate and ensure emergency services are in place.
Ensure asbestos abatement locations have appropriate signage in

place.
Ensure that the tools, equipment and PPE are in good condition and
made available to the workers.
Ensure tools, equipment and PPE comply with all CSA and OH&S

equipment and PPE.
Ensure adequate training for use of all PPE is provided.
Effective Date:
5.3
5.4
Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 38
Visually inspect the work sites to ensure asbestos-containing debris

has been cleaned up.
Initiate action to correct unsatisfactory tool/equipment and PPE use.
Verify that the workers are qualified to perform asbestos abatement

and understand the correct use of all PPE.

requirements.
Conduct site inspections during the project.
Ensure all tools and PPE are inspected and that inspections are
documented.
Ensure any tools or PPE that are defective are removed from service
and tagged.
Ensure all workers are aware of potential hazards associated with

exposure to asbestos.
Ensure workers are familiar with the Respirator Protection Procedure

and are adequately trained and fit tested.
Employees / Workers
Cooperate with the employer in following all requirements of the

Occupational Health & Safety Acts and Codes and the requirements of
this procedure.
Use tools and PPE appropriately and as per this procedure.
Inspect tools and PPE before each use.
Tag and remove from service, all defective tools or PPE.
Be trained in asbestos abatement.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
5.5
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
10 of 38
Report all hazards or concerns to supervision.
Conduct FLHA prior to performing asbestos abatement.
Be familiar with the companies Respiratory Protection Procedure and

be fit tested for the respiratory protective equipment being utilized.
Will conduct compliance inspections.
Will assist Site Management and Supervisors to ensure compliance

with this Asbestos Abatement Procedure.
Will provide respirator training and fit testing.
6.0
May 18, 2009
Section: B011
PROCEDURES
6.1
Emergency Procedures: Medical

Workers must be trained how to respond in the event of a serious medical
emergency. Emergency telephone numbers for fire and ambulance
services will be posted at the work site.
A serious injury or life-threatening hazard like fire is a more immediate
health concern than short-term asbestos exposure. The respirator should
not be removed from an ill or injured worker unless the injury or illness is
life threatening. The ill or injured worker should be removed from the
contaminated area to the clean room unless the worker has sustained a
head, neck or back injury. Moving the worker minimizes exposing
emergency response personnel and their equipment to asbestos. Noninjured workers responding to the ill or injured worker must decide if there
is time to decontaminate the worker.
6.2
Emergency Procedures: Fire

Fire can create an immediate danger to life or health. An emergency plan
must be in place and workers must be trained in the procedure to follow.
A fire hazard may become so severe for example, that workers may need
to break through the polyethylene barriers. Workers must be familiar with
work site fire alarms. Exit routes will be identified prior to work starting
and clearly marked within the work area.

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Page #
Controlled Document
11 of 38
Workers should be aware that some of the protective clothing they

routinely use will melt easily, shrink, adhere to the skin and drip as it
burns.
6.3
Emergency Procedures:
Containing Materials
Uncontrolled
Release
of
Asbestos-
In a situation where there is an uncontrolled release of asbestoscontaining material in the workplace or to the environment, the Project
Manager, Corporate HS&E Manager and the client/owner are to be
notified immediately. Either the Project Manager or Corporate HS&E
Manager or their senior management has the authority to allocate required
resources to manage the incident. Initial response to the incident will
consist of:
Stopping all abatement activities.
Isolation of the incident scene.
A hazard assessment and classification of risk level.
Donning of appropriate personal protective equipment. Workers are
not to be put at risk of exposure.
Containment and clean up of the contaminated material.
Conduct environmental testing.
An uncontrolled release of asbestos-containing materials would constitute
an incident requiring notification to senior management, followed by an
incident investigation and report.
6.4
Worker Training
All personnel performing tasks in relation to the disturbance of asbestos
and all workers with related duties (e.g. Rescue Workers) must receive
training specific to asbestos abatement. Every worker who performs
asbestos abatement must be aware of the hazards of the controlled
product and how to safely perform assigned duties.
In provinces that have regulated asbestos abatement training, each
worker will comply with the provincial regulations prior to performing
asbestos abatement. In provinces that do not utilize a government
approved asbestos abatement training program, the management will
ensure the workers are adequately trained to perform the task safely.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
12 of 38
Asbestos Awareness Training

Asbestos awareness training is required for employees whose work
activities may come into contact with asbestos containing materials (ACM)
or presumed asbestos containing material (PACM).
Asbestos is the common name given to a group of naturally occurring
mineral silicates that can be separated into flexible fibers. The name
asbestos comes from the Greek word meaning unquenchable or
indestructible.
Asbestos is found in veins in the host rock and produced in a
commercially useful form by open pit mining and successive stages of
crushing and aspiration of the ore. The fibers are then sealed in plastic
bags for use in the manufacture of products containing asbestos.
Asbestos has historically been used in the manufacture of heat-resistant
clothing, automotive brake and clutch linings, and a variety of building
materials including insulation, soundproofing, floor tiles, roofing felts,
ceiling tiles, asbestos-cement, pipe, a sheeting and fire-resistant drywall.
Asbestos may also be present in pipe and boiler insulation materials,
pipeline wrap, and in sprayed on materials located on beams, in crawl
spaces, and between walls.
Friable asbestos material can be crumbled with hand pressure and is
therefore likely to emit fibers. The fibrous or fluffy sprayed on materials
used for fireproofing, insulation, or sound proofing are friable, and they
readily release airborne fibers is disturbed. Materials such as vinylasbestos floor tile or roofing felts are considered non-friable and generally
do not emit airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding or sawing
operations. Asbestos-cement pipe or sheeting can emit airborne fibers if
the materials are cut, abraded, or sawed, or if they are broken during
demolition operations.
Asbestos must be inhaled to cause disease. Intact and undisturbed
asbestos presents no direct health hazard but does present a potential
exposure hazard should fibers be released and inhales. As a result, there
is some risk associated with all asbestos installations.
Asbestos fibers, unlike man-made fibers such as fiberglass, can be split
into thinner and thinner fibers parallel to their length. The average

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
13 of 38
diameter of an airborne asbestos fiber ranges from 0.11 to 0.24

micrometers in diameter (more than 300 times thicker).
Asbestos- related diseases are caused by asbestos fiber that are inhaled
and settle in the lungs. Once embedded in lung tissue, the fiber may
remain within the body for extended periods. How far asbestos fibers
penetrate into lung tissue depends on their length, diameter and shape.
Longer fibers are screened more effectively by the nasal hairs.
Prolonged exposure to asbestos fibers has been shown to cause
asbestosis, mesothelioma, and various other types of cancer. Asbestosis
was first identified in1930, but the cancer producing potential of asbestos
was not established until 1949. It was not until 1960 that the association
between malignant plural mesothelioma (a cancer of the lining of the
lungs) and asbestos exposure was generally recognized.
Asbestosis is a condition associated with exposure to high concentrations
of airborne asbestos. It is an irreversible, fatal disease. Early symptoms of
the disease- shortness of breath, often accompanied by a dry cough
usually develops 10 to 25 years after exposure.
Lung cancer takes approximately 15 to 25 years to develop, depending on
the frequency and duration of exposure. Exposure to asbestos fibers for
four to six months may be sufficient to cause lung cancer.
Other cancers related to asbestos exposure include cancer of the larynx,
trachea, stomach, colon and rectum.
Employees must observe posted signs and/or labels identifying asbestos
containing material (ACM) and/or presumed asbestos containing material
(PACM). ACM and PACM must NOT be disturbed. If you are unsure as to
whether or not a product contains asbestos, DO NOT DISTURB IT, and
DO NOT TOUCH IT. Contact your supervisor for direction.
6.5
Worker Health Assessment

In provinces required by legislation, each worker must undergo a health
assessment within 30 days of becoming an exposed worker, and every
two years thereafter. The assessment must be conducted by a qualified
physician and consists of a chest x-ray, including radiologists report, a
pulmonary function test and workers work history.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
14 of 38
The worker may refuse the test by submitting a written refusal to the
company. The records must be kept confidential unless the worker has
given written permission for access by another person or the records are
in a form that do not identify the worker.
6.6
Asbestos Abatement Methods

There are four basic approaches to controlling exposure:
6.7
Removal asbestos-containing materials are completely removed and

properly disposed of.
Encapsulation asbestos-containing materials are coated with a
bonding agent called a sealant.
Enclosure asbestos-containing materials are separated from the
building environment by barriers.
Management Plan the area is inspected periodically for changes in
exposure potential and workers are correctly notified and trained to
deal with the asbestos-containing materials. A management plan can
be used to deal with asbestos-containing materials that do not pose a
risk, or for materials remaining after remedial actions have reduced the
potential for exposure.
Waste Transport and Disposal

Asbestos waste will be stored, transported and disposed of in sealed
containers that are impervious to asbestos and asbestos waste. Although
asbestos waste does not require a manifest, a shipping document must
accompany the waste to the landfill.
The shipping requirements and documentation may vary from province to
province and must be assessed prior to shipping. The vehicle must be
placarded to identify the hazardous waste.
6.8
Asbestos Abatement Procedures

Asbestos abatement procedures vary depending on the type, amount and
location of the asbestos. In general, the procedures can be divided into
three categories low risk, moderate risk and high risk according to their
potential for generating airborne asbestos fibres.
6.9
Special Cases
Removal of numerous forms of asbestos-containing products, from
various types of facilities, under a wide variety of circumstances, creates

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
15 of 38
numerous special cases requiring non-standard approaches. However,

the four basic principles of handling asbestos should always be followed.
1. isolate the work area;
2. protect workers;
3. minimize the release of fibres; and
4. ensure adequate clean-up and decontamination.
6.10
Procedure for Low Risk Asbestos Abatement Activities

A.
Equipment
B.
vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter;

polyethylene drop sheets having a minimum 6 mil thickness;
6 mil thick labeled asbestos disposable bags, or 6 mil poly;
spray bottle or hand pump garden sprayer to wet asbestos;
barriers and warning signs;
non-powered hand tools for abatement work;
mops and/or rags and water for clean-up;
fire extinguisher
first aid kit
Personal protective equipment

Workers who may be exposed to asbestos fibres will wear:
C.
a NIOSH-approved half mask air purifying respirator equipped

with a P100 (Oil proof), R100 (Resistant to oil) particulate filter;
disposable coveralls over work clothing

contamination of the workers clothing; and
personal protective equipment appropriate to the other hazards

present at the work site. E.g. Safety glasses/goggles, hard hat,
fall protection etc.
to
prevent
Pre-job planning
Assemble the equipment required to perform the job.
Ensure/confirm a completed Asbestos Project Notification Form

has been submitted to Workplace Health and Safety 72 hours

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
16 of 38
before workers may be exposed to airborne fibres, including setup operations that may release fibres, if required by legislation.
Site preparation
Barriers and warning signs will be positioned in areas where access
needs to be restricted until the work is completed.
D.
E.
Work procedures
Conduct FLHA
Dry removal of asbestos-containing material is not permitted if

fibre will be released. Localized wetting of the material must be
done to minimize fibre release.
Remove all visible dust on work surfaces with a damp cloth or a

vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter. HEPA vacuuming is
the preferred method of cleaning. Wet wiping using a damp
cloth method will only be used with frequent water changes and
rinsing.
Where necessary, use plastic drop sheets or similar materials to

prevent the spread of asbestos dust to other work areas.
When non-powered hand tools are used to cut, shape or drill a

non-friable manufactured product containing asbestos, the
product will be wetted whenever possible to minimize the
release of airborne fibres. If the material cannot be wetted, the
work must be classified as moderate risk and moderate risk
abatement procedures followed.
No person may eat, drink, smoke, or chew gum or tobacco at

the work site except in a designated clean area. Workers must
remove protective equipment and clothing and clean their hands
and faces prior to any of these activities.
Decontamination
During and immediately upon completing the work:

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
17 of 38
clean up dust and waste by vacuuming with a vacuum cleaner

fitted with a HEPA filter, by wet wiping or by damp mopping.
Note: Wet wiping will always be followed by HEPA vacuuming.
lock down of abated substrate with an approved encapsulent:

and
drops sheets must be wetted, folded in on themselves to contain

dust, properly bagged and disposed of as asbestos waste.
WARNING:
Compressed air must not be used to clean up or remove dust
from work surfaces or clothing. Cleaning must be done with
a vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter, by wet sweeping or
by damp mopping.
Clothing contaminated with asbestos must be laundered at an
approved facility for the task.
Footwear will be properly
decontaminated.
F.
G.
Disposal
Waste material from within the enclosed asbestos work area

must be placed in impervious containers (doubled Polyethylene
bags at least 6 mil thick are acceptable or an equivalent), sealed
and clearly labeled to indicate
a) they contain asbestos;
b) asbestos is carcinogenic; and
c) asbestos fibres should not be inhaled.
Clean the external surface of sealed containers of asbestos

waste by wiping with a damp cloth that is also to be disposed of
as asbestos waste, or by using a vacuum cleaner fitted with a
HEPA filter, before the containers leave the contaminant area.
Air monitoring
If required by legislator or owner/client, air monitoring will be
performed. Air monitoring is useful in determining typical exposure

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
18 of 38
levels during the performance of abatement activities.

Air
monitoring results will be below 0.01 fibres per cubic centimeter
during all phases of the work.
H.
Site inspection
Upon completion of the work, the work area must be visually
inspected to ensure that all visible asbestos-containing debris has
been properly cleaned up.
6.11
Procedures for Moderate Risk Asbestos Abatement Activities

A.
Equipment
B.
vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter;

polyethylene drop sheets having a minimum 6 mil thickness;
6 mil thick labeled asbestos disposable bags or 6 mil poly;
spray bottle or hand pump garden sprayer to wet asbestos;
powered tools equipped with Hepa filtration for abatement work;
mops and/or rags and water for clean-up;
sprayer (garden type or powered) for wetting agent and/or
encapsulent
fire extinguisher; and
appropriate first aid kit

Workers exposed to asbestos fibres will wear protective clothing
that:
a) is made of disposable material that resists penetration by
asbestos fibres;
b) covers the body and fits snugly at the neck wrist, and ankles;
c) covers the head and feet (laceless rubber boots are
recommended); and
d) is immediately repaired or replaced if torn
The wearing of disposable coveralls is required. Street clothes will
not be worn under disposable coveralls if work is conducted inside
a containment.

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
19 of 38
A NIOSH-approved respirator equipped with a P100 (Oil proof),

R100 (Resistant to oil) or N100 (Not resistant to oil) particulate filter
must be worn. Disposable, single use respirators must not be
used. The respirator selected must have a sufficient protection
factor to provide adequate protection for the fibre levels
encountered during the project
Personal protective equipment such as safety boots, hard hats, etc.
appropriate to the other hazards present at the work site must be
used. If other airborne contaminants are also present, respiratory
protective equipment appropriate to those hazards is necessary.
C.
D.
Pre-job planning
Where required by legislation, submit a completed Asbestos

Project Notification Form to Workplace Health and Safety 72
hours before workers may be exposed to airborne fibres,
including set-up operations that may release fibres.
Ensure all equipment fitted with HEPA filters has been tested
before the job commences.
Ensure that building occupants, trades people, etc. are notified

in advance of the location, duration and type of work to be
performed.
Procedures to deal with emergencies such as a fire or injury

must be developed and in place prior to work starting. Where a
containment is used for moderate risk work, a worker should be
stationed outside the containment to respond to emergencies
and contact rescue personnel, if required.
Site preparation
Barriers and warning signs will be posted in areas where access to
unauthorized persons needs to be restricted until the work is
completed. The signs will read as follows and include the name of
a contact person on-site.
Caution

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
Revision # 2
May 18, 2009
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
20 of 38
Asbestos Dust Hazard

Avoid Breathing Dust
Wear Protective Equipment
Breathing Asbestos Dust May
Cause Cancer
Entry is Prohibited
Except to Authorized Persons
Eating, Drinking and Smoking
Are Prohibited in this Area
E.
Cleary mark the boundary of the work area by placing

barricades, fencing or similar structures around it.
Prior to starting any work that is likely to disturb friable

asbestos-containing materials, the materials must be cleaned by
damp wiping or vacuuming with a vacuum cleaner fitted with a
HEPA filter.
All air handling and ventilation systems that could cause

asbestos fibres to be distributed, or become airborne as a result
of the work will be shut down before work begins.
Lock-out and isolate all electrical and mechanical equipment

within the work area.
Electrical power for abatement work will be supplied through a

ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI).
If required, a containment will be constructed using 6-mil thick

polyethylene sheeting. The containment will be less than 9.3 m2
(100 ft2) in size. A HEPA-filtered exhaust unit will be connected
to the containment to provide negative pressure for the duration
of the project. If a larger containment is needed, the project
may require re-classification as high risk.
A worker decontamination room should be attached to the

containment.
Work Procedures

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
21 of 38
Conduct FLHA
Wet material thoroughly before and during the work unless such
wetting creates a hazard to workers. Material will be wet but not
saturated, as this may cause delamination or disintegration of
the material.
WARNING:
Do not use compressed air to clean up or remove dust or
materials from work surfaces or clothing. Techniques which
generate excessive fibre levels should be avoided. Clean-up
techniques should include vacuuming with a vacuum cleaner
fitted with a HEPA filter, wet sweeping or damp mopping.
F.
Use plastic drop sheets and barriers to prevent the spread of

asbestos-containing dust to other work areas.
Do not allow asbestos waste to accumulate or dry out before

final bagging.
Once abatement work is complete, seal all rough edges or

surfaces containing asbestos-containing material at the edges
of the work area with an encapsulant.
If containment is constructed, apply a slow drying

sealant/encapsulant spray to its surfaces prior to dismantling it.
This ensures that non-visible asbestos fibres are bonded to the
surfaces of the containment and cannot become airborne.
If required by the client/owner or legislation and if a containment

is used, conduct a final air clearance after the required setting
period. This requirement may vary depending on the specific
project and may be defined by the project consultant.
Decontamination
Immediately upon completing the work:
clean up dust and waste by vacuuming with a vacuum cleaner
fitted with a HEPA filter, by wet wiping or by damp mopping: and

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
22 of 38
drop sheets must be wetted, folded in on themselves to contain

dust, properly bagged and disposed of as asbestos waste.
Before leaving the work area:

clean protective equipment and clothing before removing it from
the work area. Use a vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter
or wipe the equipment and clothing with a damp cloth;
G.
H.
leave all disposable protective clothing used during abatement

in the work area;
place protective clothing, if it will not be laundered and re-used,

in a sealable container and dispose of it as asbestos waste.
Clothing and protective equipment that is to be reused must be
laundered and cleaned using proper procedures; and
wash all exposed skin surfaces prior to removing respirators.

All persons in the work area must properly decontaminate
themselves prior to leaving the work area. This is to be done
under all circumstances, including prior to drinking, eating, using
a washroom, etc.
Disposal


HEPA filter, before the containers leave the contaminant
area/transfer room.
Air Monitoring

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
23 of 38
If required by the owner/client or legislation, air monitoring will be

performed.
Proper air monitoring requires that where practical, samples are
taken prior to work starting (baseline or background samples),
during abatement activities and upon completion of the job (after
the required drying period). Air monitoring must be performed by
competent personnel following NIOSH methods.
If fibre levels inside the work area exceed the protection factor of
the respiratory protective equipment being used, work must stop
until appropriate respirators are supplied and airborne fibre levels
can be controlled.
If fibre levels measured just outside the barriers exceed 50 percent
of the Occupational Exposure Limit (OEL), work practices must be
reviewed. If high levels continue, work must stop until the reasons
for the high levels are identified and corrected. If fibre levels
outside the work area approach the OEL, work must immediately
stop until the reasons for the high levels are identified and
corrected. Fibre levels outside the work area must never exceed
the OEL. Note that if fibre levels are approaching the OEL the work
area may need to be reclassified as high risk.
Final air monitoring test results should be less than 0.01 fibres per
cubic centimeter
I.
Site inspection
A visual inspection of the integrity of the containment, if one is
used, must be performed prior to work commencing. If the project
continues for more than one shift, the containment will be checked
for damage at the time of the shift change and repaired
immediately.
Upon completion of the work, the work area must be visually
inspected to ensure that all visible asbestos-containing debris has
been properly cleaned up and removed.
6.12
Procedures for High Risk Asbestos Abatement Activities

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
A.
May 18, 2009
Controlled Document
Page #
24 of 38
Equipment
B.
Revision # 2
Section: B011
portable HEPA-filtered exhaust units;

replacement HEPA filters;
flexible or rigid duct;
vacuum cleaners fitted with HEPA filters;
electrical extension cords;
portable ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI);
garden hose
hand pump garden sprayer to wet asbestos;
wetting agent (50 percent polyoxyethylene ether and 50 percent
polyoxyethylene, or equivalent);
scrapers, nylon brushes, dust pans, shovels, etc.;
scaffolds with railings;
duct tape or an alternative tape with similar or better adhesive
qualities;
polyethylene sheeting having a minimum 6 mil thickness;
6 mil thick labeled asbestos disposal bags or 6 mil poly;
mops and/or rags, water and other supplies for clean-up;
encapsulant for sealing edges;
manometer, pumps and smoke generator;
fire extinguisher; and
appropriate first aid kit

Workers exposed to asbestos fibres will wear protective clothing
that:
is made of disposable material that resists penetration by

asbestos fibres;
covers the body, head, wrists and ankles;
covers the head and feet (laceless rubber boots are
recommended; and
is immediately repaired or replaced if torn.
protects the feet, utilizing disposable boot covers or steel toe,
CSA approved rubber boots.
The wearing of disposable coveralls is required.

must not be worn under disposable coveralls.
Street clothes

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
25 of 38
If contaminated clothing is to be laundered, it must first be vacuum

cleaned, wetted down, placed in plastic bags. Sealed and labeled
prior to being sent to laundry facilities. On-site facilities are
preferred. Workers who launder the clothes must be informed of
the hazards of asbestos and the precautions required when
handling contaminated clothing. Contaminated clothing or towels
must not be taken home by workers for laundering.
During high risk abatement activities, acceptable respiratory
protection is a Powered Air Purifying Respirator (PAPR) or better,
equipped with a P100 (Oil proof), R100 (Resistant to oil) or N100
(Not resistant to oil) particulate filter. Positive pressure supplied air
respirators may be required if wet removal is impossible. In some
cases, dual cartridge half and full-face respirators with high
efficiency filters are acceptable.
The appropriate level of
respiratory protection can only be determined by conducting air
monitoring tests and calculating the protection factor needed.
However, where a level of protection lower than PAPR is chosen
for high-risk operation, the suitability of such equipment must be
assessed for the duration of the project. If fibre concentrations
increase, workers will need to switch to respiratory protective
equipment with a higher protection factor.
WARNING:
Disposable single-use respirators must not be used.
Half mask air purifying respirators equipped with a P100 (Oil proof),
R100 (Resistant to oil or N100 Not resistant to oil) particulate filters
can be used for the set-up and dismantling phases of the removal
project.
Protective clothing, respiratory protective equipment and asbestos
awareness training must be provided for authorized visitors.
Visitors will be accompanied at all times by competent personnel.
Workers must use body protection and safety equipment
appropriate to other hazards present at the work site.
C.
Pre-job planning


Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
D.
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
26 of 38
Where required by legislation, ensure/confirm a completed

Asbestos Project Notification Form to Workplace Health and
Safety has been submitted 72 hours before workers may be
exposed to airborne fibres, including set-up operations that may
release fibres.
Obtain the necessary building permit(s) by contacting the

municipality or accredited agency that issues building permits.
Have the following documentation available:

a) required permits
b) written lock-out-tag-out (LOTO) procedures
c) proof of worker training;
d) names of supervisory personnel;
e) drawings of work area layout/decontamination facility;
construction schedule;
f) certification of HEPA-filtered equipment; and
g) procedure for respiratory protection
h) current respiratory fit test documentation.
Ensure all HEPA-filtered equipment has been tested before the

job commences.
Ensure workers are adequately trained in the hazards and

proper methods of working with asbestos.
Ensure that building occupants, trades people, etc. are notified,

in advance, of the location, duration and type of work to be
performed.
Procedures to deal with emergencies such as a fire or injury

must be developed and in place prior to work starting. One
worker, who is appropriately trained, must be stationed outside
the containment to respond to emergencies and contact rescue
personnel if required. Workers inside the containment will have
some form of communication with the worker outside the
containment. Emergency exits will be clearly marked, both
inside and outside of the containment.
Site preparation

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
27 of 38
Isolate the asbestos work area by placing signs around it

warning persons not to enter the area unless authorized to do
so. The signs should read as follows and also include the name
of a contact person on-site.
Caution
Asbestos Dust Hazard
Avoid Breathing Dust
Wear Protective Equipment
Breathing Asbestos Dust May
Cause Cancer
Entry is Prohibited
Except to Authorized Persons
Eating, Drinking and Smoking

Are Prohibited in this Area
Cleary mark the boundary of the work area by placing

barricades, fencing or similar structures around it.
The entire work area will be enclosed to prevent the escape of

asbestos fibres. Use polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil thick,
or a similar impervious material, held in place with appropriate
tape and adhesive. It may be necessary to erect a temporary
wooden or metal frame to which the plastic barrier can be
attached. All joints should overlap by approximately 30 cm and
be taped to ensure the area is completely sealed off.
A HEPA-filtered exhaust unit must be installed to create a

negative air pressure of approximately 5 Pascal or 0.02 inches
water column within the enclosure relative to the surrounding
area. The exhaust unit must provide at least four complete air
changes per hour. In this arrangement, the major and usually
only route of air into the removal area is through the
decontamination unit.
A negative air pressure in the enclosed space relative to the

surrounding area must be maintained so that air flow is always
from clean outside areas into the contaminated area. Negative
pressure must be maintained in the enclosed space until site

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
28 of 38
decontamination work is complete and air monitoring tests

confirm fibre levels are low enough to permit dismantling of the
enclosure. Where practical, exhaust air form the enclosure
must be discharged to the outdoors through a HEPA filter. The
airflow pattern in the work area must ensure that the clean room
and shower room of the decontamination facility are safe for
workers who are not wearing respirators. The HEPA-filtered
exhaust unit must remain in continuous operation to maintain
negative pressure in the enclosure while the removal is in
progress and during clearance procedures after the removal.
Ideally, HEPA-filtered exhaust units will be positioned to allow

access to the filters from within the removal area, while the units
themselves are kept outside the removal area. This makes
decontamination of the units easier
Design of the enclosure should allow access to change filters.

Where it is not possible to change the filter while within the
removal area, a temporary enclosure will be constructed around
the unit during filter replacement.
Air filtration should consist of 3 stages, primary, secondary and

a final HEPA filter. HEPA filters must have a minimum filtration
efficiency of 99.97 percent. Where practical, the discharge point
for any exhaust unit will be to the outside air, away from other
work areas, air-conditioning inlets or breathing air compressors.
In the rare case where exhaust air cannot be discharged to the
outside, or where it must be discharged to areas close to
heating, ventilation or air conditioning (HVAC) inlets or breathing
air compressors, the discharge must be routinely monitored for
airborne asbestos.
D.O.P. testing of exhaust units must take place completely onsite, before the start of the job, once a year and possibly more
frequently as per provincial legislation or as required to ensure
the integrity of the HEPA unit. The best way to inspect the filter
and seal fittings is by using a static pressure alarm which
indicates a failure in the system.
If a complete enclosure cannot be constructed, cover any

windows and doors leading into the area with a plastic sheeting
barrier. Cut the plastic sheeting so it overlaps the framework of
the window or door by 10 to 15 cm. Ensure a good seal by

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
29 of 38
wiping the area around the window or door with a moist cloth so
that the tape sticks.
Seal off stairways and elevators. Where asbestos is removed

from an entire floor of a multi-story building, all passenger
elevators must be prevented from stopping at the floor.
Removal workers may gain access to the floor via the fire
staircase or from an elevator dedicated for this purpose.
Seal heating and ventilation ducts and close dampers to

eliminate air flow. Aside from specific asbestos exhaust units,
all ventilation and air conditioning equipment that services the
removal area must be shut down for the duration of the removal
job, if possible. All vents must be sealed to prevent asbestos
dust from getting into the duct network.
Use a layer of seamless or seam-sealed, fibre-reinforced

polyethylene sheeting on the floor of the containment, covered
by a second layer of at least 6 mil thick polyethylene sheeting.
Double-sided tape or adhesive may be used to prevent
movement between layers.
The floor covering may be
mechanically fastened as an alternative. A turn-up of 30 cm will
be used where the floor joins the walls. Sheeting covering the
walls will overlap the turn-ups on the inside of the containment
to prevent leaks of asbestos-contaminated water running
outside of the containment. Extra strength in the containment
floor can be achieved by running the double layers of plastic at
90 degrees to one another.
Power sources with ground fault circuit interrupters must be

used to protect workers against electric shock. All existing
electrical circuits or lighting must be physically locked-out to
prevent unintentional start-up of electrical equipment.
Remove all movable furniture, equipment and fittings from the

asbestos removal area. Immovable items will be carefully
wrapped and sealed in suitable plastic sheeting so they are
effectively isolated from the removal area. In areas of heavy
traffic or high wear, additional physical barricading may be
necessary.
Where set-up operations may release asbestos fibres, all

personnel in the removal area must wear appropriate personal

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
30 of 38
protective equipment, including respiratory protective equipment

approved for use with asbestos. All other high risk preparation
such as isolation of the work area, shut down of the heating,
ventilation and air conditioning system, installation of HEPAfiltered exhaust units and the worker decontamination facility
must be completed first.
The need for appropriate respiratory protective equipment is

particularly important when removing barriers or partitions such
as false ceilings. Where asbestos containing materials have
fallen onto a false ceiling, the ceiling will only be removed by
following at least the procedures required during moderate risk
abatement activities. Any utility or service line which hangs
down into the ceiling space will be sealed if it cannot be sealed
from outside the removal area.
Care will be taken to ensure that asbestos dust cannot escape

at points where pipes and conduit leave the removal area.
Additional attention to sealing and compliance testing is
required at these points, particularly if service riser shafts pass
through the removal area.
When planning and building an asbestos removal containment,

special consideration must be given to the impact on the fire
rating of the building and to the provision of fire fighting facilities
and emergency lighting.
Power, telephone and fire alarm cables may lie beneath

asbestos insulation. To prevent the cables from being damaged
or creating a hazard to workers, the cables must be clearly
identified prior to commencing any cutting. Cables will be rerouted or disabled during the removal period.
The containment and material transfer rooms may be fitted with

a clear acrylic panel or some other form of window so that the
work within may be monitored from outside.
A decontamination facility will preferably be attached to the work

area to allow workers to remove contaminated clothing and
properly shower before leaving the area. The decontamination
facility consists of a series of connected rooms separated by
airlocks. Use of this facility prevents the spread of asbestos

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
31 of 38
beyond the contaminated area. An additional decontamination

facility may be attached to the containment for waste transfer.
E.
Work procedures
Conduct FLHA
Unless more imminently dangerous hazards dictate, asbestoscontaining materials must be handled and removed only when
wet. Surfactants and wetting agents can be used with water to
assist in thoroughly wetting asbestos-containing materials.
Surface soaking with a fine spray is useful for small areas and
where total saturation is not practicable. The spray can be from
an adjustable pistol-grip garden hose fed from a main water
supply. Where no supply is readily available, a portable
pressurized vessel such as a pump-up garden sprayer can be
used. Constant water pressure is desirable. Warning: High
pressure water spray should not be used.
Warning:
Dry sweeping is only allowed within the asbestos enclosure.
Compressed air must NOT be used for any cleaning purpose.
Asbestos-containing materials near workers performing bulk

removal activities will be continually misted with water, if
practicable.
All surfaces exposed to asbestos fibres must be effectively

cleaned by vacuum cleaning or damp wiping.
If asbestos is encapsulated, the sealant must penetrate the

material and effectively bind the asbestos fibres together.
After completing the removal of asbestos-containing materials,

exposed surfaces must be washed or vacuum cleaned and
treated with a sealant.
The pressure from streams of water, sealants or encapsulants

must be controlled to prevent excessive generation of airborne
asbestos fibres. Use of airless or low pressure application
systems is recommended.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
32 of 38
Warning:
Workers must not eat; drink or smoke in the asbestos removal
area as doing so requires workers to remove their respirators,
exposing them to high concentrations of asbestos dust.
Workers must leave the work area and fully decontaminate
themselves prior to performing these activities or using a
washroom.
F.
Breaking through finishing compound and cutting reinforcing

wire in lagging are operations that can generate considerable
quantities of dust. Insulation will be kept wet and tools should
be selected to allow insulation to be cut into small sections while
keeping dust levels in the removal area to minimum.
Power tools used in asbestos removal activities will be selected

carefully since not all types are appropriate for use in dust and
wet conditions. In general, power tools driven by compressed
air or hand tools are preferable.
Decontamination
For high risk removal jobs, the only satisfactory method of

providing an appropriate decontamination facility is with a
mobile or specially constructed on-site unit.
The
decontamination facility is located immediately adjacent to, and
preferably joined to, the enclosed asbestos removal area. The
facility is divided into three distinct rooms; Dirty Room, Shower
Room and Clean Room. If sufficient space permits, a transfer
room can be constructed from the clean to the dirty room for
access to the removal area without going through the shower.
Where the decontamination facility can not be attached to the

asbestos abatement enclosure, modified work procedures will
be required
The decontamination facilitys three rooms are separated from

one another by means of a suitable airlock or buffer zone. This
airlock defines the boundary between each segment of the
decontamination facility. The airlock allows personnel to access
the removal area and restricts the flow of air between areas.
Partitions between rooms in the decontamination facility must
be self-closing so that each room functions as an airlock. These

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
33 of 38
partitions are normally constructed of overlapping sheets of

heavy weight plastic suspended to form a curtain.
The Dirty Room will have provision for:

a) wetting down contaminated clothing and footwear or
cleaning it with a vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA filter;
b) storage of contaminated clothing and footwear;
c) bins for waste materials; and
d) airflow towards the removal area.
The Shower Room will have provision for:

a) a shower area with an adequate supply of soap, shampoo
and hot and cold water; and
b) airflow towards the dirty decontamination area.
The Clean Room will have provision for:

a) storage of individual respirators in containers or lockers;
b) a mirror to assist in donning respiratory protective
equipment;
c) storage of clean clothing;
d) separate storage of clean and dirty towels; and
e) airflow towards the shower and dirty area.
All water from the decontamination facility will pass through a 5

micrometer filter before it passes into the sewer mains.
To enter the containment, the worker enters the clean room and
removes all street clothes and personal belongings, leaves
these is the clean room and changes into disposable work
clothes. An appropriate respirator is donned and checked for fit
and proper operation. The worker then passes through the
shower room or transfer room into the dirty room. Alternatively,
work clothing which is worn throughout the job may be stored
and put on in the dirty room. Respirators however, must always
be donned in the clean room.
On leaving the contaminated work area, but before entering the

dirty room, asbestos material on the worker or their protective
equipment will be removed with a vacuum cleaner fitted with a
HEPA filter.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Controlled Document
Page #
34 of 38
In the dirty room, the worker removes all protective clothing and
equipment except the workers respirator. Any waste material
must be placed in plastic bags or bins for disposal.
The worker then enters the shower room and showers while
wearing their respirator. After the workers head and the
respirators face piece and associated harness have been
thoroughly rinsed, the respirator may be removed and the
shower completed. An adequate supply of warm water, soap
and shampoo will be provided.
After showering, the worker enters the clean room, dries off and
dresses in street clothes. The respirator is then thoroughly
cleaned, disinfected and stored until required.
Hand tools and supplies are kept in an equipment transfer room

associated with the dirty room. This room is also used when
transferring asbestos waste containers or any equipment that
has been decontaminated.
In circumstances where the decontamination unit cannot be

located adjacent to and joined to the removal area, enclosure
procedures to minimize asbestos contamination must be
implemented. Usually this requires workers to wear two pair of
disposable coveralls, discard the outer coveralls, rinse the
overshoes and/or other outer garments in an isolated changing
area attached to the removal area enclosure and then proceed
to the decontamination facility. The worker enters the dirty room
removing coveralls, boots and any other clothing. While still
wearing a respirator, the worker proceeds to the shower room
and follows the personal decontamination procedures.
Following the shower, the worker passes through the second
airlock or buffer zone into the clean change area. Here the
worker changes into conventional work or street clothing.
A final decontamination, including wash down and cleaning of

the enclosure area with a vacuum cleaner fitted with a HEPA
filter removes all visible signs of asbestos contamination from
the enclosure and equipment.
Effective glue-bonding or spraying with an appropriate sealant
will be done throughout the containment to seal down any
invisible dust and fibre undetected during the final inspection
following abatement activities.
Following confirmation of
Revision # 2
Section: B011

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
35 of 38
effective decontamination of the space by final air tests, the

containment can be dismantled. All dismantling work should be
completed following at least low risk work procedures.
G.
All tools and electrical equipment such as vacuum cleaners and

power tools must be left in the removal area until completion of
the abatement job. Before the equipment is removed, it will be
vacuumed thoroughly and all accessible surfaces wiped with a
damp cloth. Where decontamination is not possible, the item
will be plastic wrapped and sealed and only opened when inside
the containment area of another asbestos project.
On completion of asbestos removal jobs, all tools and

equipment not needed for the final clean-up will be thoroughly
washed and removed from the site. Wet wiping should only be
used as an alternative if washing facilities are not available.
Disposal


HEPA filter, before the containers leave the contaminant
area/transfer room.
In the equipment transfer room, sealed containers must be

packaged to withstand handling and transportation to the
disposal site without being punctured or otherwise damaged.
A continuous clean-up and disposal program must be in place to

prevent unnecessary accumulation of asbestos-containing
waste materials at the work site. At the end of each work shift,
all asbestos waste material must be properly contained. Prior
arrangement must be made with appropriate authorities to
deliver asbestos-containing waste to assigned dump sites.

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
36 of 38
Transport drivers must be informed of the precautions that must

be taken. Transport vehicles may be required to carry signs or
placards specifying the nature of the cargo.
H.
Disposal sites must conform to provincial and municipal

requirements.
Air monitoring
Air sampling to determine airborne asbestos fibre concentration

is required before and during the abatement work, and prior to
removal of the enclosure. All air sampling must be completed
by competent personnel following NIOSH methods. Where
possible, result should be made available to workers on the
same day (or as soon as possible following the sampling). Air
monitoring requirements are routinely determined in conjunction
with the owner/client Sampling should include the following:
a) before work starts in the work areas background samples
to establish baseline airborne fibre levels;
b) on a daily basis outside the enclosure sample when there
are unprotected workers in the immediate vicinity of the
enclosure. In some cases, sampling may be required in
other areas such as the floors above or below, or in adjacent
rooms, depending on the set-up of the work site and
occupancy of these areas;
c) during initial and subsequent stages of the abatement
project personal sampling of workers conducting removal.
Ensure that results are within acceptable limits for the
respiratory protection selected. Personal samples should be
collected at least daily, but can be collected more frequently
depending on work condition. Filters must be analyzed and
results provided to workers within 24 hours;
d) on a daily basis in the clean room sample during bulk
removal operations;
e) before the enclosure is dismantled the air inside the
enclosure must be sampled. At a minimum, one sample
should be collected for every 450 m2 of enclosure area to

Section: B011
Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
37 of 38
determine suitability for re-occupancy. Deviations from this

requirement will be determined by the industrial hygienist
and or consultant.
The following criteria will be applied when reviewing airborne

fibre test results:
a) If fibre levels inside the containment exceed the protection
factor of the type of respiratory protective equipment being
used, work must stop until appropriate respirators are
supplied and airborne fibre levels can be controlled.
b) If fibre levels measured outside the containment or in the
clean room exceed 50 percent of the OEL, work practices
and the containment structure should be reviewed. If high
levels continue, work must stop until the reasons for the high
levels are identified and corrected. If fibre levels outside the
containment approach the OEL, work must immediately stop
until the reasons for the high levels are identified and
corrected. Fibre levels outside the work area must never
exceed the OEL.
c) Final air monitoring test results should be less than 0.01
fibres per cubic centimeter. If the final air test fails, the
containment cannot be dismantled. The work area will be
re-cleaned and encapsulated prior to retesting.
I.
Site inspection
A competent person must perform the following checks regularly
during the project:
Check the integrity of the removal area enclosure before any

asbestos removal begins and before the exhaust units begin
operating.
Visually inspect the enclosure before the

and at the beginning of each work shift.
during the inspection must be remedied
necessary, additional air monitoring might
the impact of defect(s) noted.
start of removal work

Any defect revealed
immediately. Where
be required to assess

Asbestos Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B011
Page #
38 of 38
Inspect all equipment used for the removal of asbestos material

before the removal job begins, following repair and at least once
every seven days where continually used. Maintain a record
containing details of the equipment inspection and any repairs.
Inspect the temporary enclosure and the entire decontamination

facility at least daily for gaps and breaks. This inspection
includes a visual check to ensure that air flows from clean areas
into contaminated areas. A record of these inspections will be
kept.
Continuously measure and record air pressure differentials

between clean and contaminated areas during the abatement
project. Pressure differentials should be maintained at a
minimum of 5 pascals (0.02 in water gauge).
Complete a walk-through inspection after the removal is

complete and before sealant spray is applied to ensure that all
asbestos in the area has been removed and the clean-up is
satisfactory. This should be followed by a third party inspection.
To ensure the site is adequate for re-occupancy by unprotected

workers, complete a final walk-through inspection after the
containment has been removed, but before the complete
demobilization.

Leaded Paint Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
Issued: June 1, 2006
1 of 19

Title:
Effective Date:
REV No.
AFFECTED
PAGE(S)
June 1, 2006
DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
DESCRIPTION
2 of 19

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
3 of 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................9

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
4 of 19
INTRODUCTION
Maintenance and construction activities which involve the application, removal, or
disturbance of leaded paints can have a significant impact on workers health and
our environment. Poor project design or lack of knowledge can result in
unnecessary and potentially harmful lead exposures to workers, the general
public, and the environment. Project managers, safety and environmental
professionals, maintenance personnel, as well as contractors, need to
understand the implications of working with leaded paint and the techniques
/methods available to undertake such work in a manner which minimizes
occupational and environmental exposures.
2.0
PURPOSE
To ensure that all identified hazards are managed prior to and during a leaded
paint abatement project.
To ensure appropriate training is provided to all workers involved in leaded paint
abatement.
To provide the minimum procedures to ensure the safety and health of
employees who perform leaded paint abatement or perform activities to support
leaded paint abatement operations.
3.0
SCOPE
3.1
Applies to all employees and subcontractors engaged in operations or

activities under the direction of this company.
WARNING:
Eating, drinking, smoking, tobacco-chewing, and gum-chewing in the work
area are prohibited.
3.2
Additional procedures that apply to leaded paint abatement:

4.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Leaded Paints and Protective Coatings contain greater than 500 ppm
lead by weight.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.2
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
5 of 19
Emission Categories for Leaded Paint Removal Methods
Emission Category
Category 1
Category 2
Category 3
Category 4
Relative Emission Typical Lead Paint

Levels
Removal Method
Very High
Open abrasive blasting with
expendable or recyclable
abrasives.
High
High-pressure or ultra-high
pressure water jetting, with
or without abrasives.
Moderate
Chemical stripping
vacuum blasting.
Power tool cleaning without
vacuum attachments.
Sponge jetting
Low
Power tool cleaning with
vacuum attachments.
Hand tool cleaning.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.3
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Section: B012
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 19
Leaded Paint Abatement Hazard Classes
Hazard Class
Low Risk
Characteristics
Low lead emissions expected
(less than contamination limit.
Minimal Risk of impacting
outdoor air, water, soil.
Examples
Removal of leaded paints
with chemical gel / paste
Encapsulation of leaded
paints.
Moderate Risk
Lead emissions may exceed

contamination level.
Human exposure can be
minimized by use of protective
devices that are readily
available.
Outdoor air, water, and soil
may be impacted.
Lead emissions likely to
exceed contamination limits.
Lead emissions could impact
outdoor air, water, and /or soil.

with hand tools.
and coatings by power
tools with dust collection
attachments.
High Risk
Very High Risk
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Lead emissions likely to

exceed contamination limits or
ambient air quality criteria
(outdoors).
Emissions not restricted to
immediate work area; adjacent
workers or public could be
impacted.
Lead emissions could impact
outdoor air, water, and /or soil.

tools without dust collection
attachments for less than
one hour per day.
tools without dust collection
attachments for more than
one hour per day.
Abrasive blasting of leaded
coatings.
OEL - The Occupational Exposure Limit in respect to a substance,

Regulations (0.05 mg/m3).
Containment Method of enclosure to eliminate migration of particles to
filtration systems.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.8
4.9
4.10
5.0
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
7 of 19
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Arresting Type of filter utilized

for elimination of airborne fibres and particulates. Used in filter systems
for air handling units, vacuums and respirators.
Exposed Worker means a worker who may reasonably be expected to
work in a restricted area at least 30 work days in a 12-month period.
Lead Waste is considered hazardous if the toxic leachate test is above
5 mg/l.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
5.2
Approve any deviation from this procedure.

Coordinating medical evaluations of exposed workers.
Project or Construction Management/Superintendent
Following inspection of the workplace and in conjunction with utilization

of this procedures table (4.2) Emission Categories for Leaded Paint
Removal Methods and (4.3) Leaded Paint Abatement Hazard Classes
will designate the hazard classification for the project and will conduct
ongoing monitoring for required classification changes.
Ensure all leaded paint abatement work is performed in compliance
with this procedure, OH&S Codes and Regulations, Transportation of
Dangerous Goods and the applicable Provincial Legislations..
Provide for a third party company to provide air monitoring.
Provide for a third party company to test for lead content.
Ensure all HEPA-filtered equipment has been tested and certified
where and when required.
Ensure when using client leaded paint abatement procedures that they
meet the minimum standards of this procedure.
Ensure all workers who perform leaded paint abatement procedures
are adequately trained.
Evaluate and ensure emergency services are in place.
Ensure leaded paint abatement locations have appropriate signage in
place.
made available to the workers.
equipment and PPE.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.3
Controlled Document
Page #
8 of 19

Visually inspect the work sites to ensure lead-containing debris has
been cleaned up.

Verify that the workers are qualified to perform leaded paint abatement
and understand the correct use of all PPE.
requirements.
Conduct site inspections during the project.
documented.
and tagged.
Verify training and experience of any worker required for work which
may result in exposure to lead.
exposure to lead.
Ensure workers are familiar with the Respiratory Protection Procedure
and are trained and fit tested.
Employees / Workers
5.5
Revision # 0
5.4
June 1, 2006
Section: B012
Comply with all requirements of this procedure.

Use tools and PPE appropriately and as per this procedure.
Be trained in leaded paint abatement.
Report all hazards or concerns to supervision.
Notify supervisor if pregnant and request an alternative assignment.
Conduct FLHA prior to performing leaded paint abatement.
Be familiar with the companies Respiratory Protection Procedure and
be fit tested for the respiratory protective equipment being utilized.

with this Leaded Paint Abatement Procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.0
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
9 of 19
PROCEDURES
6.1
Worker Training
All personnel performing tasks in relation to the disturbance of leaded
paints and/or coating and all workers with related duties (e.g. Rescue
Workers) must receive training specific to leaded paint abatement. Every
worker who performs leaded paint abatement must be aware of the
hazards of the controlled product and how to safely perform assigned
duties.
6.2
Lead Abatement Options for Steel Structures

When painted steel requires rehabilitation, three general abatement
options can be considered: (i) overcoating the current application; (ii)
removing the current application and applying a new coating; (iii) replacing
the painted steel with new steel, and subsequent coating application.
Selection of an option will be based upon the condition of the current
coating, degree of lead control required, and economics. This procedure
will focus on option (ii), paint removal, which usually requires the greatest
degree of lead control. Many of the precautions required for the removal
of leaded paint will also apply to overcoating or replacement.
6.3
Step 1: Identification of Lead in Coatings

One of the first steps in planning a lead abatement project is to
characterize the painted surface. Identification of lead paint can be
completed by conducting a historical review of paint records, chemical
spot test methods, paint chip sample collection and analysis using Atomic
Absorption (AA), or use of direct reading instruments such as XRF
analyzers or Pacescan. Selection of the most appropriate testing method
is based on size of the project, cost considerations, number of samples
needed and the level of accuracy required. This testing will be conducted
by the client or a designated third party testing agency.
6.4
Step 2: Assessment of Lead Exposure Risk

The degree of risk posed by a given lead-abatement activity will depend
on several factors, including:
concentration of lead emissions;

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
10 of 19
duration of lead disturbance;

potential for exposing adjacent workers or the public;
potential for contaminating adjacent building areas; and
potential for discharging lead to the air, water or soil (environmental
impact).
In this procedure, leaded paint abatement activities are assigned to one of

four risk classes: low, moderate, high and very high.
6.5
Step 3: Specification of a Lead Control Strategy

A.
Isolate the Area

The area in which lead paint removal is to take place (hereafter
referred to as the work area must be isolated, so as to:
Contain emissions so that they do not impact non-project

personnel, the public or the environment;
Restrict access to the work area to project personnel only; and
Protect work surfaces within the work area from the effects of
weather or adjacent processes.
If required, containment construction, particularly for outdoor

projects, can be quite complex. Rigid containments, shrink-wrap,
and fiber re-enforced trapping can be used. Containments can be
ventilated using HEPA filters or bag filters systems.
The work area shall be sign-posted and /or flagged and tagged to
indicate the nature of the hazard and access restrictions.
B.
Protect Workers
Worker protection measures are specified in the Occupational
Health and Safety Codes or Regulations for each province in
Canada. In response to the requirements of each and all, the
company will:
Eliminate worker exposure to harmful substances.

Develop safe work procedures; in practice, these will address
control of exposure to lead, other hazardous materials used in
the process, and other safety hazards related to the project
(e.g., scaffolding, electrical hazards, slips /trips, guarding, etc.).

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
11 of 19
Train project workers; instruction shall include health and

environmental effects of lead, maintenance and care of personal
protective equipment, worker decontamination procedures / lead
hygiene, and project-specific policies and procedures.
Provide engineering controls (where practicable) to prevent
release of harmful substances (including lead) to the workplace.
Provide personal protective equipment to workers; for leaded
paint abatement work, this typically includes disposable
coveralls, protective footwear, eyewear, gloves, hearing
protection and hardhats.
Provide workers with respiratory protection equipment and
training in the use of the specific equipment utilized. The
occupational exposure limit for lead elements and inorganic
compounds is 0.05 mg/m3 but in practice, respiratory protection
will be used even when airborne levels are lower than the
contamination limits.
Allow pregnant workers to request and comply with their
requests to be assigned less hazardous alternate work; this is
particularly important when lead is involved, as expectant
mothers are more susceptible to lead poisoning.
Require medical monitoring of exposed or potentially exposed
workers.
Prior to any employee participating in lead abatement procedures

he or she will have a blood test conducted to establish a baseline of
their blood lead level, which should be less than 1.5 micromoles per
liter (umol/L). Additional blood tests will be required yearly or prior
to the termination of a workers employment. If an employee has
not been involved in any lead abatement procedures for a period of
one year and his previous blood test was less than 1.5 umol/L, he
is not required to submit to another test until he is again required to
perform lead abatement.
The company will ensure that a worker exposed to lead is informed
of the availability of blood testing for lead content.
An exposed worker may refuse to undergo a blood level test by
giving the company a written statement refusing it.
The company will not coerce, threaten or force a worker into
refusing the test.

Title:
Effective Date:
C.
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
12 of 19
Protect The Environment

Emissions and waste products from leaded paint abatement must
be carefully controlled to prevent discharges to the air, water, and
soil. Therefore project planning must address:
containment of emissions;
filtration of ventilation air prior to discharge; and
collection and disposal of waste solids and liquids.
Containment of the work area retains dust, water, and process
wastes within a controlled area, thus minimizing impacts to the
adjacent work environment and, if outdoors, to air, soil, and water.
Wastes from leaded paint disturbance may include:
lead-contaminated blast agents (water, sand, steel shot, or
other abrasives);
lead-contaminated chemical solutions or sludge (chemical
stripping);
settled paint dust/chips after disturbance;
contaminated tarps or other containment components;
waste water from showers in decontamination areas;
used respirator cartridges and protective clothing; and/or
contaminated rags and other supplies.
The waste from a leaded paint abatement project will be considered
as hazardous waste unless a toxic leachate test shows it to be
below 5mg/L. No person shall dispose of hazardous waste to a
regular landfill. Standard operating procedures would include
secure on site storage containers, consisting of labeled and
manifested leak proof drums with lids. Proper waste labeling,
compliance with Transportation of Dangerous Goods legislation
and documentation (waste manifest) of generation and
transportation of waste materials is required.
Wastewater
contaminated with lead can be filtered through a three-stage
filtration system and then tested. Consumable supplies are
generally considered as hazardous waste and disposed of as such.
In a situation where there is an uncontrolled release of lead
contaminated material in the workplace or to the environment, the
Client, Project Manager and the Corporate HS&E Manager are to
be notified immediately.
Either the project Manager or the
Corporate HS&E Manager or their senior management have the

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
13 of 19
authority to allocate required resources to manage the incident.

Initial response to the incident will consist of:
A hazard assessment and designation of hazard classification.
Donning of appropriate personal protective equipment. Workers
are not to be put at risk of exposure.
Isolation of the incident scene.
Containment and clean up of the contaminated material.
Conduct environmental testing.
An uncontrolled release of lead contaminated materials would
constitute an incident requiring notification to senior management,
followed by an incident investigation and report.
D.
Conduct Environmental Testing Air, Water, Soil, Waste

Throughout the course of a lead abatement project, it is important
to determine the lead content of waste streams as well as lead in
the air, water, and soil that surround the work area. Protocols for
the sampling and analysis of these media are readily available.
Monitoring of personal Occupational Health and of subject areas
can be accomplished by following NIOSH sampling and analytical
methods. The permissible exposure limit (PEL) for lead dust is
0.05 mg/m3. By employing the use of high volume stationary
samplers, environmental air monitoring can include PM-10 (size
selective head) and total suspended lead monitoring can be
accomplished.
The locations and frequency of samples will be dependent on the
prevailing winds, the height of structure being abated and the
proximity to the public and /or work crews in the area. Although
there are not provincial standards for environmental air monitoring
for lead, the USA guidelines include limits of 150 ug/m3 over a 24hour period and 1.5 ug/m3 mean over a 90-day period.
A baseline of soil and groundwater conditions can be established
by performing pre-job and post-job analysis of representative
samples to determine the relative impact (or not) of project
activities. In the case of potential water impacts, samples are to be
collected downstream and upstream during the project. Proper
sampling techniques, record keeping, chain of custody
documentation and use of an accredited laboratory is essential.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
14 of 19
Procedures for Low Risk Leaded Paint Abatement Activities

A.
ISOLATE THE AREA
B.
PROTECT WORKERS
C.
Utilize workers trained in lead abatement.

Provide a wash station or other washing facility with clean
water, soap, nail brush, mirror and towels. Project personnel
prior to leaving the work area and before eating, drinking, or
smoking must use the wash station.
Protective clothing shall include:
o Two pair of hooded disposable coveralls and hoods must
be used to cover head.
o Goggles and face shield
o Appropriate gloves for the procedure being utilized.
o CSA approved, steel toe rubber boots.
o Hardhat.
Respiratory protective equipment shall be used. Non-powered
air-purifying respirators with cartridges approved for lead dust
are suitable in most cases. Respirator training and fit testing is
required prior to using a respirator.
The work area will be cleaned at least daily. Dry-sweeping is
prohibited. Vacuum cleaning is preferred and must be equipped
with HEPA filtration. Cleaning with compressed air will be
avoided as much as possible, but may be used if vacuum
cleaning is not effective in hard-to-reach locations.
Implement other worker protection measures appropriate for the
job, e.g., fall protection, hearing protection, electrical hazard
protection, etc.
PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT:
Place banner tape with tags around the work area.

Place drop sheets in and around the work area.
Lead-contaminated waste (including used disposable clothing,

respirator cartridges, and drop sheets) will be placed in airtight
containers that are identified as containing lead waste.
Label and transport wastes in accordance with the TDG
regulations.

Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
D.
Controlled Document
Page #
15 of 19
Dispose of solid and liquid waste in accordance with the

applicable legislation for where the project is being conducted.
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL TESTING:
6.5
Revision # 0
Section: B012
Testing may be required in the event of a spill.
Procedures for Moderate Risk Leaded Paint Abatement Activities

A.
ISOLATE THE AREA
B.
PROTECT WORKERS:
Place banner tape with tags around the work area;

Place drop sheets in and around the work area; and
Place signs around the work area to warn of lead exposure
hazard.

Provide a wash station or other washing facility with clean
water, soap, nail brush, mirror and towels. Project personnel
prior to leaving the work area and before eating, drinking, or
smoking must use the wash station.
o Two pair of hooded disposable coveralls; hoods must be
used to cover head.
o Hardhat.
Respiratory protective equipment shall be used. Non-powered
air-purifying respirators (PAPR) with cartridges approved for
lead dust are suitable in most cases. Respirator training and fit
testing is required prior to using a respirator.
prohibited. Vacuum cleaning is preferred and must be equipped
with HEPA filtration. Cleaning with compressed air will be
avoided as much as possible, but may be used if vacuum
cleaning is not effective in hard-to-reach locations.
Implement other worker protection measures appropriate for the
job, e.g., fall protection, hearing protection, electrical hazard
protection, etc.

Title:
Effective Date:
C.
June 1, 2006
Page #
16 of 19

Label and transport wastes in accordance with the TDG
regulations.
Dispose of solid and liquid waste in accordance with the
applicable legislation for where the project is being conducted.
6.6
Controlled Document
D.
Revision # 0
Section: B012
Sampling for airborne lead dust in the work area is

recommended, to verify that selected form of respiratory
protection is adequate.
Other testing may be required in the event of a spill.
Procedures for High Risk Leaded Paint Abatement Activities

A.
ISOLATE THE AREA:
B.
Place banner tape with tags around the work area;

Place drop sheets in and around the work area; and
Place signs around the work area; signs will warn of lead exposure
hazard and indicate that access is restricted to authorized (trained)
project personnel only.
PROTECT WORKERS:

Provide a wash station or other washing facility with clean water, soap,
nail brush, mirror and towels.
Project personnel prior to leaving the work area and before eating,
drinking, or smoking must use the wash station.
o Two pair of hooded disposable coveralls; hoods must be used to
cover head.
o Hardhat.
Provide local exhaust ventilation wherever possible.

Title:
Effective Date:
C.
Controlled Document
Page #
17 of 19
Respiratory protective equipment will be used. Powered air-purifying

respirators (PAPR) with cartridges approved for lead dust are required.
Respirator training and fit testing is required prior to using a respirator.
prohibited. Vacuum cleaning is preferred and must be equipped with
HEPA filtration. Cleaning with compressed air will be avoided as much
as possible, but may be used if vacuum cleaning is not effective in
hard-to-reach locations.
Implement other worker protection measures appropriate for the job,
e.g., fall protection, hearing protection, electrical hazard protection, etc.

Label and transport wastes in accordance with the TDG regulations.
Dispose of solid and liquid waste in accordance with the applicable
legislation for where the project is being conducted.
6.7
Revision # 0
D.
June 1, 2006
Section: B012
During lead disturbance, sample for airborne lead dust in the work area
to verify that powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) protection is
adequate. Upgrade to supplied-air respiratory protection if airborne
lead concentrations exceeds 3.75mg/m3.
Sample for airborne lead dust adjacent to the work area (downwind)
is recommended, to verify lead emissions are adequately controlled.
Procedures for Very High Risk Leaded Paint Abatement Activities

A.
ISOLATE THE AREA:
Construct an enclosure which completely encloses the work area and

which prevents the escape of dust; enclosures shall remain under
negative pressure for the duration of work (minimum negative air
pressure 0.02 water); enclosures shall employ the use of cross-draft
or downdraft ventilation.
Place signs around the work area; signs will warn of lead exposure
hazard and indicate that access is restricted to authorized (trained)
project personnel only.

Title:
Effective Date:
B.
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
18 of 19
PROTECT WORKERS:
C.
June 1, 2006
Section: B012
Utilize workers trained in lead abatement

Provide a three-stage decontamination facility (decon) as close as
practicable to the work area. The decon will include: (i) a clean
room for removal /storage of street clothing and donning of protective
clothing and respiratory protection; (ii) a shower facility, and (iii) a room
for removal, and storage of contaminated protective clothing. The
decon must be used by project personnel prior to leaving the work
area.
o Two pair of hooded disposable coveralls and hoods must be used
to cover head.
o Hardhat.
Respiratory protective equipment will vary depending on the activity.
o For operations other than abrasive blasting, all personnel within the
enclosure require powered air-purifying respirators (PAPR) with
cartridges approved for lead dust. Respirator training and fit testing
is required prior to using a respirator.
o For abrasive blasting, blasting operators require approved blast
hoods.
The work area will be cleaned several times per day. Dry-sweeping is
prohibited. Vacuum cleaning is preferred and must be equipped with
HEPA filtration. Cleaning with compressed air will be avoided as much
as possible, but may be used if vacuum cleaning is not effective in
hard-to-reach locations.
Implement other worker protection measures appropriate for the job,
e.g., fall protection, hearing protection, electrical hazard protection, etc.
All ventilation air that is exhausted from the work area shall pass
through a HEPA filtration unit and exhaust air must be discharged
outdoors.
For wet processes, install a wastewater collection system and water
treatment system. Test water for lead content prior to discharge to
verify compliance with applicable water quality criteria.
Lead-contaminated waste (including spent abrasives, used disposable
clothing, gloves, respirator cartridges, rags, and the containment
structure) will be placed in airtight containers that are identified as

Title:
Effective Date:
D.
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B012
Page #
19 of 19
containing lead waste. Containers will be wet-wiped upon removal

from the work area to remove residual dust and debris.
Label and transport wastes in accordance with the TDG regulations.
Dispose of solid and liquid waste in accordance with the applicable
legislation for where the project is being conducted.
During lead disturbance, sample for airborne lead dust in the work area
to verify that PAPR respiratory protection is adequate. Upgrade to
supplied-air respiratory protection if airborne lead concentrations
exceeds 3.75mg/m3.
Sample for airborne lead dust adjacent to the work area (downwind)
is recommended, to verify lead emissions are adequately controlled.
For outdoor projects, conduct PM10 sampling (respirable dust) to
verify lead emission complies with applicable criteria.

Vehicle Operation and Maintenance
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
1 of 16

Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
REV No. AFFECTED

PAGE(S)
1
11
Revision # 3
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
2 of 16
DESCRIPTION
May 18, 2009
6.10 Inspecting Wheel Assemblies
14
May 18, 2009
Addition of vehicle and load heights
13
Feb 8, 2011
6.13 - Addition pull through parking
3
3
14
13
Nov 6 - 2013
Add: All loads to be secured

Add: 6.13 Hours of service limits
Nov 6 - 2013

Title:
Effective Date:

May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
3 of 16
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................6

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
Revision # 3
May 18, 2009
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
4 of 16
INTRODUCTION
Driving is among the most hazardous tasks performed by our employees.
Vehicle incidents can result in death or disabling injuries to the driver,
passengers or public. Protecting our employees and the public is of paramount
importance.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
To ensure the safe operation and maintenance of company vehicles.
2.2
Set the standards for operation, inspection, maintenance and basic safety
requirements for the use of company vehicles.
2.3
Ensure appropriate
approvals.
authorization,
licensing
and
regulatory
SCOPE
3.1
All persons operating company vehicles or personal vehicles for company

business.
3.2
All company vehicles.
3.3
Operation of company vehicles on public and/or private roads or

properties, including all job sites and privately owned premises.
3.4
Additional procedures that may apply to Vehicle Operation and

Maintenance.
4.0
driver
Incident Management
Alcohol and Drugs
Non-conformance and/or Progressive Discipline
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Approved Driver is a person with a valid drivers license with the required
license class for the vehicle to be driven and has consented to the
obtainment of a drivers abstract and has been approved by the company
to operate a vehicle.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.0
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
5 of 16
4.2
Company Vehicle includes all company owned, leased or rented

vehicles.
4.3
Commercial Vehicle is a vehicle operated on the highway by or on behalf

of a person for the purpose of providing transportation but does not
include a private, passenger vehicle. This includes any vehicle used to
transport the owners own goods or to transport goods for hire.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
President
5.2
Vice President/Area Manager
5.3
Determine driving privileges for employees who are at low or medium

risk ratings as per Table 6.3.
Controller
5.5
Obtain the necessary federal and/or provincial certifications and

approvals. (i.e., Safety Fitness Certificate, Operating Authority
Certificate)
5.4
Determine driving privileges for employees who are at a high-risk

rating as per Table 6.3.
Determine driving privileges for employees who are at low or medium

risk ratings as per Table 6.3.
Supervisor
Shall not permit an employee to drive a company vehicle prior to a

review and approval of the employees driving record by the
appropriate level of management as per Table 6.3.
Will promptly investigate and respond to any and all complaints of
inappropriate operation of a company vehicle.
Will ensure that all drivers receive a copy of this procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.6
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 16
Drivers
6.0
May 18, 2009
Section: B013
Shall not operate a company vehicle prior to receiving corporate

approval.
Will operate vehicles in a professional and courteous manner, utilizing
defensive driving techniques and abiding by the rules of the road and
this procedure.
Report to their supervisor any changes in their license class or status.
Report to the company, any convictions or infractions against their
drivers license that may impact upon their eligibility to drive.
Report all unsafe road conditions while on client or owners sites.
Pay for all driving violation tickets, parking tickets etc.
Report to the company if they have any knowledge of persons driving
in contravention to this procedure.
Report any incident occurring while they are driving a company vehicle
or personal vehicle for the purpose of company business.
Conduct all required vehicle inspection and ensure vehicle is
maintained in a clean, safe operating condition.
Shall not operate a vehicle that is unsafe.
Shall obtain approval from the supervisor prior to having maintenance
or repairs conducted on the vehicle.
PROCEDURES
6.1
Authorized Driver Approval

All employees required to operate a motor vehicle in order to perform their
job duties will:
Have approval from the company prior to operating a company vehicle

except in the case of an emergency.
Will be at least 18 years of age and possess a valid, non-probationary
drivers license from their province of residency.
o Under no circumstance shall an employee be granted a grace
period to obtain a license from their current province of
residency.
o When required, the license must have the appropriate
commercial endorsement.
Will be at least 25 years of age if operating a vehicle such as a van or
bus for the purpose of transporting other persons.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
7 of 16
Will consent to the periodic disclosure of their drivers abstract/record,

which is comprised of personal information from the Motor Vehicle
Registry.
Failure to maintain an acceptable driving record will result in the
company revoking the authorization to operate a company vehicle.
Upon receipt of a drivers abstract, Table 6.2 Demerit Assignment will be

utilized to assign demerit points as per this Vehicle Operation and
Maintenance Procedure.
Note: Not all provinces or territories in Canada utilize a demerit system
and those that do are not consistent with each other. This procedures
demerit assignment will take precedence over others for the purpose of
company authorized driver approvals.
Following the assignment of demerit points and the evaluation of the
drivers abstract, each driver will receive a hazard designation and if
appropriate, driver authorization with the approval of the designated level
of management as per Table 6.3 Operator Hazard Classification and
Approval. When evaluating the abstract the time period of the driving
infractions must be noted. i.e. did the infractions occur within a 1-, 2-, or 3year period.
The attached, Driver Authorization Form shall be used to document the
drivers consent to obtain drivers abstracts, the supervisor requesting
driving privileges, the drivers hazard classification, approval or denial of
driving privileges, conditions of approval and the management person
granting or denying the approval.
There will be a review of driving records of employees who will drive on
company business:
Upon hire/assignment;
Following a motor vehicle incident;
Upon notification of a citation;
Upon receipt of a second complaint relating to operation of the motor
vehicle;
Yearly for persons operating vehicles with a passenger capacity of
eleven or more, including the driver;
At a minimum of every three years or more frequently at the discretion
of management.
Following a test resulting in non-compliance to The Drug and Alcohol
Policy.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.2
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
8 of 16
Demerit Assignment Table
Failing to remain at the scene of an accident

Careless driving
Failing to stop for a school bus
Racing
Failing to stop at a railway crossing with a school bus or vehicle
carrying explosives, gas or flammable liquids
Failing to stop for a peace officer
Failing to yield right-of-way to a pedestrian in a crosswalk
Following too closely
Driving left of centre
Driving on the wrong way of a one-way highway
Failing to report an accident
Failing to stop at a stop sign
Failing to stop at a red light intersection
Impeding passing vehicle
Improper passing
Stunting
Failing to obey instruction of traffic control device
Improper backing
Improper turns
Improper turns - U turn
Traffic lane violation
Speeding - exceeding limit by more than 50 km/h
Speeding - exceeding limit by more than 30 km/h but not more than 50 km/h
Speeding - unreasonable rate
Speeding - exceeding limit by more than 15 km/h but not more than 30 km/h
Speeding - exceeding limit by up to 15 km/h
7 points
6 points
6 points
6 points
5 points
5 points
4 points
4 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
3 points
2 points
2 points
2 points
2 points
2 points
6 points
4 points
4 points
3 points
2 points

Title:
Effective Date:
6.3
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 16
Operator Hazard Classification and Approval Table
Demerit
Points
Time
Period
Risk
Rating
04
1 year
Low
5-9
2 years
Medium
Approval
Comments
Corporate HS&E
Manager or Controller
Corporate HS&E
Manager or Controller
with notification to
President
Approved to
drive.
Approved with
special
conditions.
Over 9
2 years
High
President
Any Driving
Suspension
2 years
High
President
Conviction of
Impaired Driving
3 years
High
President
Convicted of
Criminal Charges
related to vehicle
use.
3 years
High
President
6.4
Section: B013
May be approved
with specific
conditions
May be approved
with specific
conditions
May be approved
with specific
conditions
May be approved
with specific
conditions
Vehicle Walk Around

No formal inspection document will be required, however, the following
items will be checked each shift, prior to the initial use of a company
vehicle:
Windshield condition and cleanliness;

Air in tires, including spare;
Possible obstruction behind vehicle;
Lights and signals working;
Back up alarm is functioning; and
Visual check for new damage.
During the initial inspection of the shift and each subsequent time the
vehicle is used during that shift, the driver will walk completely around
the vehicle to ensure the area is clear of obstructions and no one or
anything is under the unit or in close proximity.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
10 of 16
Daily Inspection
Passenger vans designed to carry eleven or more people, including the
driver will receive a daily pre- and post-trip inspection. These inspections
will be documented in the vehicles log book and will address the:
Steering mechanism;
Horn;
Wipers;
Emergency equipment (triangle, flares, fire extinguisher etc.);
Parking brake/emergency brake;
Lug nuts torque;
Wheel studs (for damage)
Tires and rims (cracks in rims, bulges or cuts in tires, etc.); and
Tread wear.
All deficiencies will be repaired immediately and the receipts for the
repairs will be placed in the individual vehicle file at the companys
principal place of business.
6.6
Weekly Vehicle Inspection

All company vehicles will receive a weekly vehicle inspection by the
employee responsible for that vehicle and that inspection will be
documented in the vehicles log book. The inspection will be done each
Monday or the first working day of the week. The inspection and
documentation will address vehicle condition and maintenance. Copies of
the inspections will be submitted monthly with the vehicle mileage report
and they will be maintained in individual vehicle files. The vehicle logbook
will remain in the vehicle.
In addition to weekly inspections, if the responsibility for the vehicle is
handed off to another person, an additional inspection will be conducted
and documented at that time.
Urgent deficiencies are to be corrected immediately.
Note: Every company vehicle shall have a designated person who is
responsible for its inspection, maintenance and safe operation.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.7
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
11 of 16
Monthly Vehicle Mileage Report

The vehicle mileage report will be completed daily and submitted monthly.
The report will track:
Travel locations;
Daily odometer readings;
Business vs: Personal use; and
Fuel consumption and costs.
Fuel receipts will have the following information clearly printed on them:
Employee Name
Job/Site
Vehicle license number/Unit number
Odometer reading
All receipts for fuel or other vehicle expenses are to be submitted with the
monthly vehicle mileage report. The report will be maintained in individual
vehicle files.
6.8
Safety Fitness Certificate

All busses, including passenger vans originally designed to carry eleven or
more persons including the driver require a Safety Fitness Certificate and
semi annual inspections. The Commercial Vehicle Inspection Program
(CVIP) requires annual inspections for tractors and trailers.
The
inspections will be conducted by licensed mechanics with certification to
conduct the inspections. A copy of the Safety Fitness Certificate will be
kept in the vehicle and the original will be maintained in the individual
vehicle file at the companys principal place of business.
6.9
Operating Authority Certificate

Prior to utilizing a bus or passenger van originally designed to transport
eleven or more persons, including the driver, the company will apply for
and receive an Operating Authority Certificate and will renew the
certificate annually. A copy of the certificate will be kept in each vehicle it
applies to.
6.10
Vehicle Maintenance
Vehicle manufacturers provide detailed maintenance schedules with their
products. It is essential within our preventative maintenance program that

Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
12 of 16
all manufacturers specifications are incorporated and followed.

employee responsible for the operation of a company vehicle must:
The
Adhere to applicable regulations, standards, and manufacturers

specifications;
Ensure all maintenance and repairs are conducted by qualified
maintenance personnel;
Schedule and document all maintenance and repairs; and
Submit the documentation for all maintenance and repairs with the
monthly vehicle mileage report, which will be maintained in the
individual vehicle file.
NOTE: Only qualified individuals are permitted to service, inspect,

disassemble and reassemble tire and wheel assemblies. Northern
employees are not allowed to perform these tasks.
Be Proactive!
6.11
If you notice something that requires attention or repair, dont wait for
the next weekly inspection take care of it.
Filthy vehicles do nothing to promote a professional company image,
can create safety hazards, and can reduce the life of the vehicle.
Keep the vehicles clean, inside and out.
Vehicle Incidents
In the event of a vehicle incident, do not attempt to move the casualty(s)
unless they are in imminent danger. Contact the following persons and
agencies after it has been determined that first aid has or is being
administered, depending on the severity of the injury(s):
Police
Ambulance
Your Supervisor
Document the time of the incident, the number of casualties, other
vehicles, license plate numbers, names, insurance companies, name and
contact numbers of witnesses and any other information that would be
pertinent to the incident. Cooperate with the RCMP and/or other law
enforcement agencies in their investigation.
Be familiar with and follow the directions for reporting and investigating incident as per
the Incident Management Procedure contained in this HS&E Manual.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.12
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
13 of 16
Drugs and Alcohol

Failure to comply with the drug and alcohol policy while operating a
company vehicle or a personal vehicle while conducting business on
behalf of this company will result in immediate corrective action. In the
event of a vehicle incident, near miss, potentially dangerous incident or a
supervisor having reasonable grounds to believe that an employee is
under the influence of drugs or alcohol, the employee will be requested to
submit to a drug and alcohol test.
Refer to the Drug and Alcohol Procedure contained in this HS&E Manual.
6.13
General Vehicle Safety
Only authorized drivers are to operate company vehicles.

Vehicle will be operated in a professional and courteous manner and
drivers are to utilize defensive driving techniques. Drivers are not to
exceed 13 hours of driving time, or to drive at any time after the driver
has been on duty for 14 or more consecutive hours.
Drivers shall know and adhere to the rules of the road, the clients site
driving rules and policies, and drive in a safe, legal and responsible
fashion.
The driver and all occupants will utilize seat belts at all times. An
exception will be busses, although where seat belts are supplied, they
will be used.
It is forbidden to ride on loads, fenders, running boards, sideboards,
tailgates, in the box or on the deck etc. All riders must be seated in the
passenger compartment before the operation of the vehicle.
Headlights or daytime running lights will be used at all times.
All vehicles shall be equipped with the following equipment:
o First aid kit;
o Flares and/or warning devices; and
o ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher.
No vehicle with an obstructed rear view shall be backed-up unless a
signal person (spotter) is provided to ensure this is done in a safe
manner.
Headlights and taillights shall be kept clean and operational.
The vehicle and equipment shall be kept clean, tidy and ready to
operate.
A vehicle used to transport equipment or materials shall have an
adequate bulkhead installed and loads shall be restrained to prevent
movement during any shipping condition.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 18, 2009
Revision # 3
Controlled Document
Section: B013
Page #
14 of 16
Loads extending more than 30 cm over the sides or 150 cm on the

front or rear of the vehicle must be Red Flagged during daylight hours
and marked with lights after dark.
Minimize carrying unsecured objects in passenger compartments and
take measures to ensure that these do not present a hazard. Items
are not to be stored on the dash.
Vehicles will not be left running without the driver behind the wheel.
The only exceptions are:
o Vehicles performing work, for example when the power take off
(PTO) is being used to operate equipment. The parking brake
must be engaged.
o In extremely cold weather (>-20 Celsius), industrial vehicles
may be left running provided the brakes are engaged, the
transmission is disengaged and the vehicle is in a well
ventilated area.
o In extremely cold weather, vehicles parked in designated
parking areas that are being started in preparation for leaving
must be left in park or neutral with the parking brake engaged.
All vehicles shall be shut off while fueling and be fueled from at least
3.5 meters from any ignition source.
All fuel dispensing vehicles shall be grounded prior to dispensing of
any fuel.
Due to the nature of the companies scope of work, drivers are not
required to complete log books.
All company vehicles except cars will be identified with a company
decal.
Only hands free cellular phones or radios will be used while the vehicle
is in motion.
Hitchhikers shall not be permitted to ride in company vehicles except in
emergency situations.
No person will carry a firearm in a company vehicle or personal vehicle
while conducting company business.
The use of radar detectors is prohibited.
A vehicle and its load must not exceed 4.15 meters in height when
operating on a highway or public road unless a permit has been
granted by Alberta Transportation. NOTE: All loads are to be
adequately secured before transport.
Drivers will perform pull through parking (pull through a space, so the
vehicle is facing outwards in the next space) when available, or
backing into a parking space if necessary. This provides the operator
an easier exit from the parking area as well as a quick exit in case of
emergency.
Driver Authorization Form

The operation of company owned, or controlled vehicle is restricted to persons with
valid drivers licenses and acceptable driving records. In accordance with the HS&E
Vehicle Operation and Maintenance Procedure B025, the company will obtain a
statement of driving record for each employee prior to authorizing vehicle operation.
Such authorization will be at the discretion of management.
Consent to Obtain Drivers Abstract
For the duration of my employment with this company, I hereby authorize the
appropriate provincial licensing body to disclose all information regarding my driving
record, including convictions, suspension, accidents and license status to my employer
and their insurer.
Company Name
Employee Name
Date of Birth
(mm dd, yyyy)
License Number
Employee
License Province
Signature
Date
Supervisors Name
Supervisors Contact
Numbers.
Phone No.
Fax No.
Office Use Only:

Hazard Classification
Low
Medium
Driving Authorization
Approved
High
Denied
Conditions of Approval
Management Approval
Signature
Date
Information collected under this policy is used to determine eligibility to operate

company owned motor vehicles, or personal vehicles on company business. Personal
information is protected in accordance with Privacy Act requirements and corporate
privacy policy.
Controlled Document Reference Number: B013-1
for directing vehicles

PROCEED SLOWLY
FORWARD
DISTANCE TO
BACKWARD
Always face palms

in direction of desired travel.
Then bend both arms repeatedly

toward head and chest,
and then extend.
TURNS
Point one arm

to indicate the direction
to turn.
STOPPING POINT
CLEAR TO LEAVE AREA
Bend monitoring arm

repeatedly toward head to
indicate continued turning.
STOP
Cross both arms above head
Face palms forward, with hands

above head. Bring elbows
forward and hands together.
Point at the
driver, and gain
eye contact.
Turn and extend

arms in
desired direction.
EMERGENCY STOP
Start with hands clasped over head.
Extend downward repeatedly until vehicle stops.

Controlled Document Reference Number: B013-1

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
Mould Abatement
1 of 12

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
REV No. AFFECTED

PAGE(S)
June 1, 2006
DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
DESCRIPTION
2 of 12

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
3 of 12
Table of Contents
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................5
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................8

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
4 of 12
INTRODUCTION
Working within environments where moulds exist can present various hazards to
individuals who may be required to work in the area. These may include acute
and chronic symptoms related to both eye, nose and throat irritations. Exposure
to some forms of toxic mould may also be a source of aggravation to chronic
health problems such as asthma. Both live and dead mould spores can cause
allergic reactions.
During the growing process moulds produce a variety of chemicals. Some of
these chemicals, such as antibiotics have a beneficial effect on humans.
However, other types, defined as toxic moulds can produce chemicals with
toxic effects. These chemicals are called mycotoxins and will be present in
both live and dead spores.
It will be our focus to ensure that workers actively working with removal of mould
as well as those occupying a mould contaminated environment are adequately
protected from the hazards.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
To ensure our workers are aware of all hazards related to handling of and
exposure to indoor moulds.
2.2
To ensure compliance with the Occupational Health and Safety Code and
Regulations.
2.3
To ensure all workers are protected from both injury and subsequent
illness related to acute and chronic exposure.
SCOPE
3.1
All company facilities, employees, subcontractors, customers and visitors.

WARNING
The following is a list of the most common and well established
symptoms of mould exposure:
Runny nose
Lower respiratory symptoms such as coughing or wheezing
Congestion

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
5 of 12
Aggravation of allergic diseases such as asthma or bronchitis

Respiratory infection such as aspergillosis
Headache & fatigue, nausea or vomiting
Eye irritation
Other symptoms reported within buildings where substantial

amounts of mould are present include (alone or in combination):
3.2
Additional procedures that may apply to mould abatement.
4.0
Weakened resistance to infection

Skin irritation and formation of rashes
Memory problems
Mood changes
Aches, pains and possible fever.
Confined Space
Asbestos Abatement
Definitions
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Stachybotrys Chartarum - A very toxic and quite common form of mould

which occurs in building envelopes where significant water damage has
remained uncontrolled.
Mycotoxins Chemicals created during the growth process of certain
toxic forms of indoor mould and can be present in both live and dead
spores.
Confined Space is an enclosed, or partially enclosed space that is not
because of its design, construction, location or atmosphere, of the work
to it.
Containment Method of enclosure to eliminate migration of mould
spores to another part of the work area. Typically undertaken in
conjunction with air filtration systems.

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
6 of 12
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Arresting Type of filter utilized

for elimination of airborne particulates. This is the filter system of choice
for use when bio hazard containment systems are required for mould
control.
CFU Colony forming Unit - The unit of measure used to provide
indication of mould contamination in air. Measured as CFU per cubic
centimeter of air. The standard is typically that levels cannot be found to
exceed 150 colony forming units per cubic centimeter of air.
ISO Care A specialized 3-step mould remediation system available
through various Hazmat suppliers in Canada and often specified in
government remediation contracts.
Hazard Classes of Indoor Moulds
Indoor moulds can be grouped into 3 hazard classes based upon the
associated health risk posed. These hazard classes are defined below as
follows:
Hazard Class A: This includes fungi or their metabolic products that
are highly hazardous to health. These fungi should not be present in
occupied buildings and should be removed immediately if detected.
Hazard Class B: Includes fungi that may cause allergic reactions to
building occupants if exposed over a longer period of time.
Hazard Class C: Includes those fungi not considered a hazard to the
health. Growth of these fungi in an indoor environment may still,
however, create an adverse economic impact due to damages.
Common Indoor Moulds and Their Hazard Classes
Moulds in Hazard Class A:
Aspergillus flavus
Aspergillus fumagatus
Aspergillus versicolor
Fusarium spp
Mucor spp
Stachybotrys Chartarum
Note: Occurrence of Stachybotrys and Fusarium in a building is typically
an indication of serious water damage. Both types of mould are very toxic
and quite common under these circumstances.
Moulds in Hazard Class B:

Acremonium spp
Alternaria spp

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
7 of 12
Aureobasidium pullulans
Cladosporium cladosporioides
Paecilomyces spp
Penecillium aurantiogriseum
Scopulariopsis
Trichoderma spp
Moulds in Hazard Class C:

Chaetomium globosum
Cladosporium sphaerospermum
Ulocladium botrytis
Wallemia sebi
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
5.2
5.3
Approve any deviation from this work procedure.

Provide for a third party company/laboratory and/or Industrial Hygienist
to conduct analysis of the mould samples and conduct air quality
monitoring when required.
made available to the worker.
equipment and PPE.
Visually inspect the work sites to ensure mould-containing debris has
been cleaned up.
Initiating action to correct unsatisfactory tool/equipment and PPE use.


Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
5.4
Controlled Document
Page #
8 of 12
Verify that the workers are trained to undertake removal or close

proximity work involving moulds and that they understand the correct
use of all PPE.
Ensure work is performed in compliance with this procedure, any
requirements.
documented.
and tagged.
exposure to indoor moulds and are aware of hazard class.
Assist crew with conducting a comprehensive Field Level Hazard
Assessment (FLHA).
Ensure workers are familiar with the respirator protection procedure
and are trained and fit tested.
Comply with all requirements and recommendations within this

procedure with respect to working safely in a mould contaminated
environment.
Use tools and PPE properly and per this procedure.
Report any hazard or concerns to supervision.
Maintain all tools, respirators and other PPE issued for the work and
return to Supervisor at completion of the task.
Conduct Field Level Hazard Assessments (FLHA) prior to performing
tasks.
6.0
Revision # 0
Worker
5.5
June 1, 2006
Section :B014

with this mould abatement procedure.
PROCEDURES
WARNING:

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
9 of 12
1. The use of power tools shall be avoided at all times.

2. Dead spores are also considered hazardous.
Good housekeeping will be maintained to ensure any waste
materials are bagged or containerized to ensure airborne
spore levels do not exceed 150 CFU per cubic centimeter of
air.
When the removal process will result in substantial amounts
of cutting and as a dust and debris generation is substantial a
HEPA filtered vacuum shall be used to assist with the clean
up.
Workers shall avoid dry sweeping of fine dusts where ever
possible.
3. Eating, drinking or smoking is prohibited in the work area.
6.1
Mould Cleanup
When cleaning up minor mould contamination of less than 10 square feet
we would not typically require extensive bio hazardous containment
systems. When removing areas of 10 square feet of mould or more, a
fully contained method of abatement may be required. In these cases it
should always be our process to involve an outside agency to conduct
tests for establishment of the following criteria:
Mould type and extent of contamination.
Requirement for air quality testing
Containment and air filtration system required.
Recommendation for respiratory protection during removal process
6.2
Lower Risk Removal of indoor moulds in quantity of less than 10

square feet where the procedure is assessed to pose minimal risk
but where presence of toxic moulds may be of concern.
Verify the type of mould through use of an outside testing agency.

Perform a walk around inspection before setting up work area.
Ensure removal process will only involve minor generation of airborne
spores and will not elevate levels above 150 CFU per cubic centimeter
of air.
Prepare all required tools and PPE in accordance with requirements of
the task and specific site & company safety policies.
Flag off work area and restrict unauthorized persons from entering.

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
6.3
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
10 of 12
Turn of HVAC systems and seal over all system openings (e.g.,
diffusers and return air openings) within or immediately adjacent to the
work area.
Ensure workers in adjacent areas are aware of the material being
removed and that appropriate PPE is required for entry to flagged off
area.
Ensure HEPA filter face respirator with proper fit test completed are
worn at all times.
With all other required PPE worn, workers shall commence careful
removal of mould contaminated building materials using only hand
tools.
Care is to be taken at all times to minimize dust generation created
during the process.
Wash face and hands, and clean and maintain respirator after
completion of mould abatement.
Higher Risk Removal of indoor moulds where over 10 square feet

of a toxic mould is to be abated.
Verify the type of mould through use of an outside testing agency.

Establish the restricted area requirements dependent upon the level of
risk associated with the work. This will be determined by industrial
hygiene professionals contracted to assist with mould identification, air
quality and health and safety concerns.
Establish a project specific procedure to enable work to be undertaken
without resulting in migration of airborne spores. Typically this will be
carried out through installation of HEPA air filtration units in conjunction
with full containment barriers.
Turn off HVAC systems and seal over all system openings within or
immediately adjacent to the work area.
Ensure air monitoring requirements are in place prior to starting any
work where generation of airborne mould spores are expected.
Prior to disturbance of materials, ensure an adequate decontamination
procedure is in place.
When dealt with as a full containment project, mould abatement shall
be treated in the exact manner as asbestos with all procedures
pertaining to asbestos control to be followed.
Wetting will be conducted with the use of detergents and chemicals
that are approved for the specific use.

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
6.4
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
11 of 12
Ensure that a powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) with HEPA filters
are worn at all times during major disturbance or removal of moulds
considered either Hazard Class A or B.
Regardless whether the area is under full containment, workers will
take care to ensure generation of airborne dust is minimized.
Good housekeeping will be maintained to ensure any waste materials
are bagged or containerized.
Loose dust and debris will be cleaned using a HEPA vacuum or
method of wet cleanup. Dry sweeping shall be avoided.
Ensure air monitoring and visual clearances have been given prior to
removal of barriers at completion of the work.

Choose the proper PPE for the procedure dependent upon whether it is
deemed lower risk or higher risk work as defined above in 6.2 & 6.3
Eye Hazards Eye protection (mono goggles) is essential at all times

when working with indoor mould and not using a full face respirator.
Skin Irritation Due to the nature of the moulds irritation and
subsequent reaction of exposed skin can be avoided with use of
neoprene or Nitrile gloves and disposable coveralls with hoods and
elastic at sleeves and ankles.
Vinyl rain suits should be considered as added protection over the
coveralls as a method of protection from chemicals used during the
abatement process as well as leaching of moulds through the coverall
during wet removal processes.
Respiratory Hazards due to Airborne Spores Both acute irritation and
chronic respiratory illness will be avoided with use of an adequate
respirator. For lower risk projects a face air purifying respirator
with HEPA filters is to be worn. For all projects deemed higher risk a
powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) shall be used.
Heat Stress A result of wearing protective clothing and being
subjected to heat from the environment being cleaned. This can be
avoided with introduction of a cool air supply to the work area or in
some cases specialized coveralls with built in cooling system.
Overhead Hazards Head protection is required regardless of hooded
coverall requirements (hard hats shall be worn without exception)
Excessive Noise Levels hearing protection may be required (85 dba
or >).

Mould Abatement
Title:
Effective Date:
June 1, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section :B014
Page #
12 of 12
Confined Spaces follow all Confined Space Requirements. In these

instances a supplied air full face respirator may be required.

Refractory Ceramic Fibre (RCF)
Title:
Effective Date:
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
REFRACTORY CERAMIC FIBRE (RCF)
Issued: May 26, 2006
1 of 10

Title:
Effective Date:
REV No.
AFFECTED
PAGE(S)
May 26, 2006
DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
DESCRIPTION
2 of 10

Title:
Effective Date:
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
3 of 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................7

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
4 of 10
INTRODUCTION
Working with or adjacent to Refractory Ceramic Fibre presents various health
hazards to workers involved in the process. These hazards include inhalation of
airborne fibre, skin irritation and inflammation as well as irritation of the nose and
throat passages. Protection of workers from these hazards is to be our main
focus when work activities involve the presence of Refractory Ceramic Fibre.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
To ensure workers are aware of all hazards related to working around or

handling of Refractory Ceramic Fibres.
2.2
To ensure compliance with the Occupational Health and Safety Codes

and Regulations.
2.3
To ensure all workers are protected from both injury and subsequent
illness related to acute and chronic exposure.
SCOPE
All company facilities, employees, subcontractors, customers and visitors should
be aware of the following when working with or near Refractory Ceramic Fibre.
4.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
4.2
4.3
RCF - Refractory Ceramic Fibre is a man made vitreous fibre, first

produced commercially in the 1950s and were widely used in high
temperature applications such as furnace insulation.
Cristobalite A form of Crystalline Silica which is formed when RCF are
heated above approximately 980 degrees Celsius.
Confined Space An enclosed, or partially enclosed space that is not
because of its design, construction, location or atmosphere, of the work
to it.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5.0
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
5 of 10
OEL The Occupational Exposure Limit in respect to a substance,

Regulations.
Acute Term used to define short term health effects that may be
encountered by workers exposed to a substance.
Chronic Term used to define long term health effects that may be
encountered by workers exposed to a substance.
Containment Method of enclosure to eliminate migration of fibre to
filtration systems.
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Arresting Type of filter utilized for
elimination of airborne fibres and particulates. Used in filter systems for
air handling units, vacuums and respirators.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
5.2
5.3
Approve any deviation from this work procedure.

Coordinating medical evaluations of exposed workers.
Provide for a third party company / laboratory to conduct analysis for

the presence of cristobalite and to conduct air quality monitoring when
required.
made available to the worker.
equipment and PPE.
Conduct job hazard analysis to determine if task is classed as a low or
high risk activity.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.4
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 10
Verify that the workers are trained and qualified to undertake

installation or removal procedures and understand the correct use of
all PPE.
requirements.
documented.
and tagged.
exposure to RCF.
Ensure workers are familiar with the respirator code of practice and are
adequately trained and fit tested.
Worker
5.5
May 26, 2006
Section: B015
Comply with all requirements and recommendations within this

procedure with respect to safe handling of RCF.
Use tools and PPE properly and per this procedure.
Report any hazard or concerns to supervision.
Maintain all tools, respirators and other PPE issued for the work and
return to Supervisor at completion of the task.
Conduct Field Level Hazard Assessments (FLHA) prior to performing
tasks.

with this RCF safe work procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.0
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
7 of 10
PROCEDURES
6.1
Installation or Removal of Refractory Ceramic Fibre (RCF)

Installation or removal of RCF can present acute (short term) hazards
related to both skin, nose and throat irritation. In addition chronic (long
term) health affects resulting from inhalation of fibres are also a concern.
It is suspected by various regulatory agencies that chronic exposures to
RCF may be carcinogenic. When used in high temperature applications
RCF is known to become very brittle and has a tendency to generate
substantial dust and airborne particulate.
The Occupational Exposure Limit for Refractory Ceramic Fibre (RCF) is
0.5 fibres/cc of air.
6.2
Refractory Ceramic Fibres at High Temp. Applications >9800C

It is at higher temperatures that RCF has been found to form Cristobalite
which is a form of crystalline silica. Testing has proven that this
Cristobalite is a significant respiratory hazard when inhaled due to the
fact it breaks down to fibre sizes which are easily inhaled into the lungs.
Crystalline Silica was designated as Group 1 confirmed carcinogen in
humans by the International Agency for Research on Cancer.
The Occupational Exposure Limit for Cristobalite respirable particulate is
0.05 mg/m3 of air.
The following precautions must be implemented before any work is
undertaken where exposure to Refractory Ceramic Fibre may be a hazard.
A pre job hazard assessment to determine if risk of exceeding the OEL

is presented by the work to be carried out.
If exceeding the OEL is a potential hazard, then containment of the
area will be required.
All workers handling the refractory Ceramic Fibre must be provided
and utilize personal protective equipment in accordance with the
requirements as defined within section 6.5 of this procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.3
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
8 of 10
Low Risk- Installation or removal of Refractory Ceramic Fibre where the

procedure is assessed to pose minimal risk and the presence of
Cristobalite is not a concern.

Ensure installation process will only involve minor fibre generation and
no risk of exceeding the OEL is presented.
Prepare all required tools and PPE in accordance with requirements of
the task and specific site and company HS & E policies.
Flag off work area in accordance with site specific policies and ensure
workers adjacent the area are aware of the product being used and
proper recommended PPE required for entry to flagged off area.
Ensure HEPA filter face respirators with proper fit test completed are
worn at all times.
With all other required PPE worn worker shall commence installation
using only hand tools for cutting and fitting of the product. Use of
power tools shall be avoided at all times
Care is to be taken at all times to minimize dust generation created
during cutting or fitting of the product.
are bagged or containerized to ensure airborne fibre levels do not
exceed the OEL.
Warning:
Compressed air will not be used.
6.4
When the installation process will result in substantial amounts of

cutting and as a dust and debris generation is substantial a HEPA
filtered vacuum shall be used to assist with the clean up.
Workers shall avoid dry sweeping of fine dusts where ever possible.
High Risk- Installation or removal of Refractory Ceramic Fibre where

the procedure is assessed to be of higher exposure risk or there is added
potential for the presence of Cristobalite.

Establish the restricted area requirements dependent upon the level of
risk associated with the work. Often this will be determined by
industrial hygiene professionals contracted to assist with air quality and
health and safety.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
9 of 10
Establish procedures to enable work to be undertaken without resulting

in migration of fibre. Typically this will carried out through installation
of air filtration units in conjunction with full containment barriers.
Ensure air monitoring requirements are in place prior to starting any
work where generation of airborne dust is expected.
Utilize a wash station with clean water, soap, nail brush, mirror and
towels. Project personnel, prior to leaving the work area and before
eating, drinking, or smoking, must use the wash station.
When dealt with as a full containment abatement project RCF shall
be treated in the exact manner as asbestos with all procedures
pertaining to asbestos control to be followed.
Ensure that a powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) with HEPA filters
and proper fit test completed is worn at all times during major
disturbance or removal of RCF.
Regardless whether the area is under full containment workers shall
take care to ensure generation of airborne dust is minimized.
are bagged or containerized.
Loose dust and debris shall be cleaned using a HEPA vacuum or
method of wet cleanup. Dry sweeping shall be avoided.
The use of compressed air will be avoided and will not be used outside
of a containment.
Ensure air monitoring and visual clearances have been given prior to
removal of barriers at completion of the work.

Choose the proper PPE for the procedure dependent upon whether it is
deemed low risk or high risk work as defined above in 6.3 & 6.4
Eye Hazards Eye protection is essential at all times when working

with RCF regardless of the risk level determined for the work.
Skin Irritation Due to the nature of the fibres, irritation and abrasion to
exposed skin can occur. Gloves and disposable coveralls with hoods
and elastic at sleeves and ankles will be used.
Respiratory Hazards due to Airborne Dusts Both acute irritation and
chronic respiratory illness can be avoided with use of an adequate
respirator. For low risk projects a face air purifying respirator with
HEPA filters is to be worn. For all projects deemed high risk a
powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) shall always be used.

Title:
Effective Date:
May 26, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B015
Page #
10 of 10
Heat Stress As a result of wearing protective clothing and being

subjected to heat from equipment being insulated or abated. This can
be avoided with the introduction of a cool air supply to the work area or
in some cases specialized coveralls with a built in cooling systems.
Overhead Hazards Head protection is required regardless of hooded
coverall requirements (hard hats shall be worn without exception).
Excessive Noise Levels hearing protection may be required (85 dba
or >).
Confined Spaces follow all Confined Space Requirements.

Title:
Genie Panel Cradle, Installation and Operation
Effective Date
October 16, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
1 of 9

Title:
Effective Date

October 16, 2006
DATE
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
DESCRIPTION
2 of 9

Title:
Effective Date

October 16, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
3 of 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURE .............................................................................................................5

Title:
Effective Date
1.0
Section: B016

October 16, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
4 of 9
INTRODUCTION
Operations of aerial work platforms when used with rigging attachments present
additional hazards. Ensuring that equipment is designed and used properly and
personnel are properly trained is critical for ensuring the health and safety of
workers, equipment and client assets.
2.0
3.0
4.0
PURPOSE
2.1
Identify applications and limitations of the Genie Panel Cradle.
2.2
Identify installation procedure of the Panel Cradle.
2.3
Establish requirements for hoisting, when utilizing this equipment.
SCOPE
3.1
All company facilities, employees and subcontractors utilizing the Genie

Panel Cradle.
3.2
Other procedures that may apply:

Aerial Work Platforms (AWP)
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Genie Panel Cradle A device produced and marketed by Genie to be

attached to specific Genie, aerial work platforms to facilitate the raising
and lowering of panels.
4.2
AWP Aerial Work Platform
4.3
Competent Adequately qualified, suitable trained and with sufficient

experience to safely perform work without supervision or with only a
minimal degree of supervision.
4.4
Trained A worker who holds a certificate to verify AWP training that is

approved and valid for the site where the equipment is being operated and
is familiar with this procedure.

Title:
Effective Date
5.0
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
5 of 9
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Supervision
Ensure the panel cradle is utilized for appropriate tasks and within the
manufacturers limitations.
Ensure that the panel cradle is installed correctly and only to AWPs
specified by the manufacturer.
Ensure the inspection of the panel cradle is included in the daily AWP
inspection.
Ensure the operator is familiar with this procedure, competent, trained
and in possession of an approved AWP training certificate.
5.2
5.3
Audit compliance to this procedure.
Worker
6.0
October 16, 2006
Section: B016
Install and utilize the cradle panel as per manufacturers specifications

and limitations.
Be familiar with this procedure and maintain a valid AWP operators
certificate.
Inspect the panel cradle prior to use.
Conduct a Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
Ensure other workers are restricted from entering the potential drop
zone.
PROCEDURE
6.1
Modification Approval
Genie has authorized modification to the Genie Booms listed below by
attaching hardware to the platform rails for the purpose of lifting solid
panels, provided the criteria herein is strictly adhered to.
Approved models:
S-40 & S-45

S-60 & S-65
S-80 & S-85

Title:
Effective Date
October 16, 2006
6.2
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
6 of 9
S-100 & S-105

S-120 & S-125
Z-30/20N (non-RJ models)
Z-34/22N
Z-34/22
Z-45/25
Z-60/34
Z-80/60
Z-45/22 models after serial number Z45-00001
Z-135/70
Not approved on Z-45/22 models before serial number 4593-3613
Panel Cradle Assembly

1) Ensure warning decal is attached and legible on the front of each panel
cradle.
2) Install rubber bumper 1 in the panel cradle base. See the illustration.
3) Secure the bumper with 2 high profile lock nuts and 2 washers.
6.3
Panel Cradle Installation

1) Insert the hook piece through the slots in the panel cradle base.
2) Hook the panel cradle to the bottom platform tube in the desired
location.
3) Install rubber bumper 2 through the panel cradle base and the hook
piece. See the illustration.
4) Secure with two low profile lock nuts.
5) If the panel cradle is installed at a platform floor support tube, insert the
U-bolt through the floor, around the tube and into the panel cradle
base.
6) Secure the U-bolt with 2 nuts and 2 washers. Proceed to step 9.
7) If the panel cradle is not installed at a platform floor support tube, use
the aluminum tube provided.
8) Place the tube between the panel cradle and the platform floor. Insert
the U-bolt through the floor, around the tube and into the panel cradle
base.
9) Repeat above for the second set of parts.

Title:
Effective Date
6.4
October 16, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
7 of 9
Installation of Padding
1) Install the 2 pieces of padding on the platform rails. Position the
padding to protect the panels from contact with the platform rails.

Title:
Effective Date
6.5
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Page #
8 of 9
Installation of Straps
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6.6
October 16, 2006
Section: B016
Open the clamp and install it around a vertical platform rail tube.
Insert a bold with a washer through one side of the clamp.
Install the strap assembly end plate onto the bolt.
Insert the bolt through the other side of the clamp.
Secure with a washer and a nut. Do not over-tighten. The strap
assembly end plate should be able to slide on the platform rail.
Panel Cradle Safety Rules
Do not exceed the rated platform capacity. Combined weight of

cradles, panels, occupants, tools and any other equipment must not
exceed rated capacity.
The panel cradles weigh 15 lbs. / 6.8 kg.
Maximum capacity of the panel cradles is 250 lbs. / 113 kg.

Title:
Effective Date
6.7
October 16, 2006
Revision # 0
Controlled Document
Section: B016
Page #
9 of 9
The weight of panel cradles and load in panel cradles may limit
maximum number of occupants in platform to one person.
Do not operate unless you are adequately instructed and are aware of
all hazards associated with lifting panels.
Do not cause a horizontal force or side load to machine by raising or
lowering a fixed or overhanging load.
Maximum vertical height of panels: 4 ft / 1.2 m.
Maximum wind speed: 15 mph / 6.7 m/sec / 24 km/h.
Maximum panel area: 32 sq. ft. / 3m2 .
Utilize flagging or fixed barricades to identify the overhead hazard and
restrict other workers from entering a potential drop zone.
Operation
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Secure both panel cradles to the platform.

Place the load so that it rests in both panel cradles.
Center the load on the platform.
Secure the load to the platform using the strap. Tighten the strap.
If there is wind present, use additional straps to secure both ends of
the panel to the basket.

Title:
Aerial Work Platforms
Effective Date:
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
1 of 10

Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B017

December 7, 2006
DATE
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
2 of 10
DESCRIPTION
Nov-13
Add: Inspections and repairs complete before use
Nov-13
Add: Secured against movement when not in use
Nov-13
Add- Seatbelts worn when fitted with roll over
Nov-13
Add operators protected by cab or guard if reqd

Title:
Effective Date:

December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
3 of 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................4
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................6
APPENDIX #1
AERIAL WORK PLATFORM PRE-OPERATIONAL INSPECTION .................................... 10

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
4 of 10
INTRODUCTION
The operation of any aerial work platforms is subject to hazards that can be
controlled or eliminated by having trained and competent personnel safely
operating and maintaining the equipment.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
Provide standard procedures for working with aerial work platforms.
2.2
Identify minimum operator qualifications
SCOPE
3.1
Additional procedures that apply:
Fall Protection
WARNING
At no time will a worker operate an Aerial Work Platform (AWP) without a
valid and recognized fall protection certificate and a valid AWP certificate
from a recognized training provider.
4.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
AWP - Aerial Work Platform is a self propelled, boom supported,

elevating work platform or a scissorlift.
4.2
Outriggers Extendable or fixed metal arms, attached to the base of the

machine, for the purpose of stabilizing the AWP.
4.3
Work Site Means a location where a worker is likely to be engaged in

any occupation. This includes operation of any vehicle or mobile
equipment as part of a work activity.
4.4
High Hazard Work Environment Work involving construction,

maintenance, fabrication or demolition, or on energized/operating

Title:
Effective Date:
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
5 of 10
equipment, working in extreme hot or cold, confined space, running

machinery, etc.
4.5
Competent Worker Three characteristics are used to determine a

worker as competent:
4.6
Adequately Qualified The worker is in possession of a valid and

recognized fall protection and AWP operator certificate.
Suitably Trained The worker must have training that is appropriate to
the tasks, equipment, etc., that will be performed or used.
Sufficient Experience - to safely operate the AWP without supervision
or with only a minimal degree of supervision
M.S.A.D Minimum Safe Approach Distance.

Operating Voltage of Overhead
Power Line Between Conductors
0-750V Insulated Conductors
0-40 kV
69kV, 72kV
138kV, 144kV
230kV, 240kV
500kV
5.0
Safe Limit of Approach

Distance for Persons
and Equipment
300 mm
1 ft.
3.0 m
10 ft.
3.5 m
11.5 ft.
4.0 m
13 ft.
5.0 m
16.25 ft.
7.0 m
23 ft.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
General Manager/Project Manager/Superintendent
5.2
Ensure workers are aware of AWP procedures, site rules and

regulations
Will comply at all times with applicable Provincial OH&S Regulations

and Codes pertaining to general safety, and the use of an AWP
Ensure workers are conducting Field Level Hazard Assessments
(FLHA) prior to operating an AWP.
Evaluate hazard and risks in regards with working on an AWP
Ensure workers and subcontractors are compliant to this procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.3
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 10
Ensure worker has the appropriate training in AWP operation, fall

protection and is competent to perform the assigned task.
Operate the equipment safely.

Cooperate with the employer in following all requirements of the
Occupational Health and Safety Acts, Regulations, Codes and the
requirements of this procedure.
Notify their supervisor of any health concerns that may impair their
ability to safely operate the AWP.
Wear all required PPE
Participate in the FLHA
Inspect the equipment and document the inspection before each use
as specified by the manufacturer.
Tag and remove from service:
o Any defective equipment that is in a condition that may
compromise the health or safety of workers using or
transporting it.
o Equipment that will not perform that function for which it is
intended or was designed.
o Equipment that is not strong enough for its purpose, or has
an obvious defect (s).
Certified, trained and posses a valid fall protection certificate and a
valid AWP certificate from a recognized training facility.
Ensure tools and materials are properly secured and evenly distributed
on the platform.
Maintain full control of the equipment at all times
6.0
Revision # 1
Worker
5.4
December 7, 2006
Section: B017
Will conduct regular compliance inspections

with this AWP Procedure.
PROCEDURES
6.1
General Rules of Operation
A 100% Safe Meeting will be conducted with worker(s) and supervisor.

A FLHA will be completed to identify hazards and controls for the task.

Title:
Effective Date:
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
7 of 10
Workers with known health concerns will not be authorized to work on

an AWP (subject to dizziness, seizures or are bothered by heights etc)
Only trained, competent, qualified workers with a valid fall protection
certificate and a valid AWP certificate will be authorized to operate an
AWP.
Occupants shall not stand, climb or sit on the midrail or toprail of the
aerial platform.
At no time will workers exit an AWP at elevation without an approved
fall arrest system that is independent of the AWP.
When riding in or working from platform, both feet must be firmly
positioned on the floor of the basket.
The use of planks, ladders or any other devices on the platform for
achieving additional height or reach are prohibited.
If a machine is equipped with outriggers, they will be used in
accordance
with
the
manufacturers
specifications
and
recommendations. Seat belts are to be used on all powered mobile
equipment fitted with roll over protection
The operator shall maintain the minimum safe approach distance
(MSAD) from energized conductors at all times. If you dont know the
voltage, stay a minimum of 7.0m/23 ft. away.
The aerial platform shall be operated only on surfaces as specified by
the manufacturer.
All occupants of the aerial platform shall wear a fall protection system
and shall be connected to the anchorage point (s) provided on the
aerial platform in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and
OH&S Codes and Regulations.
Do not operate machine when rated wind conditions are exceeded,
which are posted on the machine or in the operators manual.
At a temperature of -40C or lower, decrease the capacity by 2% for
each degree below the -40C.
Aerial work operations shall be suspended when an electrical storm is
imminent.
No modifications or alterations of an aerial lift platform will be made
without the written consent / permission of the manufacturer for that
particular machine. All operators are to be protected from falling
objects by an overhead cab or guard when applicable.
The rated work load, horizontal force and number of occupants of the
machine will not be exceeded at any time.
The AWP will not be utilized as an equipment or material hoist. All
items raised must be within the confines of the basket and rated
capacity.

Title:
Effective Date:
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
8 of 10
The aerial platform shall not be left running when unattended, or stored
in the elevated position and will be secured against unintentional
movement when not in use.
The machine will not be driven on grades and slopes exceeding those
specified by the manufacturer.
The machine will not be transported in the elevated position.
Movement of the machine in a congested area or when the boom is
elevated requires the assistance of a spotter to direct the movement.
Horseplay or misuse of this equipment will not be tolerated.
Never disable or modify the footswitch or any other safety device on a
machine.
Regular inspections are required as per Manufactures specifications,
any repairs required are to be completed from a certified mechanic
before using the machine.
Note: It is your responsibility to read and understand the safety

manual and the manufacturers manual(s) before operating any
machine.
6.2
Workplace Inspections
Before the aerial platform is used and during use, the area in which the
aerial platform is to be used, shall be inspected for possible hazards such
as, but not limited to;
6.3
Drop-offs or holes
Slope (s)
Path of travel
Covering which may conceal holes and other hazards
Bumps and floor obstructions
Debris
Overhead obstructions and electrical conductors
Hazardous atmospheres
Wind and weather conditions, and other possible unsafe conditions
Inadequate surface and support to withstand all load forces imposed
by the aerial platform in all operating configurations.
Snagged Platform
If the aerial platform or any part of the machine becomes caught,
snagged, or otherwise prevented from normal motion by adjacent

Title:
Effective Date:
December 7, 2006
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B017
Page #
9 of 10
structures or other obstacles such that reversal does not free the aerial
platform, all personnel shall be removed from the platform before attempts
are made to free the aerial platform using the lower controls or other safe
means.
6.4
Pre-Operation Inspection
Before you begin your workday, and for every new operator you must
inspect the machine using the inspection book located in the weather
proof compartment on the machine. Do not operate the machine until all
deficiencies are corrected and all systems are in good operational
conditions. The inspection includes but is not limited to the following.
Decals missing damaged or illegible

Connecting Components, Cylinders, Pivot Pins, Bushings, Retaining
Devices for damage, missing, loose, leaks etc.
Tires cuts, bulges, pressure, excessive or uneven wear, nails etc
Wheels damaged rims, missing or loose wheel nuts, bolts or obvious
misalignment.
Fluid levels hydraulic oil, coolant, fuel, engine oil.
Battery connections loose, corroded.
Wires and cables loose, damaged, broken.
Welds and structural cracked welds, obvious structural damage, hair
line cracks.
Hydraulic system leaks or damage to hoses, valves, fittings,
cylinders (keep hands etc clear).
Outriggers/Stabilizers if so equipped.
Upper/Lower controls including emergency controls.
Guardrails and gates.
Note: Consult operators/service manual for additional inspection

items.
6.5
Function Test
A function check of all systems must be preformed once the walk around
inspection is complete, in an area free of overhead and ground level
obstructions. First using the ground controls, check all functions controlled
by the ground controls. Next, using the platform controls, check all
functions controlled by the platform controls as specified in the operators /
service manual for that particular machine.
Aerial Work Platform Pre-Operational Inspection

Unit:
Check the appropriate box:
Hours:
Date:
S = Satisfactory U = Unsatisfactory N/A = Not Applicable
S
U
N/A
Comments
1. Air/Hydraulic System
2. Electrical Apparatus
3. Fuel System Leaks
4. Placards, Warning, Control Marking
5. Operators / Safety Manual
6. Fire Extinguishers
7. Housekeeping
8. Crankcase Oil
9. Battery
10. Hydraulic Oil
11. Coolant
12. Chassis
13. Outriggers / Stabilizers
14. Extendable Axles
15. Tires and Wheels
16. Cables and Wiring Harness
17. Booms/Towers/Risers/Jibs
18. Scissors Assembly
19. Fiberglass / Insulation Components
20. Movement Alarms
21. Upper Control Override
22. Capacity Indicator
23. Platform Foot / Dead Man Switch
24. Pothole Protectors
25. Personal Fall Protection
26. Interlocks/Envelope Mgmt
Systems/ Limit Switches (Through
Function Tests)
27. Tilt Alarm
28. Fall Protection Anchorage
29. Oscillating Axles
30. Platform Structure
31. Guardrail System
32. Gate and Locking Device
33. Platform Extension
34. Travel
35. Steering
36. Boom Up / Down
37. Boom In / Out
38. Swing
39. Platform Level
40. Emergency Controls
Consult operators/service manual for additional inspection items.
Do not operate aerial lift until unsafe conditions are corrected.
WARNING: Failure to comply with manufacturers operations manual may result in machine
damage, personal injury or death and is a safety violation.
Yes
Operator completed function test per manufacturers manual:
Operators Name (Print):
Operator Signature:

Preventative Maintenance of Tools & Equipment
Title:
Effective Date:
May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
1 of 9
Preventative Maintenance
Of
Tools and Equipment
Issued: November 10, 2006

Title:
Effective Date:

Revision # 2
May 18,, 2009
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
2 of 9
DESCRIPTION
May 18, 2009
6.4 (NOTE) Before Starting Machinery
July 20 2012
Add Equipment inventory

Title:
Effective Date:

May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
3 of 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................4
2.0
PURPOSE...................................................................................................................4
3.0
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................4
4.0
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................5
5.0
6.0
PROCEDURES ...........................................................................................................6
APPENDIX #1
TOOL / EQUIPMENT INSPECTION RECORD ..................................................................... 9

Title:
Effective Date:
1.0
May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
4 of 9
INTRODUCTION
It is our intention to consistently provide our employees with tools and equipment
that are in good condition and safe to use. Due to the nature of our activities and
the constantly changing work environments there is a potential for tools and
equipment to become worn, broken, defective or unsafe. Inspecting tools and
equipment on a regular, ongoing basis will ensure that defective items are
removed from service.
2.0
3.0
PURPOSE
2.1
To identify a minimum standard for the inspection of tools and equipment

with a means to physically identify those tools and equipment that have
been inspected.
2.2
To identify tools and equipment that are unsafe, damaged or in need of

repair and to physically identify those tools and equipment and prevent
their further use until deficiencies are corrected.
2.3
To ensure tools and equipment are maintained as per manufacturers

specifications and regulatory standards.
2.4
To identify which tools and equipment require inspection and maintenance

as per this procedure.
2.5
Ensure only competent employees or repair companies are performing

inspections, maintenance and repairs.
SCOPE
3.1
Without the intent of supplying an all inclusive list, this procedure applies
to:
Fall protection equipment such as harnesses, lanyards, lifelines,

and rope grabs.
Asbestos abatement equipment such as negative air units and
HEPA vacuums.
Electrical tools such as drills, grinder, saws, ground fault
interrupters and extension cords.
Respiratory protection equipment.
Ladders.
Items such as breaks, sheers and rolls.

Title:
Effective Date:
3.2
May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
5 of 9
Rigging such as slings, hooks, shackles, come-along and

chainfalls.
Additional procedures that apply to Preventative Maintenance of Tools

and Equipment are:
Any procedure within this HS&E Procedures Manual that is specific

to the tool or equipment being inspected or maintained.
Warning:
This procedure is not intended to replace the
responsibility of users to inspect tools and equipment for defects
and current colour codes before each use, and to remove defective
items from service.
4.0
5.0
DEFINITIONS
4.1
Certified tools or equipment that require inspections or maintenance

from outside sources due to requirements imposed by legislation or the
manufacturer. i.e. retractable life lines.
4.2
Competent Person refers to a person whose trade or experience has

given them the knowledge and skill to conduct inspection of the tools and
equipment.
4.3
Inspection is to visually check for any signs of damage or wear and

may include a functionality check.
4.4
Routine Maintenance work that must be performed at set intervals to

ensure a tool or equipment functions properly as per the manufacturers
recommendations and legislative requirements.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
Audit for compliance to the Preventative Maintenance of Tools and

Equipment Procedure.

Title:
Effective Date:
5.2
Controlled Document
Page #
6 of 9
Provide required and appropriate tools and equipment that is in

safe working order for all workers.
Ensure only competent workers perform inspections and or

maintenance on tools or equipment.
Provide for an outside agency to perform inspections and
maintenance when certification is required and no in house person
is qualified.
Post current colour code requirements at the tool crib and notify
crew of inspection requirements two weeks prior to due date.
Ensure documentation of inspections and maintenance is
maintained at the inspection location and returned to head office
when the project is completed or the tools are returned.
Ensure defective tools or equipment is red tagged and removed
from service immediately.
Arrange for the repair or replacement of damaged or defective tools
or equipment.
Ensure tool or equipment requiring inspection and that are in use,
are identified with the appropriate colour code.
Worker
6.0
Revision # 2
Project Manager/Superintendent
5.3
May 18,, 2009
Section: B018
Inspect all tools and equipment prior to use.

Verify that all tool and equipment are identified with the appropriate
colour code prior to use.
Remove defective or damaged tools or equipment from service, tag
them and inform supervision.
DO NOT use defective or damaged tools or equipment.
PROCEDURES
6.1
Inspections
Inspection of tools and equipment will be performed by competent

personnel whose trade or experience has given them knowledge of the
tool or equipment being inspected.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.2
May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
7 of 9
Inspection criteria and documents are contained in the section of this

manual that covers the specific tool or equipment. An equipment
inventory has been established and will be maintained at the head
office. For those items not specifically covered by a section of this
manual, a tool and equipment inspection record (appendix 1) has been
established and shall all be maintained at the head office.
Colour Coding
Upon passing an inspection, tools and equipment will be documented and
colour coded. Colour coding can be done with tape being wrapped
around a part of the item at an obvious location. The yearly colour codes
are as follows:
January to March Blue

April to June Brown
July to September Yellow
October to December White
Colours will be posted at the tool cribs or job boxes to identify the
appropriate colour for each quarter.
Two weeks before the end of the current quarter, notice will be issued
in a 100% Safe Meeting and/or a Weekly Safety Meetings to advise of
the new colour code and inspection requirements.
This two week lead period will allow for the gradual inspection of tools
and equipment and avoid problems with inspection of large quantities
and last minute inspections.
During this period both colour codes will be valid.
Note: Tools and equipment that are in storage and not expected to be
used in a reasonable length of time do not require the inspection and
current colour code. Tools and equipment removed from storage will
require an inspection and subsequent colour coding, prior to utilization.
6.3
Defective Tools and Equipment
Defective tools or equipment requiring repairs or disposal will be

tagged with a red tag stating Danger Do Not Use.
Users will note the defect or required repairs on the red tag as
specifically as possible.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.4
May 18,, 2009
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B018
Page #
8 of 9
Damaged or defective tools or equipment will be removed from service

and will not be returned to service until appropriate repairs are
completed or the item replaced.
Maintenance of Vehicles and Mobile Equipment

Vehicles and equipment such as trucks, forklifts, personnel hoists, cranes
etc. will be maintained and repaired in accordance with the manufacturers
specification, regulatory requirements or if required, those of a
professional engineer. The Project Manager/ Superintendent will establish
a schedule and maintain documentation to ensure compliance.
Note: Before starting any machinery, an operator must ensure that
starting the machinery will not endanger the operator or another worker.
While operating machinery, an operator must ensure that its operation will
not endanger the operator or another worker.
TOOL / EQUIPMENT INSPECTION RECORD

TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT. #
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
OCT-DEC
White
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
TOOL/EQUIP
INSPECTOR (Print)
IDENT.#
PASSED
FAILED
JAN-MAR
DATE:
Blue
APR-JUN
Brown
JUL-SEP
Yellow
COMMENT
Controlled Form Reference Number: B018 -1
Scaffolding
Safe Operating Procedure
Title:
Effective Date:
Scaffolding Best Practices and Procedures

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
1 of 58
Scaffolding Procedures and Best Practices
Issued: January,2013
Author: John Snyder
Document Control # B019

Approved By: Sheldon Dobish
Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
DATE
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
2 of 58
DESCRIPTION
All
June 21-2013 Insert new material, restructure entire B019
49
Nov 6 - 2013
Add Load limits not to be exceeded
45
Nov 6 - 2013
Add Colored inspection tags
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Table of contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
0
Section: B019

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Page #
Controlled Document
3 of 58
Page
Scaffolders tools
Tube and Clamp Components.
System Components..
Aluminum Decking....
Wood Decking...
Knots and Ropes...
Toeboards..
Guardrails..
10
Foundations..
Ties..
Ladders..
Ladder Cage..
Tube and Clamp Tower Scaffolds.
1. Tube Standards...
2. Tube Ledgers..
3. Tube Braces...
4. Right Angles/Swivels
Buttress Scaffold
System Tower scaffolds.
Platforms...
1. Light duty....
2. Medium duty...
3. Heavy duty..
Constructing the Simple System Tower.
1. Pre-Planning
2. Base.
3. Installing a Ladder..
4. Installing Handrails and Swing-Gate..
Constructing the Simple Tube and Clamp Tower
1. Pre-Planning
2. Base.
3. Deck Standard/English
Cantilever and Hangar Scaffolds..
1. Cantilever
2. Hangar.
3. Beam Cantilevers and Hangars...
Competency Sign off...
Scaffold Tags
Engineered Scaffolds
Scaffold Construction..
Scaffold Equipment Handling...
Scaffold Modification
Scaffold Dismantle
Glossary of Terminology
11
12
12
13
15
15
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
23
26
27
29
29
30
33
34
34
39
41
32
45
49
49
50
51
51
52
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
4 of 58
INTRODUCTION
There are many hazards associated with the erection and dismantling of scaffolding. Every effort must be
made to eliminate the risks to property, workers handling materials, workers erecting, modifying and
dismantling scaffolds, and workers in the vicinity and the users of the scaffold.
PURPOSE
To insure that the most appropriate type of scaffold is constructed that provides the safest possible
access to the work face.
Identification of all tasks required, the hazards associated with each task and the necessary methods
of mitigating those hazards.
To ensure that all scaffolds constructed comply with all regulatory legislation, manufacturers
specifications, company and industry standards, and best practices.
SCOPE
RESPONSIBILITIES
Ensure that projects have the necessary resources to comply with CSA, OH&S, industry and
company legislation, standards, rules, procedures and practices.
Ensure that site supervision is aware of their responsibilities and is in compliance to this
procedure.
Superintendent
Ensure compliance with CSA, OH&S, industry and company legislation, standards, rules,
procedures and practices.
Ensure that materials are used in accordance with manufacturers requirements and
specifications.
Identify site specific HS&E requirements.
Ensure that scaffold types selected minimize risks to erectors as well as users.
Ensure material is properly inspected prior to use and prior to modification or dismantle.
Ensure that those inspecting and tagging scaffolds are qualified to do so and follow the
procedure.
Ensure that all workers engaged in a work activity are competent to perform the task or
are working under the direct supervision of a competent worker.
Ensure engineering is performed when required and in accordance with the procedure.
Monitor HS&E performance, identify areas to improve and implement measures to improve.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
5 of 58
Foremen
Ensure all involved personnel in the crew understand their jobs, responsibilities and
have the necessary equipment to perform their job in a safe manner.
Ensure that workers are not assigned a task for which they are not competent and if so
under the direct supervision of a competent worker.
Ensure worker compliance with all legislation, this manual and manufacturer specifications.
Monitor conditions (weather, adjacent and conflicting tasks) and reassign crews when
hazards cant be avoided or controlled.
Assignment of an appropriate number of workers to each job so as to minimize risks.
Inspection and tagging of scaffolds. Re inspection of scaffolds as per requirements.
Tag scaffolds red and take remedial action when scaffolds are found to have been damaged
in use or found to be in an unsafe condition.
Ensure that scaffold types selected minimize risks to erectors as well as users.
Insure that all scaffold material is properly inspected and fit for use.
Report any instances of potential use exceeding the specified duty rating to their supervisor
so that the necessary revisions are made to upgrade the duty rating or have engineering
performed in accordance with the procedure.
Ensure engineered scaffolds are constructed to engineering specifications and within the
stated tolerances.
Identify and communicate any changes in legislation relevant to scaffolding.
Monitor for compliance.
Review and approve any changes to new or revised HS&E procedures.
Employees
Comply with all relevant legislation, this manual, site rules and industry practices.
Inspect all material prior to use. Separate and tag any equipment found to be substandard.
Request additional crew when the risks of the job can be reduced by doing so.
Maintain effective communication between crew members at all times.
Identify any scaffolds that have been damaged in use or improperly tagged. Red tag the
scaffold in question and report it to their foreman.
Identify and report to their foreman any potential use of scaffolding that could exceed the scaffolds
duty rating.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
6 of 58
1. Scaffolders tools
-25 foot tape measure
-torpedo level
-Straight claw 22oz. hammer
-Line-mans pliers
-adjustable wrench
2. Tube and Clamp Components
Right angle
Author: John Snyder
Swivel
scaffold tube

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
7 of 58
3. System Components
Ledger
Ladder
Screw Jack
Standard
Collar
Bay Brace
Base plate
Starter bracket
Assembled
4. Aluminum Decking
-Aluminum decking comes in standard widths of 19
-The lengths vary from 2 to 10
-Inspect the hooks located on the ends for cracks, unusual bending or metal fatigue.
-There is a 3/8 plywood top, so ensure there is no wood rotting, roles or painting on surface.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
8 of 58
5. Wood Decking
-Always stack wood products off ground to avoid rot
-Use approved wood scaffold planks certified from manufacturer with load bearing specs
-Laminated wood planking must be certified from manufacturer
-Check plank ends for cracks no more than 1/8 wide, and 12 long on planks 6 to 9
-Check plank ends for cracks no more than 1/8 wide, and 18 long on planks 10 to 16
-Saw kerfs on planks must be taken out of service or sawn to eliminate kerf.
Stacked plywood
Stacked planks
Plank with cracked, split ends and a saw kerf
-Wood planks must be secured on scaffold by means of cleats to prevent planks from movement.
-Cleats are typically made of spruce 2 x 4, and sawn to 9 in length.
-To install cleats, use 3 coated nails.
-Hammer nails at least 1 from ends of cleat to avoid splitting the cleat. Nail at both sides of cleat and as
well in the middle of the cleat.
-If planks are installed for the preferred decking, allow at a minimum of 6 overhang at both ends, and a
maximum of 1.
Plank with cleats installed on both ends
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
9 of 58
6. Knots and Ropes

-The Clove Hitch should be used on round objects such as tubes, standards, and ledgers.
-The Bowline knot should be applied for tying on a canvass bag.
Clove hitch
Bowline
-The rope used for hoisting and lowering material should be 3/4 natural fiber manila, or synthetic
polyester.
-Check ropes before use for burns, wear, stretching fatigue and general acceptable condition.
-Always store ropes in a cool dry location after use.
7. Toeboards
-Must have a height no less than 14 cm (5 )
-The maximum gap between working deck and bottom of toeboard is 6mm (1/4)
-Must be able to support a force of 50lbs of horizontal or vertical pressure
-Installed on scaffolds with a height of 1.22 m, (4) or greater, or at a lower height where there is
potential to create a hazard due to objects falling from the scaffold or if there is an existing hazard prior
to build.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
10 of 58
8. Guardrails
-Top rail installed at the minimum of the 1 meter (39 in.), and a maximum of 1.14 meters (45 in) from
deck height
- Bottom rail or mid-rail installed at the minimum of the .48 meters (19 in), and a maximum of .55
meters (22 in) from deck height
-Guardrails installed on all open sides regardless of scaffold height
-Top guardrails must be able to withstand minimum of 200lbs applied horizontal force on a scaffold
with no secondary fall restraint system
-Top guardrails must be able to withstand minimum of 100lbs applied horizontal force on a scaffold
with a second point of fall restraint system
-Mid guardrails must be able to withstand minimum of 150lbs applied horizontal force on a scaffold
with no secondary fall restraint system
-Mid guardrails must be able to withstand minimum of 75lbs applied horizontal force on a scaffold with
a second point of fall restraint system
-A self-closing top rail swing gate must be installed and either swing inward or upward
-A crawl through is acceptable only if implacable or impossible to install a swing gate
-When installing the guardrails the maximum distance between standard posts is 3m (10).
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
11 of 58
9. Foundations
-The foundation must be able to support the load that would be imposed with a safety factor of 2:1. This
will allow for ground conditions to change slightly without affecting the integrity of the foundation.
-All scaffolds should have wooden sills constructed of 2 x 12 x 12, these act as a load distributer and
must be secured to the baseplate or scaffold jack
-The tower scaffold must be constructed on level surface.
-If the tower scaffold is constructed on earth ground, ensure any debris, snow, or ice is removed before
scaffold build begins
-If there is an evacuation nearby, place the closest standard legs at least 1 meter (4) away from the
evacuation, or fill the depression to level, if possible, and compact ground.
-If you erect a scaffold on a solid concrete base but has snow or ice built up as the top layer, the ice
could melt at a different rate and create a very serious potential for scaffold failure. As mentioned the
scaffold tower has to be erected on firm solid level ground.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B019

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
12 of 58
10. Ties
-A tie in to a permanent (solid) structure is required if height exceeds the base on either, width or length,
by a ratio of 3:1.
-A tie is also required if there is a cantilever or hanger that exceeds, 25.4cm (10), on a free standing
scaffold with a greater base of 1.5m x 1.5m (5x5).
-Scaffolds with a smaller base than 1.5m x 1.5m free standing, are not acceptable to install the 25.4cm
(10) unsupported deck.
11. Ladders
-Typically ladders are 5 or 3; however there are some suppliers that have 6 ladders.
-The ladder below has a fixed or attached starter bracket which slides up or down between the top 2
ladder rungs.
-This type of ladder is attached by means of right angles to the ladder standard.
-The separate starter bracket is used to start a ladder from the base level and is positioned in place under
the foremost bottom ladder rung.
-Ladder cages shall be installed on a scaffold that extends beyond 10 feet in height, or lower if there is a
hazard or potential hazard that exists.
-Each access run of ladders cannot exceed 20 feet without providing a completely decked-in rest lift
with handrails and toeboards.
-A ladder access shall be installed every 20 feet of horizontal run.
Starter bracket
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
13 of 58
12. Ladder Cage

-The ladder cage is installed to act as a means of fall prevention, and contain the fall impact zone in case
a fall does occur.
-The ladder cage should be constructed as the scaffold is being erected.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
14 of 58
Ladder Cage (continued)

-The bottom of the ladder cage standards will have a distance of not less than 8 feet from ground level.
-The inside dimensions of the ladder cage (from ladder face) shall be between the minimum, 30 x 30,
and a maximum of 32 x 32.
-The ladder cage standards shall be placed on the inside, and the ledgers placed on the outside.
-The ladder cage must have a load pick up in the form of a cantilever/hangar, or other means to support
a 5,000 lbs. shock load.
-The distance between ladder cage standards is no more than 6.
Plan View
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
15 of 58
13. Tube and Clamp Tower Scaffolds

-The tube and clamp scaffold consists of 4 basic elements:
1. Tube Standards- This tube is installed in the vertical position and can incorporate functions such as
the scaffold leg load bearing post, the vertical ladder post, or even a 5 tube to aid the install of a
swing gate.
2. Tube Ledgers- This tube is installed in the horizontal position and can support many functions.
Some of these include; a ridged horizontal brace tying two or more standards together, used as a fall
restraint system (handrail), or as a load supporting tube securely positioned on an I-beam for a
hanger or cantilever from process rack structure.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
16 of 58
3. Tube Braces- The tube brace is typically used in the diagonal position between two adjacent node
points and secures standards from movement. This brace tube can have a load force imposed if used
with a ladder cage, or on cantilever scaffolds
4. Right Angles, Swivels- These components are installed on the scaffold tubes and are designed to fix
two tubes at 90 angles, these couplers are right angles. The swivel is designed to install a tube
brace, and can rotate 360, giving flexibility to any angle of brace.
-An additional component includes the tube joiner. This coupler enables a tube to be joined to another tube
allowing the overall length to be expanded.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
17 of 58
14. Buttress Scaffold

-A buttress is designed to assist a freestanding scaffold to expand its base to a 3:1 ratio without
completing the additional bay lifts to the total height. It acts much like a tie- brace to keep the total
tower ridged from falling over. The buttress braces will extend to reach a node point so the height does
not exceed 3 times its base.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
18 of 58
15. System Tower Scaffold

-This is most preferred scaffold to use industrial and commercial wide, because of its high durability,
ease of assembly and quickness to erect.
-There are preset heights for install of ledgers and braces called rosettes. These rosettes are spaced 20
apart.
-There are various holes surrounding the rosette, for the ledger and brace wedge to fit into.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
19 of 58
16. Platforms
-There are 3 general classifications to weights that can be imposed on a scaffold platform; these are light,
medium, and heavy duty load ratings. The rating will determine the preferred allowable distances between
the standards. It is important to remember each manufacture of tube scaffold poles can have different load
ratings.
-Follow the manufactures specifications for allowable leg loading of tube standards.
-The horizontal ledger, either tube or system, changes definition when decking is installed to support that
working platform. These scaffold supports are called Transoms.
-When selecting the proper decking material whether planks or aluminum decks, medium duty scaffolds
require a layer of plywood covering the surface area on top of the decking material. This plywood top
layer distributes point loading equipment such as a welders pipe tripod stand to more of the surface area.
-Heavy duty scaffolds require doubled up laminated planking. The first layer is length way from transom to
transom, and the second layer of laminated planks, width way. These 2 layers shall cover the surface area of
the working platform.
-While building a scaffold, workers must have at a minimum of 2 scaffold planks to work from. These
planks must be secured from movement.
-When constructing multiple lifts or platforms, maintain a 2m (66) distance between lifts. This allows
suitable working headroom height.
-Any working platform constructed will have a minimum working width of 60cm (24). This can accommodate either
2 laminated scaffold planks wide or 1 aluminum deck.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
20 of 58
1. Light Duty
-The light duty scaffold platform can support 25 lbs. per square foot, distributed evenly. The platform can be
constructed of industry standard laminated wood planking, or the manufactured aluminum decking.
-The ledger length from 2 standards can be no more than 3.05m (10) without installing another set of
standards to extend the deck length. The transom can be no more than 1.83m (6) without installing another
set of standards to extend the deck width.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
21 of 58
2. Medium Duty
- Medium duty scaffolds can support up to 50lbs. per square foot of an evenly distributed load.
-A medium duty scaffold should have no more than 2 working platforms in use at the same time.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
22 of 58
3. Heavy Duty
- Heavy duty scaffolds can support up to 75lbs. per square foot of an evenly distributed load.
-A heavy duty scaffold should have no more than 2 working platforms in use at the same time.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
23 of 58
17. Constructing the Simple System Tower

1. Pre-Planning
-Obtain work assignment. Field visit with supervisor and discuss scaffold usage, dimensions, temporary
storage of material and material logistics, platform loading, and crew size.
-Assess the work area and document hazards, potential hazards, and eliminate if possible. Use the
company HSE Manual item, Hazard Assessments and Controls (ref # A024).
-Determine the ladder access of the scaffold, and which side it should be installed. This is probably one
of the more important items to consider when planning the scaffold build.
2.
Base
-Level ground and/or remove debris where load standards will be placed.
-Place required mud sills on ground at close proximity to scaffold dimension.
-Place scaffold jacks and collars at center of mud sill.
-Corkscrew scaffold jacks so the collar is between 6 and 1 from ground level. Do not exceed the 1 foot
maximum height; this will make the scaffold base unstable.
-Install perimeter ledgers. Place wedge in proper slotted hole but do not hammer ledger wedges.
-Determine perimeter jack that best suits the scaffold base height, and level the adjacent jack. Repeat for
the next adjacent jack till all 4 scaffold jacks are level.
-Check for level between 3rd scaffold jack and the starting jack to ensure all ledgers are level. If so,
Good Job!!!
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
24 of 58
Base (continued)
-Get a measurement diagonal on base jacks. Be sure to measure from center of top of jack to top of other
jack. Repeat for the other 2 diagonal jacks.
-If measurement differs, compress or retract scaffold base till measurements are the same, this will square
the scaffold base.
-Install the Plan Brace, this brace will be installed diagonally using swivels positioned on the ledgers.
-Once plan brace is installed, hammer swivel and ledger wedges to stabilize against possible movement.
-Position system standards in each of the 4 jacks.
-Using the buddy system, a ledger is installed with each person placing the slotted ledger ends into the 66
rosette hole.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
25 of 58
Base (continued)
-Once all 1st lift ledgers are in place, do not hammer ledger wedges, but start installing braces.
-The bay or lift braces fit most often on the outside of the standards to allow the platform decking to be installed
inside the standards.
-The brace wedges fit into the rosette holes like the ledger wedges.
-Once braces are installed hammer all wedges tight.
-Place platform decking in place.

-To start the ladder, install 2 tubes on the inside of the scaffold with right angles, the first placed between the
bottom rosette (collar), and the next rosette up. The second tube placed between the 66 rosette and the next
rosette down.
-Level both tubes and have at least 24 of tube overhang to where the ladder is installed. This will allow the
ladder tube standard to be attached.
-Attach the ladder standard at least 12 from system standard with right angles. Use a tube that can extend at
least 6 above working platform.
-Braces have been left out of illustration.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
26 of 58
3. Installing a Ladder
-Place a right angle on the ladder standard tube at least 6 from ground height. This will keep the bottom of
the ladder from collecting mud pushed up inside the bottom of the ladder.
-Install the starter bracket at mid-point to the right angle.
-Take the 5 ladder and slide the bottom into the sleeves of the starter bracket. The ladder should slide down
till the bottom rung bears against those sleeves.
-Next, slide the attached bracket on the ladder up till it bears against the underside of the top rung.
-Secure bracket to this position with a right angle, and plumb the ladder vertically.
-Attach a check clamp (assisted load bearing right angle) under each right angle clamp of the ladder
standard. This will assure load imposed on ladder is safe.
-Install another ladder by sliding the bottom into the guiding pins of the first ladder. The ladder bracket on
the second ladder remains down against the second rung from the top. Secure with right angle.
-Ladder height can be no less than 5 above working platform.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
27 of 58
4. Installing Handrails, Toeboards, and Swing Gate

-Follow the company policy for 100% tie off
-Two persons are recommended for scaffold erection when working at heights.
-Place additional standards to increase the scaffold height. The 2m standard is suggested where it is easier to
handle and decreases likelihood of dropping or slipping.
-To install another standard, simply slide into the top of the banana pin of the existing standard.
-Install ledgers for handrail leaving out the normal fitting top ledger on the ladder side. This is for the
swing-gate access point.
-For the access point attach a top handrail ledger that will leave an opening no less than 30.
-Usually for a 2m opening a 1 m ledger will be used.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
28 of 58
Installing Handrails and Swing Gate (continued)

-Attach a 5 tube vertically on the inside of the ledgers, on the 2m mid-point in access side, with right
angles. The bottom of the 5 tube should be down touching the deck. There should be at least 20 of the
5 tube above the 1m, top rail.
-Attach a swivel about (8-10) above the 1m, top rail, on the 5 tube.
-The last tube for handrail/swing-gate is a 4 or 5 tube secured to the swivel. Once attached, move the
swing-gate up and down. There must be a self-closing action on the swing-gate.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
29 of 58
18. Constructing the Simple Tube and Clamp Tower

1. Pre planning
-The pre-planning portion for all scaffolds is the same as mentioned in Constructing the Simple System
Scaffold
-Tube and Clamp scaffolds do not follow pre-set measurements for length, width or heights. Meaning they
do not have rosettes and ledgers with attachment couplers on the ends.
-Therefore tube and clamp scaffolds are very versatile, unique, and can be custom built to suit any need for
work platform.
-There is also a couple of ways to construct a tube and clamp tower scaffold. These are listed below with a
brief explanation.
-Standard to Standard-This way of building a scaffold is done by placing ALL right angles for ledgers
on the inside and attached to standards.
-English-This type of scaffold build allows 1 ledger tube attached to the standards and the parallel
ledger tube attached to the opposing standards, both at the same height level. The other 2 ledger tubes
are placed on top of those 2 fixed ledgers and secured by right angles.
Standard to Standard
English
-Advantages/Disadvantages
-The standard to standard method advantage is that, each lift has 8 points of horizontal contact to the
standard (2 at each standard). This helps with stability and overall rigidness. The disadvantage is the
flexibility of modifying the working deck.
- The English method advantage is the ability to modify the working deck by sliding a transom to
shorten the width, or inserting another transom under the deck and use a shorter plank to perhaps allow a
pipe to enter through the working platform. The disadvantage is less connections directly to the load
standards.
-Acceptable and encouraged, is combining the 2 methods. Start the base and build the tower using the
standard to standard method. All working platform transoms, and handrail, build English style.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
30 of 58
2. Base
-After determining the dimensions of the scaffold, and securing the build zone, place the mud sills on
ground in close proximity to where the tube standards would be placed.
-Put base plates on the mud sills and slide tube standard into base plate sleeve.
-Have the helper hold the standard in place, and attach a right angle between 6-12 from bottom of
standard.
-Attach the ledger to the standard.
-On the same standard attach another right angle 2 above the first right angle. Install at 90.
-After 2 ledgers are attached to the first standard install 2 standards at each ends of the ledgers.
-Remember to level as you build.
-Its a good idea to determine where the access ladder is going to be located. You can use a longer tube
at the base, on the side where the ladder will be installed.
-Finish installing the remaining tube ledgers and the standard.

-Measure each width and length so each parallel side is the same.
-Measure for scaffold square, and adjust if necessary.
-Install the plan brace.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
31 of 58
Base (continued)
-Next step is to plumb the standards using braces.
-Attach a swivel 2-3 above, or below, the first ring, (lift) of tube ledgers. The brace swivels must be no
more than a maximum of 6 from this node point.
-Select a tube that will connect diagonally from the bottom of one standard to approx. 58 of the next
standard. A rule of thumb when determining the brace length is to add 2 to whatever length the tube ledger
is. If the scaffold dimensions are 4 width and 8 length, the brace for the width side is 6, and the brace for
the length side is 10.
-Connect the brace tube to the swivel located at the base.
-Connect the other end of the brace tube to the swivel located 56 on the standard.
-Using your level, plumb this standard.
-Install the remaining 3 braces. Plumb each standard as you build.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
32 of 58
Base (continued)
-After all braces are installed, and standards are plumbed one way, we can install the second lift of tube
ledgers and plumb the standards in the other direction.
-Install 1 right angle to a standard 3-6 above the brace swivel, and attach a tube ledger.
-Install the other right angle, and hammer the wedges loosely.
-Level the ledger horizontally, and then plumb the standard vertically.
-Repeat this step for each standard.
-Remember to use a longer tube for the ladder access.

-To this point we have built standard to standard with the ledgers.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
33 of 58
3. Deck (Standard/English)
Place planks on transoms, and install the ladder access.
-The second deck installed has 4 transoms and is built English style.
-If multiple transoms are used to construct 1 working deck, remember that each load bearing node point
must have a distance no greater than 6 inches from a pick up point.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
34 of 58
19. Cantilever and Hangar Scaffolds

-Cantilever and hangars can either be built off a scaffold tower with tie-ins or free standing, or they can
be built from solid permanent structures such as pipe racking.
1. Tower Cantilever Scaffold
-The cantilevered scaffold is an outward projection of scaffold members that extend beyond the vertical
load bearing standards, and its load supported by compressed force on diagonal knee bracing.
-The general rule is that a cantilever cannot extent more than 1/3 the base for free standing scaffolds.
-The knee brace as a general rule will be positioned vertically, no less than 3 times the length of the
cantilever.
-This means on a scaffold thats 6 wide, and 6 length, the maximum allowable cantilever is 2. The
knee brace will be positioned 3 times the cantilever, which equals 6 vertical on a load bearing
standard.
-The knee brace must be fastened and secured within 6 of a node point.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
35 of 58
Tower Cantilever Scaffold (continued)

-On a cantilevered scaffold that has a tie back and anchored from movement the positioning point for the
knee brace can be at the 1:1 ratio. Meaning if the cantilever is past the standards 2 the vertical fastening
node point can be 2. This creates a 45 angle on the knee brace.
-To properly anchor and support the cantilever there is ledger tubes that must be installed to transfer the
load to the base.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
36 of 58

-Install the transom, and allow the correct distance to overhang for the cantilever.
-Attach a tube ledger with right angles under the transoms. The under slung ledger must be no farther than
6 from the end of the cantilever.
-This under slung ledger must also be a continuous tube, meaning no joiners part way in length.
Side View
Plan View
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
37 of 58

-Install a ring of scaffold ledgers attached to the standard by right angles.
-Keep the load bearing ledger to the outside of the standard.
-Attach the knee brace with right angles under the top ledger, and over on the bottom ledger.
-It is preferred to have the knee brace to the outside of the standards, but inside is acceptable as well. Keep
in mind the 6 maximum allowance from the node point.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
38 of 58

Plan View
-A face or sway brace is next to install.

-Attach a tube with swivels from top of first knee brace to bottom of second knee brace.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
39 of 58
2. Tower Hangar Scaffold

-The hangar scaffold is simply an inverted cantilever.
- The hangar scaffold is an outward projection of scaffold members that extend beyond the vertical
load bearing standards, and its load supported by retraction force on diagonal raker bracing.
-The general rule is that a hangar cannot extent more than 1/3 the base for free standing scaffolds.
-The raker brace as a general rule will be positioned vertically, no less than 3 times the length of the
hangar.
-This means on a scaffold thats 6 wide, and 6 length, the maximum allowable hangar is 2. The raker
brace will be positioned 3 times the hangar, which equals 6 vertical on a load bearing standard.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
40 of 58
Tower Hangar Scaffold (continued)

-Due to loads that could be imposed, bracing a hangar scaffold is crucial, especially for free standing
scaffolds. -The fulcrum point is closest to the hangar.
-The leverage point is farthest from the hangar, the fulcrum remains the same
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
41 of 58
3. Beam Cantilevers and Hangars
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B019

Revision # 2
September 25 2013
Controlled Document
Page #
42 of 58
20. Competency Sign Off

1st Year Scaffolder Assessment
Key Area of
Knowledge
Safety
Description
Identify and proper use of clothing PPE and attire.
(Steel toe boots, hard hat, fr coveralls, ear plugs).
Follows company procedures, policies, rules, guidelines, as well as site specific
policies.
Understands JSA, FLRA and other mandatory participation requirements.
Achieved
Not at
Skill
level
Target
Completion
Date
Mentor
Initials
Can locate emergency meeting points, muster points and follow emergency
protocols.
Demonstrate the safe storage and placement of scaffold components.
Identification
Able to identify tower scaffold

Able to identify hangar scaffold
Able to identify cantilever scaffold
Able to identify frame scaffold
Able to identify rolling scaffold
Able to identify scaffold materials and components for tube and clamp scaffold
erection
Able to identify scaffold materials and components for system scaffold erection
Able to identify scaffold materials and components for frame scaffold erection
Able to identify and demonstrate the proper tool usage for erecting and
dismantling scaffolds
Able to identify and demonstrate the proper rope knots and usage for erecting
and dismantling scaffolds
Able to identify and demonstrate the proper hand signals associated for erecting
Able to inspect, identify and tag out of service defective scaffold components.
Practical
Flag and tag work area suitable for scaffold erection, material storage, and
encompass the accidental "drop zone"
Assist with leveling ground suitable for solid scaffold base.
Assist with scaffold base on system, tube and clamp, frame towers.
Assist with install of scaffold access ladder.
Use of "twist and grab" material passing technique
Use proper knot tying techniques
Supervisor Acknowledgement;
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Section: B019
Effective Date:
Revision # 2
September 25 2013
Controlled Document
Page #
43 of 58
2nd Year Scaffolder Assessment

Key Area of
Knowledge
Safety
Description
Achieved
Not at
Skill
level
Target
Completion
Date
Mentor
Initials

policies.
protocols.
Identification
Able to identify area hazards associated with scaffold erection.

Able to foresee and add value to scaffold design in pre planning.
Capable of identifying acceptable anchor point locations.
Able to identify fall protection used for scaffold erection/ dismantle
Able to identify and demonstrate the proper hand signals associated for
erecting and dismantling scaffolds
Practical
Assist with leveling ground suitable for solid scaffold base.

Assist with scaffold base on system, tube and clamp, frame towers.
Assist with install of scaffold access ladder.
Use of "twist and grab" material passing technique
Use proper knot tying techniques
Install plan bracing, bay diagonal bracing, ledger bracing, frame cross bracing
Install right angle box beam tie, beam lip tie with right angles and beam clamp.
Simple push/pull tie.
Demonstrate and participate in scaffold material take off list.
Calculate and record scaffold material on completed scaffold erection.
Installation of transom ledgers, raker braces, knee braces,
Install ladder cage, working deck, handrails, and toe board.
Install hoarding and appropriate tie requirements.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Section: B019
Effective Date:
Revision # 2
September 25 2013
Controlled Document
Page #
44 of 58
3rd Year Scaffolder Assessment

Key Area of
Knowledge
Safety
Description
Achieved
Not at
Skill
level
Target
Completion
Date
Mentor
Initials

policies.
protocols.
Identification
Able to identify area hazards associated with scaffold erection.

Able to foresee and add value to scaffold design in pre planning.
Capable of identifying acceptable anchor point locations.
Able to identify fall protection used for scaffold erection/ dismantle
Able to identify and demonstrate the proper hand signals associated for
erecting and dismantling scaffolds
Practical
Able to erect/dismantle free standing scaffolds.

Able to erect/dismantle rolling scaffolds.
Able to assist with scaffold hangar, cantilevers erect/dismantle.
Able to install proper tie in for scaffold stability.
Advice and assist with scaffold job planning, material estimation.
Able to perform limited modifications on existing pre inspected scaffolds.
Modify handrails, toe boards, removal and replacement of node point ledgers
and braces.
Install ladder access, ladder ring, ladder cage, scaffold access point on working
deck.
Give crew task direction
Mentor 1st and 2nd year scaffolders.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
45 of 58
21. Scaffold Tags

Scaffold Inspection and Tagging
The scaffold tagging is a control measure to communicate the safe use of scaffolds, identify
any hazards and prevent scaffold use if it is unsafe to use. Workers must be aware of the
recognition and use of scaffold tags.
Scaffold tags should be placed at all potential points of access and egress.
A Red Tag must be placed on the scaffold by the scaffolding supervisor after the first
vertical component is installed on erection or prior to modification or dismantle. Only
members of the scaffolding crew are allowed on the scaffold at any time while it is tagged
red.
Scaffolds must be inspected by a competent person ensuring that the scaffold meets or
exceeds all OH&S, manufacturers, site or customer requirements, as well as industry and
company best practices.
The erector as well as the person conducting the inspection must be clearly marked on the
tag, color coded inspection tags must be affixed to all scsaffolds.
The date of inspection and the next scheduled inspection must be marked on the tag and
entered into the tag log.
The inspection interval must be determined according to OH & S minimum requirements (21
Days), minimum site or customer requirements or special conditions that may require more
frequent inspections (e.g. high vibration). The inspection interval must be entered into the
tag log. This log must be updated daily and a report generated and distributed that lists
inspections that are due.
A Green Tag indicates that the scaffold is completed and safe for use.
A Yellow Tag indicates that there are potential hazards for the end user. These hazards
must be clearly marked on the tag and any applicable conditions of use.
When the inspection record on a particular tag is full, a new tag is installed with all the
relevant information transposed from the original tag. All green and yellow scaffold tags
must be kept for a period of 2 years after use.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Author: John Snyder

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
46 of 58

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Author: John Snyder

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
47 of 58

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Author: John Snyder

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
48 of 58

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
49 of 58
22. Engineered Scaffolds
Identify specific requirements of the job. These should include: tasks to be performed,
magnitude and type of load bearing, clearances, interferences, and constructability challenges,
specifications of support structures and/or foundations, access, pictures and sketches.
Engineering must be performed by a professional engineer (P.Eng.) qualified to practice the
appropriate discipline of engineering in the appropriate jurisdiction. Review the requirements
and information provided with the engineer. Any fabrication of specially designed components
must be carried out by a fabricator with the necessary qualifications to perform that the types of
operations required. Fabrication must be performed in accordance with the design
specifications and quality assurance protocols. Review the design and specifications to ensure
the fitness for use of the design. Review the prints and specifications with the crew constructing
the scaffold and have those prints and specifications readily available to the crew during
construction. Lifting points must be clearly marked with the maximum lifting capacity.
Communicate the limits of the design with the requestor of the scaffold. Inspect the scaffold to
ensure that it is constructed in accordance with the design specifications and within the state
tolerances. Tag the scaffold indicating Engineered Scaffold on the tag and the purpose for the
scaffold. The engineer must revise the design drawings, specifications and tolerances prior to
any alteration or modification of the scaffold.
23. Scaffold Construction
Obtain any required safe work permits. Ensure that the permit is properly filled out and signed
by the issuer and receiver.
Conduct and document a Field Level Hazard Assessment (FLHA)
Determine the type, size and duty rating of scaffold to be built and that it conforms to all
legislation, manufacturer requirements and codes of practice. Ergonomic factors of the user of
the scaffold should be considered and factored into the design of the scaffold. Always try to
ensure that the failure of any one single component will not result in a catastrophic failure of
any of the working platforms.
Determine the method of construction consistent with industry and company best practices.
Ensure that foundations, support structures and tie points are capable of bearing the required
loads, ensure scaffold load limits are not exceeded.
Ensure that all required PPE is used.
Ensure that the ground in the work area and routes to the work area are properly prepared and
hazards are mitigated.
Inspect scaffold material for any flaws or damage prior to use. Any damaged or flawed material
must be immediately removed from service and tagged Danger Do Not Use.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
50 of 58
Transport material to the work area and place material in a neat secure manner.
Flag and tag work area. Ensure that flagging is not open ended and the area is large enough
to ensure the safety of workers in the vicinity. Tags must indicate purpose for the flagging, date
and contact information for the foreman responsible.
Install retractable lifelines if required. If tie off to scaffolding is part of the fall protection plan,
ensure that the methods are consistent with the procedure for doing so.
Base scaffold and use mudsills if required.
Complete platforms and accesses before continuing up to the next lift. Place planking or
decking on the lift above before ascending to the next lift.
Do not stockpile material on an incomplete deck. Secure material when stockpiling on a

completed deck.
Ensure that all wedges are properly hammered, all threaded fasteners are properly torqued and
all other fastening devices are properly installed.
Ensure that the free standing height of the scaffold does not exceed three times the minimum
base dimension at any time.
At no time should deck supporting transoms be located on the outside of the standards.
Install ladder cages or retractable lifelines to the required specifications.
Check that all the necessary components are properly installed.
Insure that the scaffolding does not create any potential hazards and if there are any potential
hazards, they should be properly mitigated and indicated on the scaffold tag.
Clean-up work area and remove any excess equipment to the designated lay down area.
24. Scaffold Equipment Handling
Mechanical means of moving scaffold equipment should be employed whenever possible to

minimize manual material handling.
Racks, baskets, bundles and pallets should be utilized wherever possible to minimize the
number of times that the equipment is manually handled.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
51 of 58
25. Scaffold Modification
Inspect scaffold for damaged components and remove any tools, material or debris from the
platforms affected by the modification. Inspect any additional equipment required prior to use. If
components are being removed from the scaffold inspect them for damage and remove from
service any damaged material.
Secure work area, install fall protection if required and determine the means of lifting/ lowering
of equipment.
Remove safe work tag and install red scaffold tags at all access points.
Perform modification on scaffold.
Mitigate and communicate any new potential hazards to your foreman so that the scaffold can
be tagged accordingly.
Clean-up work area and remove any excess equipment to the designated lay down area.
26. Scaffold Dismantle
Inspect scaffold for damaged components and remove any tools, material or debris from the
platforms. Any damaged scaffold components should be tagged red Danger Do Not Use and
removed from service.
Secure work area, install fall protection if required and determine the means of lifting/ lowering
of equipment.
Remove safe work tag and install red scaffold tags at all potential access points.
Plan the best way to handle equipment. Equipment should always be stowed in a neat and
orderly fashion. Place baskets, racks, dunnage and pallets in order to minimize handling.
Clean-up work area after dismantle is complete. Use a bar magnet on unprepared ground to
ensure no nails are left behind.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
52 of 58
Glossary of Terms
Right Angle- A device used to attach 2 members at 90

Swivel- A device used to attach 2 members at a varied angles
Base Plate- A device used to distribute load force over a larger surface area
Check Clamp- A swivel or right angle positioned directly under the load bearing right angle
designed to act as a fail-safe for platform support
Base- The relevant points where the scaffold will have contact with its support
Bay- The space between 2 adjacent vertical supports refers to length of scaffold
Lift- The space between 2 horizontal ledgers connected at the node points, (a measure of height
usually 66). 3 lifts would equal, 166 in height
Cleat- A wood or metal strip fastened to the ends of planks to prevent movement
Dead load- The total weight of the scaffold structure including decking and accessories
Node- A common shared space where vertical and horizontal members are fastened together and
occupy a 12 maximum distance
Plan Brace- a diagonal member placed horizontally designed to keep the scaffold squared
Buttress- A ridged scaffold structure that increases the base dimension to allow for the 3:1, base to
height rule
Transom- A horizontal member that supports a load bearing working platform
Sway Brace- A member positioned diagonally from 2 rakers or knee braces
Cantilever- The portion of a scaffold structure that extends horizontally outward beyond vertical
supports
Box Tie- An assembly of tubes and clamps forming a solid frame around a column, frame, or
structure
Knee Brace- A diagonal load bearing member designed to transfer weights from cantilever to a
node point positioned below the scaffold platform ( compression or push brace )
Raker- A diagonal load bearing member designed to transfer weights from a cantilever to a node
point positioned above the scaffold platform (pull brace)
Manufacturers Specifications-The written specifications, instructions or recommendations, if
any, of the manufacturer of equipment or supplies, that describes how the equipment is to be
erected, installed, assembled, handled, stored, maintained, repaired or dismantled, including a
manufacturers instruction, assembly or maintenance manual or drawings for the equipment
Scaffold Tag-The scaffold tag is a control measure to ensure the safe use of scaffolds. A
scaffold tag is provides information for the user and is typically attached at the initial point of
access that indicates the present status and state of that particular scaffold as well as the last
inspection date and next scheduled inspection. A green tag indicates safe to use, a yellow tag
indicates hazards may exist and conditions apply and a red tag indicates danger do not use
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
53 of 58
Scaffold Supervisor
Roles and Responsibilities
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
54 of 58
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Overview.4
2.0 Purpose...4
3.0 Responsibilities5
3.1 Coaching.5
3.2 Mentor.5
3.3 Advocate for Organization...5
3.4 Advocate for Employee....6
2.5 Personnel for Policies and Procedures..6
2.6 Employee Performance Management....6
2.7 Schedule/Budget....7
4.0 Skills/experience..7
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
55 of 58
1. Overview:
2.
Responsible for the Supervision of all types of scaffolding like independent access scaffolds,
birdcage scaffolds, hanging scaffolds, truss out scaffolds, cantilever scaffolds, tower scaffolds,
hoist towers and loading bays in the plant to enable project and/or maintenance works to take
place on a variety of process equipment and structures.
Coordinates and administers a team of contractor employees involved in scaffolding
throughout the plant site.
Supervises the critical activities related to preventive /corrective maintenance of plant
equipment which requires scaffolding arrangement for removal and/or installation.
Assures the compliance of proper scaffolding types and distinguishes the right scaffold for right
job.
PURPOSE:
3.
To identify clear lines of communication to the client, employees, and act as the company
representative while on and off site if in care and custody of Northern owned equipment.
Follow the established process of authority and approval for site company business.
Ensure all safety planning, and requirements are to company, client standards and OH&S Act,
Regulation and Codes.
Ensure all employees involved in described work scope are aware of their duties,
responsibilities and participate in the scope risk analysis.
Ensure appropriate training is provided to all workers involved in any site activities.
RESPONSIBILITIES:
3.1 Coaching
A good supervisor places a high priority on coaching employees.

Good coaching involves working with employees to establish suitable goals, action plans and
time lines.
The supervisor delegates and also provides ongoing guidance and support to the employee as
they complete their action plans. Rarely can job goals be established without considering other
aspects of an employee's life, e.g., time available for training, career preferences, personal
strengths and weaknesses.
A supervisor is sometimes confronted with walking a fine line between being a supervisor and
the employee's confidant.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
56 of 58
3.2 Mentor
Usually the supervisor understands the organization and the employee's profession better than
the employee. Consequently, the supervisor is in a unique position to give ongoing advice to
the employee about job and career. The employee can look to the supervisor as a model for
direction and development.
An effective mentor-mentee relationship requires the supervisor to accept the responsibility of
mentorship. A good supervisor can be a priceless addition to the career of an employee.
3.3 Advocate for Organization
Often, the supervisor is the first person to tell employees about new policies and programs
from management. It's not uncommon that employees are confused or frustrated by these new
actions, and need further clarification and support from supervisors.
In the rapidly changing world of today's organizations, it can be a major challenge to present
new programs to employees without their being frustrated or even cynical. The supervisor
must be authentic, yet tactful.
3.4 Advocate for Employee
The supervisor is often responsible to represent the employee's requests and to management,
along with also representing the employee's case for deserving a reward. For example, if an
employee deserves a promotion, the supervisor often must justify the case for promotion to the
supervisor's supervisor, as well.
3.5 Personnel Policies and Procedures
Ensure that all scaffolding arrangement, installation or dismantles activities, are carried out in
compliance with companys underlying health, safety and environmental guidelines and
procedure.
Participates and conducts daily /weekly safety toolbox talks with team of contractors involved
in scaffolding arrangement activities.
The supervisor is responsible to ensure that employees follow the organization's policies and
procedures, e.g., for sick time, personal leave, overtime, contact with the media or press, and
confidentiality about the organization information.
Concurrently, the supervisor must follow policies and procedures for carrying out supervisory
responsibilities, e.g., policies and procedures for hiring, firing, promotions.
Author: John Snyder

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Section: B019
Page #
57 of 58
3.6 Employee Performance Management
Supervisors ensure that job descriptions accurately record the primary responsibilities,
qualifications and terms for each job role in their group.
Supervisors set performance standards for tasks, jobs and roles for the workers under their
direction.
Ensure employees have appropriate and realistic task job goals. Provide ongoing feedback
about the employee's performance.
Conduct performance appraisals on a regular basis, including assessing how the employee
has performed and what they can do to improve in their jobs.
3.7 Schedule/Budget
Organizes and coordinates with respective workforce to ensure compliance of daily schedule
for scaffolding arrangement activities.
Coordinates with operations, planning & other execution departments for efficient delivery of
scaffolding arrangement services.
Ensures compliance of scaffolding arrangement activities as per PM plan so as to reduce
down time and optimize resource utilization.
Maintains records of work performed and work in progress, track daily weekly progress
reports, force reports, scaffold requests, and scaffold inspections.
Assist in preparing short & long term schedule, budget so as to familiarize the actual work plan
for scaffolding arrangement smoothly in line with plant requirements.
4 Skills/Experience
4 to 6 years experience in the scaffolding activities in an oil/gas/petrochemical or Power Plants

Previous experience in a supervisors role
Good communication skills, knowledge of English, written & spoken
Must have excellent knowledge of the scaffolding materials, use and function.
Must possess logic thinking for scaffold arrangements
Knowledge in computers, preference in Microsoft Excel applications
Good leadership skills to handle high pressure situations under stress
Roles and responsibilities acceptance;
______________________________
Sign
Author: John Snyder
__________________
Date

Scaffolding
Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B019

September 25 2013
Revision # 2
Controlled Document
Page #
58 of 58
Statement of Purpose and Disclaimer
This manual and any application or reference to the information contained within is intended to provide
basic information related to common types of scaffolds and their use. This information do not address all
currently know designs, applications and conditions the scaffold material may be subjected to, and
cannot anticipate site requirements to the end user.
This manual does not supersede government compliance or regulations with respect to equipment use
and workplace safety. Persons responsible for the use of related scaffold equipment mentioned in this
manual are accountable and responsible for ensuring applicable government requirements are satisfied.
Northern Access Systems Inc. assumes no liability to any purchaser or user for any and all losses,
injuries, or damage resulting from the use of information contained within this manual.
Author: John Snyder


Title:
Confined Space Entry
Effective Date:
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
Issued: January 25 2013
1 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B020

Revision # 1
July 25 2013
DATE
Controlled Document
Page #
2 of 26
DESCRIPTION
Nov-13
Add: Training and hazards of H2S
10
Nov-13
6.0 Not exceed 10 ppm over 8hr period
11
Nov-13
Do not exceed 15 ppm exposure at any time
13
Nov-13
Add: 6.5 H2S Release

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
3 of 26
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4
2.0
PURPOSE ................................................................................................................................................... 4
3.0
SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
4.0
DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 4
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................................................ 8
6.0
PROCEDURES .........................................................................................................................................10
7.0
APPENDIX ................................................................................................................................................14
7.1 IS IT A CONFINED SPACE ( FLOW CHART ) ....................................................................................................14

7.2 CONFINED SPACE HAZARD ASSESSSMENT ...................................................................................................15
7.3 CODE OF PRACTICE WORK SHEET ................................................................................................................17
7.4 WORK PROCEDURE .....................................................................................................................................18
7.5 TENDING WORKER ......................................................................................................................................22
7.6 EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN .....................................................................................................................23
7.7 SAMPLE CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT ..................................................................................................25
7.8 TENDING WORKER ENTRY/ EXIT CHECKLIST ..............................................................................................26

Title:
Effective Date:
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
4 of 26
Working inside confined spaces present many hazards and risks. This procedure
will identify the Confined Space Entry requirements to ensure all work is properly
assessed and controlled prior to entry, to protect the health and safety of
workers.
1.0
PURPOSE
2.0
To identify confined spaces and provide risk / hazard assessments and

required controls
Establish a process for authorizing entry into a confined space
To ensure all identified hazards are managed prior to and during confined
space entry
To ensure all parties involved in confined space work are aware of their duties
and responsibilities
To ensure appropriate training is provided to all workers involved in confined
space entry work.
SCOPE
All company employees, sub-contractors and visitors.
WARNING:
This procedure, permit or workers qualifications do not cover or authorize

immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) confined space entries.
This company does not as a rule conduct confined space entries unless
directed by the client, in which case the client must have a procedure equal to
or better than this in place, the client must specify if OSSA training is required.
Low risk confined space entries can become high risk due to work activities
conducted in the confined space, eg., spray painting, welding etc.
Additional procedures that may apply to confined space entry
3.0
Respiratory Code of practice

Energy Isolation LOTO (Lock Out/Tag Out)
Gas detection
Elevated Work and Fall Protection
DEFINITIONS
4.1
CONFINED SPACE
As defined in section 1 of the OHS Code, a confined space is an enclosed
or partially enclosed space that is not designed or intended for human
occupancy with restricted, limited or impeded means of entry or exit

Title:
Effective Date:
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
5 of 26
because of its construction and may become hazardous to a worker

entering it because of
a. An atmosphere that is or may be injurious by reason of oxygen
deficiency or enrichment, flammability, explosivity, or toxicity,
b. A condition or changing set of circumstances within the space that
present a potential for injury or illness, or
c. The potential or inherent characteristics of an activity which can
produce adverse or harmful consequences within the space.
4.2
RESTRICTED SPACE
Is defined as an enclosed or partially enclosed space, not designed or
intended for continuous human occupancy, that has a restricted, limited or
impeded means of entry or exit because of its construction.
A restricted space can be thought of as a work area in which the only
hazard is the difficulty in getting into and out of the space all other
hazards have been eliminated or controlled in accordance with Part 2 of
the OHS code. Examples of restricted spaces may include building attics,
below- ground vaults and some crawl spaces in buildings. Keep in mind
that a restricted space can become a confined space if conditions or work
practices change.
4.3
CONFINED SPACE MONITOR

means a person defined in legislation as a tending worker adequately
trained and certified, capable of summoning rescue assistance and
assigned to remain on the outside of the Confined Space while
maintaining communication with those working inside.
4.4
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
An established method of communication between workers inside the
confined space and the confined space monitor, as well as the Emergency
Response contact.
4.5
TRAINED WORKERS
Workers / Supervision who have attended a formal instructor led training
program from an accredited training agency and have certification specific
to confined spaces, training on the hazards of H2S and safe work
procedures.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.6
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
6 of 26
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT

A document that is used to conduct a hazard assessment of a confined
space by a person qualified to the physical/chemical hazards, required
testing, safe guards, rescue procedures etc. of that particular site. The
permit must contain the following information
4.7
List the name of each worker who enters the confined space and the
reason for entry
Provide the location of the confined space
Specify the time period for which the entry permit is valid
Take into account the work being done in the confined space and the
safety precautions that must be taken
Be posted at the entrance of the confined space where the work is
being conducted
ENTRY
The action by which a worker passes through an opening into a confined
space. Entry is considered to have occurs when the workers breathing
zone crosses the plane of the confined space access.
4.8
RESCUE PLAN
A plan developed before confine space work commences addressing
rescue equipment, location of equipment, rescue personnel requirements,
means of communication and implementation of rescue.
4.9
LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL)

The air/fuel mixture below which the fuel mixture is to lean to burn.
4.10
UPPER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (UEL)

The air/fuel mixture above which the fuel mixture is to rich to burn.
4.11
EXPLOSIVE RANGE
The area between the UEL and LEL that potential foe explosion exists.
4.12
OXYGEN DEFICIENT
Any atmosphere below 19.5 % oxygen by volume at normal atmospheric
pressure.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.13
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
7 of 26
OXYGEN ENRICHED
Any atmosphere over 23 % oxygen by volume at normal atmospheric
pressure.
4.14
TENDING WORKER
The role of the tending worker is to monitor the safety of the person(s)
working inside the confined space and to take action if an emergency or
release arises. The tending worker must have a suitable system for
summoning assistance. The tending worker must be trained in confined
space, the evacuation procedures in the emergency response plan and be
present outside a confined space, at or near the entrance, if
o The oxygen content of the atmosphere inside the confined space is
less than 19.5% by volume
o The oxygen content of the atmosphere inside the confined space is
greater than 23.0 percent by volume,
o The concentration of a substance listed in schedule 1, Table 2 of
the OHS Code inside the confined space is greater than 50 percent
of its occupational exposure limit, or
o A hazard other than one listed above is identified by the hazard
assessment and the hazard cannot be eliminated or effectively
controlled.
The tending worker must also
o Keep track at all times of the number of workers inside the confined
space
o Is in constant communication with workers inside the confined
space
o Must not leave the area until all workers have left the confined
space or another tending worker is in place.
4.15
IDHL IMMEDIATELY DANGEROUS to LIFE or HEALTH

Means an oxygen deficient atmosphere or an atmospheric concentration
of any harmful substance that poses an immediate threat to life or may
cause irreversible or delayed adverse health effects or may interfere with
an individuals ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
4.16
INERTING
The process of introducing a substance into a confined space, usually an
inert gas, such as nitrogen, to render the contaminants present nonreactive, preventing fire or explosion hazards.

Title:
Effective Date:
4.17
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
8 of 26
PURGING
Method of removing contaminants from a confined space by using
liquids (water) or non- flammable gases (carbon dioxide or nitrogen).
4.18
SCBA
Self Contained Breathing Apparatus : with an air cylinder connected
to a full face piece which operates in the positive pressure mode and has
a minimum rated capacity of 30 minutes.
4.19
SABA
A respiratory unit with a full face piece which operates in the positive
pressure mode, attached to an air supply through a pressure regulator.
This apparatus normally draws air through an air hose connected to large
air cylinders or pump units.
4.20
CARTRIDGE STYLE RESPIRATORS

A full or half mask respirator which uses interchangeable cartridges to
filter out contaminated dusts, fibers, mist, vapors or gasses from the
ambient air. Appropriate cartridges are selected to filter out specific
contaminants involved. This style of respirator MUST NOT be used in
oxygen deficient/enriched or other Immediately Dangerous to Life or
Health (IDLH) atmospheres.
4.21
ATMOSPHERIC TESTING
Atmospheric testing must be must be conducted and results recorded for
Oxygen content, Toxic gases and Flammable vapors, the person
designated to conduct testing must be suitably trained and qualified in the
use of testing equipment. Only monitors equipped with a pump that are
bump tested and calibrated are acceptable for testing a confined space
atmosphere. All results must be recorded on the entry permit. The person
performing the tests must know what product (s) were recently
stored in the process area or vessel.
5.0
RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
PROJECT/CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS
Ensure all confined space work is performed with the site specific
procedure

Title:
Effective Date:
5.2
Controlled Document
Page #
9 of 26
Ensure all personnel working in confined spaces and associated work

are trained to do so
Ensure appropriate PPE is available before any work commences.
Ensure rescue services are in place before work commences
Ensure all confine space entry records are retained and copies are on
site and the main office
Must be trained in confined space

Will receive the confined space entry permit from the client and review
it with all persons involved in the confined space along with FLHA
Will verify all permit requirements have been performed, (e.g.,
isolations, lock out tag out, purging, inerting and ventilation systems
are in place) along with all other procedures and equipment that are
associates with the confined space work
Will ensure initial atmospheric testing has been completed prior to
receiving the permit
Will assess for conflicting job tasks that may affect, or have the
potential to affect, the safety of the employees that will be in the
confined space
Verify the Emergency Response Team is available prior to receiving
confined space permit
CORPORATE HSE MANAGER
5.4
Revision # 1
SUPERINTENDENT
5.3
July 25 2013
Section: B020
Approve any deviation from this procedure

Approve all IDHL confined space entries
Arrange training for confined space work
Ensure all training tickets are current and copies are kept on site and
the database at office
Audit confined space paper work
Approve use of clients procedures for confined space entry
WORKERS/ENTRANTS
Must be trained and have current ticket in confined space

Follow all confined space procedures
Able to communicate with the tending worker at all times
Conduct FLHA prior to entry into confined space
Have all required PPE before entering confined space
Inspect all PPE involved with the work prior to entry
Ensure an entry permit is in place prior to entry

Title:
Effective Date:
5.5
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
10 of 26
Ensure the entry plan is completed and posted near the entrance to
the confined space area
Ensure the written plan identifies specific entry and exit procedures,
availability and location of additional PPE or other safety equipment,
requirements and rescue procedures to be used in the event and
emergency arises. See appendix in this section for reference
SITE SAFETY ADVISOR(S)
Will be trained in confined space

Will monitor confined space work to ensure all procedures and record
keeping are being followed
NOTE: Certain confined spaces may be deemed low risk and would not
require a continuous Tending Worker. Before a confined space can be
downgraded to low risk, the client and site management must meet the
following
6.0
The confined space can be accessed easily

There are no issues for providing assistance for ill or injured workers or
rescue
Confined space has not contained any controlled products, e.g.,
process equipment, sewers, etc
The work within the confined space is non-hazardous (e.g., welding,
cutting, painting, etc is high hazard work)
Site supervision and client concur and authorizes on FLHA the
confined space is low risk
Workers are monitored regularly
PROCEDURE
Before entering a confined space:
Complete a pre job assessment with client and all workers involved with
confined space work
Ensure a confined space entry permits is issued and posted near the
entrance to the confined space and followed during activities
All PPE and required safety equipment are to be on location prior to
commencing work
Only trained workers are allowed to enter a confined space
Workers exposure to H2S must not exceed the occupational exposure limit of
10 ppm over an 8 hr period.

Title:
Effective Date:
6.1
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
11 of 26
A site specific confined space entry plan, rescue plan, hazard assessment
and confined space entry permit must be completed and posted near the
entrance. They must be reviewed and signed by all workers
All equipment must be properly isolated from any source of gas, vapors, liquid
or electrical/mechanical energy blinding, blanking etc
All equipment must be isolated and /or locked out and tagged
All purging must be completed prior to work
Workers must not be exposed to a concentration of H2S exceeding 15 ppm at
any time.
Intrinsically safe pneumatic air movers should be used, air movers must be
supplied with clean air and not situated in areas where other contaminants
may be picked up
All ignition sources in or near the confined space must be eliminated or
controlled
A GFI (ground fault interrupter) protection will be used with all power source
outside the confined space
Light bulbs should be shatter and explosion proof
All existing and potential confined space locations will be identified with signs
stating CONFINED SPACE, ENTER BY PERMIT ONLY
All proper PPE will be worn at all times
Ensure a rescue team is available before work commences
Limitations and capabilities of workers must be considered while developing
site specific rescue procedure (individuals who have phobias about working
at heights or in tight spaces are susceptible to panic attacks which could
result in injury to themselves or others)
ATMOSPHERIC TESTING
Atmospheric testing should only be done by a qualified person that is
Suitably trained and qualified to do so in the use of testing equipment
In addition they shall:
Know the capabilities and limitation of the equipment

Ensure equipment has been calibrated and checked as per
manufactures recommendations
Retain maintenance and calibration records for all testing equipment
Test the confined space atmosphere and document the results on the
confined space entry permit
Ensure atmosphere is tested again after breaks prior to individuals reentering the space
Identify the gas testing frequency and record test results on the entry
permit

Title:
Effective Date:
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
12 of 26
They must check the atmosphere and record results for :
6.2
Oxygen Content Must be maintained between 19.5 and 23% by

volume in air. If the atmosphere is oxygen deficient then SCBA or
SABA must be worn prior to entry. Oxygen enrichment by even a small
percentage will increase the flammable limits. Confined space is not
permitted when the oxygen content exceeds 23% by volume in air.
Toxic Gases- Toxic levels are usually reached before explosive or
flammable limits. Testing for toxic gases is usually done with detector
tubes or with electronic monitoring equipment in order to determine
actual concentration levels. If toxic gases are present above the OEL
then respiratory protection is required.
Flammable Vapors- Gas testing must be conducted to determine if a
potentially explosive condition exists within a vessel that previously
contained a flammable product. Where gas density is heavier than air,
the vapor will tend to collect in lower areas and along the bottom of
confined spaces. Where the gas density is lighter than air, the gases
will tend to concentrate in overhead pockets along ceiling areas of
confined spaces. Upper explosive limits and lower explosive limits are
expressed in percent by volume in air. Any concentration above the
LEL and below the UEL is explosive and NO worker shall enter a
confined space when the atmosphere is greater than 20% of the LEL.
Fire Protection
If flammable or explosive dusts, gasses, vapors, or liquids are present or
near confined spaces fire protection equipment must be provided. Prior to
worker entry, at least one 30lb ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher must
be positioned near the entrance of the confined space.
6.3
Traffic Hazards
Workers within a confined space must be protected from traffic hazards
such as idling vehicles situated outside the space that could contaminate
the space with exhaust or parked vehicles that could interfere with exiting
or rescue operations
6.4
Retaining Records
All entry permits, air monitoring data, worker entry records and other
applicable information related to each confined space entry will be
returned to the supervisor for retention. Records will be retained for
One year if no incident or unplanned event occurred during the entry

Two years if an incident or unplanned event occurred during the entry

Title:
Effective Date:
6.5
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
13 of 26
Training records will be kept on file for workers who enter the confined
space.
H2S Release
In the event of an H2S release / alarm the following steps must be taken:
Evacuate the area immediately as there may be hazardous

concentrations of H2S in the area. Move upwind or crosswind from
the release to higher ground if possible.
Notify operations there is a release by sounding the plant alarm or
communicating via radio.
Assess the situation and do a headcount ensure all your employees
are accounted for and consider other hazards in the area.
If you are qualified rescue personnel and have SCBA/SABA
training and are part of the rescue team put on SCBA/SABA. If not,
summon help from qualified rescuers and DO NOT ATTEMPT A
RESCUE on your own.
If safe to do so rescue victim with back up or assistance from
another qualified rescuer, ensure help is on the way. Remove
victim to fresh air (upwind if possible)
If you are qualified, revive victim by applying artificial respiration or
CPR on the victim until the victim revives or until help arrives.
Ensure victim is transported to a medical aid facility and all
necessary information is provided to Emergency Medical Services.
WARNING:
New or inexperienced workers must be teamed with trained
experienced workers. At no time will an inexperienced worker be
authorized to enter a confined space alone.

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
14 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B020

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Yes
Page #
15 of 26
No

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
16 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
17 of 26
Code of Practice Work Sheet

Date: _______________________
Name: ___________________________________________
Company Site: ______________________________________________________________________

Work Site: _________________________________________________________________________
Confined Space Location: _____________________________________________________________
Confined Space Identification Number: ___________________________________________________
Code of Practice Prepared by: __________________________________________________________
Name: __________________________________ Telephone Number: _________________________

Title:
Effective Date:
July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
18 of 26
______________________________
Test for : _________________________________________________________________________

Equipment : ______________________________________________________________________
Equipment Calibration : _____________________________________________________________
Test frequency :
Before entry : ______________________________
During entry : ______________________________
After entry : ______________________________
Other : __________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
19 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
20 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
21 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
22 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
23 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
24 of 26

Title:
Effective Date:

Revision # 1
July 25 2013
Controlled Document
Section: B020
Page #
25 of 26
Lifelines

Title:
Effective Date:
Section: B020

July 25 2013
Revision # 1
Controlled Document
Page #
26 of 26
Tending Worker : Entry /Exit Checklist

Date : ________________________
Safety Watch Name : ______________________________________________________________
NAME OF ENTRANTS
TIME IN
TIME OUT
NAME OF ENTRANTS
TIME IN
TIME OUT
All personnel under my charge have withdrawn from the confined space. " Danger - Do not Enter" signs have been installed.
Safety watch signature : _______________________________
Date : ______________________

Safety Manual Part B PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Safety Manual Part B PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

HS&E Reference Number: B001

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

REV No. AFFECTED PAGE(S)

May 20, 2009 Updates as per Alberta OH&S 2009

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

APPENDICES ......................................................................................................... ..35

CRANE JOB SAFETY CHECKLIST..36

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

Identify minimum crane operation requirements for hydraulic, conventional

All company facilities, employees and subcontractors.

Anti-two Block Device A device that, when activated, produces and

Boom A member hinged to the rotating superstructure and used for

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

Boom Truck A hydraulically powered mechanical device or structure

Brake A device used for retarding or stopping motion by means of

Non-Standard Lift When conditions are not optimal, lifts shall be

Competent Adequately qualified, suitable trained and with sufficient

Rough Terrain Crane (RT)

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

Any lift exceeding 75% capacity of Crane/Rigging

Designated Signaler A person designated and competent to give

Direct Supervision Under the supervision of a competent worker who is

Jib An extension to a boom that is attached to the boom tip to provide

Load Indicating Device A device that measures and indicates the

Manufacturers Rated Capacity The maximum capacity, speed, load,

Issued: July 14, 2006

Controlled Document Reference Number: B001

HS&E Procedures Manual

Cranes, Hoists and Rigging

Effective Date: May 20, 2009

Manufacturers Specifications The written specifications, instructions

Operate Includes using or handling the machinery or equipment by

Outrigger Extendable or fixed metal arms, attached to the mounting

Overhead/Gantry Crane A crane and hoist that is mounted on a bridge

Power Controlled Lowering A system or device in the power train,

Professional Engineer A professional Engineer under the Engineering,

Rigging Refers to both of the following:

The hardware and equipment used to safely attach a load to a lifting

Special Rigging Rigging equipment or systems that are not a normal

Issued: July 14, 2006